Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20General SciencesEFFECTIVENESS OF MENTORING IN NEYVELI LIGNITE CORPORATION (NLC)
English0106S.ChandrasekarEnglishMentoring consist of establishing formal relationships between junior and the senior colleagues. The main objective is to find the opinion and their satisfaction level in the mentoring relationship. The type of research design used is descriptive in nature and the required data has been generated using a research instrument called the questionnaire to a sample of 103 employees. Convenience sampling procedure is used in this survey. The structured questionnaire consists of open ended like multiple choice questions, close ended, etc. The period of study is for three months. The collected data has been+ analyzed using various statistical tools like, one sample run test, chi square test. From the survey it is found that the mentoring program is effective in the organization and the relationship is excellent
EnglishINTRODUCTION
Coaching and mentoring are learning relationships which help people to take charge of their own development, to release their potential and to achieve results which they value .Mentors are people who, through their action and work, help others to achieve their potential. The success of coaching and mentoring is in the establishment of an effective relationship, based upon mutual respect, honesty and understanding. A mentor doesn’t necessarily have to be someone senior to you in the organisation, but rather needs to have the motivation and training to support you (the mentee) in your development. It goes without saying that other qualities such as a varied career and life experience, a wide professional network and commitment to their own development will enrich the mentoring relationship. A mentor does not give advice, rather helps the mentee to weigh up situations, through a process of reflection, questions, challenge and feedback allowing the mentee to come to a decision themselves. It is crucial to remember that in any mentoring relationship it is the mentee who drives the agenda, not the mentor. Objectives of the Study
To find the factors influencing the mentoring program.
To find the effect of the employees after the mentoring program.
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Descriptive Research
Descriptive studies are undertaken in many circumstances. When the research is interested in knowing the characteristic of certain groups such as age, sex, education level, occupation or income, a descriptive study may be necessary. Target Repondents A population can be defined as including all people or items with the characteristic one wish to understand. Because there is very rarely enough time or money to gather information from everyone or everything in a population, the goal becomes finding a representative sample (or subset) of that population.
LIMITATIONS
Due to confidential nature of their concern respondents in many cases were unwilling to provide all the information, so the same information may be accessed.
Analyzing data consumes more time.
The study is limited to errors which might have occurred unknowingly.
PROPOSED SAMPLING METHODS
Convenience sampling is used in descriptive research where the researcher is interested in getting an inexpensive approximation of the truth. As the name implies, the sample is selected because they are convenient. This non probability method is often used during preliminary research efforts to get a gross estimate of the results, without incurring the cost or time required to select a random sample.
DATA PROCESSING
Primary Sources Primary data are those collected specifically for the purpose of the study under consideration .It is more direct source of information. The primary data collection considered in the study of this project is questionnaire method along with survey method. Secondary Sources Secondary data means data that are already available i.e. It refer to the data which have already been collected and analyzed by someone else.
TOOLS FOR ANALYSIS
CHI-SQUARE TEST-1
AIM:
To find there is any relationship between Age and the Career development
RESULT
So reject Ho, accept H1. There is significant relationship between age and career development.
CHI-SQUARE TEST-2
AIM
To find the relationship between the experience and the job satisfaction after the mentoring program.
HYPOTHESIS
Null hypothesis (Ho):
There is no significant relationship between experience and the job satisfaction. Alternative hypothesis (H1):
There is some significant relationship between experience and the job satisfaction.
RESULT
So accept H0 (The sequence of items (y and n) are random).
FINDINGS
There is significant relationship between age and career development.
There is some significant relationship between the experience and the job satisfaction.
The sequence of items (y and n) is random.
The sequence of items (y and n) are random
SUGGESTIONS
1. Majority of the employees are suffering from stress. So stress reducing activities like management games, counseling can be conducted.
2. Majority expects management support is essential for mentoring, so it has to be concentrated.
3. Majority of the employees expect training should be interactive in order to satisfy the training.
4. Most of the employees say that mentoring has to motivate the employees to change the behavior.
RECOMMENDATIONS
1. The duration of the mentoring program has to be conducted twice in a year in order to develop a strong relationship.
2. Mentoring Objectives has to be framed in such a way that company policies should not affect the mentoring program.
3. The mentors should concentrate on the problems and in solving the grievance of the employees to increase a level of interpersonal relation.
CONCLUSION
From the study it is concluded that mentoring program improves the employee attitude in the organization .It also enhances the positive aspect of work environment as employees plays a major role in productivity, the management may further improve the mentoring process more feasible so it may field a good fortune in mere future.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1608http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16081. Dr.P.N.Arora, S.Arora, 2010, Statistics for management, 5th edition, S.Chand publishing, New Delhi.
2. S.k.Bhatia, Dr Abad Ahmad, 2005, Training and Development Concepts and Practices, Deep &Deep publication, NewDelhi.
3. Christina M.Underhill,April 2006,’journal Of Vocational Behavior’,vol.68,No.2,pp.292-307.
4. Margaret Andrews,Frances Chilton,March 2002,’Student and mentor perception of mentoring effectiveness’,vol.20,No.7,pp.555- 562.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20General SciencesISOLATION OF CELLULOSE DEGRADING BACTERIA AND YEASTS FROM PINEAPPLE WASTE
English0714Catherine G.English Vanitha N.M.EnglishThere’s a current interest in the economic conversion of renewable resources into industrially useful products. For this a large number of agriculture wastes have been harnessed.. Of this pineapple waste is one of them. The ability of different bacterial and yeast strains isolated from ripe pineapple peels waste to degrade cellulose from pineapple wastes was investigated by assessing cellulose decomposition by the method of cellulose Congo red agar media hydrolysis capacity (HC-value). Of the 8 isolates screened for their fermentation ability, 6 showed enhanced performance and were subsequently identified and assessed for cellulose degradation and amounts of glucose produced. Solid state fermentation was carried out in flasks containing pineapple peel waste and pulp wastes as substrates and inoculums of 10% size was cultured in a rotary shaker at a pH of 4.5 and at temperatures ranging from 220 C, 270C, 320C and 350C for 21 days. Cellulose degradation and amounts of glucose produced by 4 test organisms and 1 positive organism in both peel and pulp of pineapple was determined. The highest amount of cellulose degradation and glucose formation was produced by the bacterial isolate PPP04 for peel waste and the yeast isolate YP02 for pulp waste. The present study was undertaken to identify bacteria and yeasts which could degrade cellulose and that which could be used for their degrading ability for commercial production of ethanol and vinegar.
Englishcellulose, pineapple wastes, isolates, fermentation, substrates.INTRODUCTION
Cellulose is a polymer of glucose and is the most abundant organic material in nature. It is however resistant to decomposition. A large number of bacteria, fungi and actinomycetes are known to degrade cellulose. The substrates of compost with primary components of plant material such as cellulose, hemicelluloses and lignin are rather difficult to biodegrade and reduce the availability of other polymers by means of a physical restriction (Ladisch et al., 1983). Several methods for enumerating cellulose utilizing microbes have been described which include liquid media (Smith, R E, 1977) and solid media (Teather and Wood, 1982) for quantification of cellulose utilizing bacteria. Pineapple waste, consisting mainly of cellulose and starch, was suggested as a substrate for production of valuable fermentation and non fermentation products (Tewari et al.1987). In the past, pineapple waste from canneries has been utilized as substrate for bromelin, vinegar, wine, food /feed and organic acid (Dev and Ingle, 1982). Various strains of indigenous yeasts capable of producing ethanol have been isolated from different local sources such as molasses (Rose, 1976), sugar mill effluents (Anderson et al., 1986), local fermented foods (Ameh et al., 1989) and fermented pineapple juice (Eghafona et al., 1999). Pineapple (Ananas comosus) is one of the commercially important fruit crops of India.
Total annual world production is estimated at 14.6 million tonnes of fruits. India is the fifth largest producer of pineapple with an annual output of about 1.2 million tones. (Database of National Horticulture Board, Ministry of Agriculture, Govt. of India, 2002). The objective of present study is therefore to study the potential of cellulose degrading bacteria and yeast on Pineapple wastes, isolated from pineapple peel.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Source of Pineapple fruit
For isolation of microorganisms, Pineapple fruit wastes were obtained from the dump yard of Kalsipalyum, K R Market, Bangalore, while for fermentation, ripe Pineapple fruit was procured from hopcoms, a common vegetables and fruits outlet of Lalbagh Farmers Association, Bangalore. The pineapple fruit wastes from the dump yard were used within 24hrs after collection. When the peels could not be used, they were stored in the refrigerator to prevent deterioration. However, the stored fruit peels were used within 48 hrs.
Isolation of microorganisms from pineapple peel
1g of rotting pineapple peel was serially diluted and plated on two different media viz., a. Nutrient agar and b. Saborauds’s Dextrose agar, using pour plate technique described by Madigan et al., (1997). All the plates were incubated at 300C, for 24 – 48 hrs for bacteria and yeast. Growth of bacteria on SDA was avoided by the addition of 0.003% (w/v) of the antibiotic – streptomycin sulphate. Similarly growth of fungus on nutrient agar was avoided by the addition of 0.004% (w/v) of the antibiotic –actidione (cyclohexamide).
Characterization and Identification
This has been done using procedures described for bacteria and Barnett et al (1983) for fungi and yeast. The identification parameters included – morphological characterization of each isolate that included: color, size, colony characteristics microscopic features like gram staining for bacteria, simple staining for yeasts. The bacterial isolates were further subjected to biochemical tests like IMViC and carbohydrate fermentation which included sugars such as glucose, sucrose, maltose and lactose. This was done to prove the isolates as bacteria.
Maintenance of bacterial and yeast isolates
From the bacterial isolates only the bacterial rods were chosen and further maintained on enrichment media consisting of yeast extract- 0.1% (v/v), peptone-0.5% (v/v), CaCO3 -0.2% (v/v), NaCl0.12% (v/v). The yeast strains were maintained on SDA slants.
Assessment of bacteria and yeasts for attributes of Cellulose degradation
Each bacterial and yeast isolate were further screened by using pure cellulose powder of Himedia grade. For assessing cellulose hydrolysis by the method of carboxymethylcellulose hydrolysis capacity (HC-value), by growing each isolate on the cellulose Congo-red agar medium by streak plate technique, i.e., the ratio of diameter of clearing of zone around the colony (Hankin and Anagnostakis, (1977); Hendricks et al., (1995); Reese et al (1950). The isolates with HC values were selected and maintained on the respective maintenance medium. A positive cellulose degrading bacteriaCellulomonas. uda, NCIM no. 2353, ATCC no. 21399 and an yeast – Saccharomyces. cerevisiae.var.ellipsoides NCIM no. 3494, ATCC no. 24702 was procured from NCL, Pune; and used as standard organism ie., to compare the cellulose degrading activity with that of the isolates.
Pretreatment of Pineapple peel and pulp for fermentation activity
The pineapple was skinned off the peel using a knife that was disinfected with 70% ethanol. The waste substrates used in the study were pineapple peel and pineapple pulp. Both of which were fermented separately with different isolates.
2.7 Processing Specific quantity of Pineapple peel, 100g was taken and mixed with hot sterilized distilled water of equal quantity and mashed in an electric blender to obtain a semisolid mixture. About 200ppm of potassium meta- bi- sulphite was added to further kill away any local micro-flora of the pineapple peel. Similarly, pineapple pulp mash was also prepared by the above mentioned process. Various parameters such as initial cellulose content, Brix content, pH, titrable acidity and volatile acidity were noted before introducing the peel mash and the pulp mash separately into sterilized 250 ml reagent bottles. Three bacterial isolates and the standard organism were then inoculated separately into the peel mash. Similarly four yeast isolates and one standard yeast were inoculated into the pineapple pulp mash. A constant pH of 4.5 was maintained in all the reagent bottles. The organisms were then incubated at four different temperatures viz., 220C, 270C, 320C and 350C. Estimation of Cellulose and glucose content in the pineapple peel and pulp were estimated after 21 days of incubation by anthrone method, Hedge and Hofreiter (1962) and by DNS method, Miller, G.L. (1959), respectively.
RESULTS
Isolation of microorganisms from pineapple peel
About 22 bacteria have been isolated from Pineapple peel. These bacterial isolates have been named as PPP01 to PPP22. Of the 22 isolates, only six isolates were found to be bacilli, the remaining ones were cocci. From these six bacilli, only three bacilli viz., PPP13, PPP04 and PPP16 is used for the study, depending upon the HC value obtained by the carboxymethylcellulose hydrolysis capacity by cultivating it on cellulose Congo -red agar media. The yeast isolates, have been mentioned as YP01 to YP12. Of the 12 yeast isolates only four yeasts were used for the study, again depending upon the HC value obtained by the carboxymethylcellulose hydrolysis capacity on cultivating it on cellulose Congo -red agar media.
Biochemical tests
Of the 22 bacterial isolates subjected to biochemical tests viz., IMViC and carbohydrate fermentation – glucose, lactose, maltose and sucrose. All the isolates showed positive tests for one or the other biochemical tests. It has been commonly observed that, all the isolates fermented glucose and maltose producing gas/ acid or both, as evident from gas formation in the Durham’s tube and change in the colour of bromo-cresolpurple (BCP) from purple to yellow colour. It is also noticed that all the 22 isolates of bacteria showed no response in fermenting sucrose and lactose, as the colour of BCP in the test tubes solutions continued to remain purple. The formation of gas in Durham’s tube was absent, but growth could be seen, as evident by the development of turbidity in the test tube, compared to the control. Another important observation made was of the isolate PPP07. This isolate showed negative to all the tests under IMViC and fermentation of sugars, although growth was seen in the test tubes with sucrose, lactose and maltose. This probably points to the isolate PPP07 not being a bacteria. Assessment of bacteria and yeasts for attributes of Cellulose degradation After 36hrs of incubation at 320 C, a clear zone has been formed around the streak of growth for each isolate. The zone of clearing was highest 0.75cm for the bacterial isolate PPP04 and 0.76cm for the yeast isolate YP2.
Cellulose Estimation of Pineapple peel by Anthrone method
Estimation of cellulose of pineapple peel and pulp was done by the anthrone method using colorimetric estimation at 630nm. The reading obtained, was compared to the initial value of cellulose of peel, which was 1900 µg/ml and pulp 1040 µg/ml before fermentation. After 21 days fermentation, the degradation ability of each isolate was estimated by the anthrone method. Lower the concentration value of cellulose in µg/ml of the given isolate fermentation less was the amount of cellulose remaining after fermentation, indicating to the high cellulose degradation ability of the isolate. Higher the concentration value of cellulose in µg/ml of the given isolate fermentation more was the amount of cellulose still remaining after fermentation, indicating to the low cellulose degradation ability of the isolate.
Sugar Estimation of Pineapple peel by DNS method
Estimation of reducing sugar in Pineapple peel and pulp was done by the DNS method, after 21 days. With the bacterial isolates from peel, varying degree of sugars was formed, with the highest being in isolate PPP04, with sugar formed of 1700µg/ml at 320C, followed by PPP13, 1600µg/ml at temperature of 270C, showed better sugar accumulation. PPP16 showed the least fermentation activity of an average of 1100µg/ml of sugar formation. Similarly, in the pulp, the yeast isolate YP2 showed the highest amount of sugar at all three temperatures of 220C, 270C and 320C, its activity decreased at 350C.
DISCUSSION
The result of this study indicated that both the bacterial and yeast isolates have good cellulose degradative ability, this enhances their use in obtaining useful organic compounds of Pineapple peel and pulp. After fermentation, estimation of cellulose content in the pineapple peel has revealed that PPP04 isolate is able to degrade cellulose much better than all the other isolates as evident from the less amount of cellulose remaining from estimation by Anthrone method after fermentation and the amount of sugar formed as evident from DNS estimation of sugar after fermentation at all the four temperatures, with the vigourous activity seen at 320 C. Altough other isolates degraded cellulose, PPP13 is active only at 320C, its degradation ability is also much lower compared to other isolates. The standard organism C.uda has shown good degradative ability on pineapple peel. The temperature 320C, seemed to be the ideal for all the bacteria. Similarly, the yeast isolate YP2 has shown the highest cellulose degradation compared to other isolates, While 220 C has been the ideal temperature for the degradation for all isolates. YP11 has shown the least amount of degradation ability compared to others. The standard S. cerevisiae also showed a good amount of cellulose degradation. Sugar estimation revealed that all the bacterial isolates are able to form some amounts of sugar. The standard yeast S. cerevisiae has shown the least amount of sugar compared to other organisms; this could be probably due to its fermentative ability. In Pineapple pulp, the yeast isolate YP6 has shown the least amount of sugar compared to the standard yeast and other isolates. This indicates to its vigorous fermentation ability.
CONCLUSION
This study reveals that the three bacterial isolates and four yeast isolates have been able to degrade appreciable amounts of cellulose and produce glucose. A few isolates have also shown the potential for utilizing glucose for further secondary fermentation to obtain industrially important chemical compounds. Further, this study has paved an understanding for scope for utilizing the peel of pineapple or excess of postharvest pineapple as a good substrate for industrially useful products, by harnessing the potential of microbes. Thus in conclusion it may be stated that the isolates could be further harnessed using pineapple fruit wastes, which are of low cost and used in the production of products of high economic value such as alcohol and vinegar.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Authors acknowledge the immense help received from the scholars whose articles are cited and included in references of this manuscript. The authors are also grateful to authors / editors / publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1609http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16091. Ali, S., Sayed, A., Sarker R.T., Alam, R. (1991). Factors affecting Cellulase Production by Aspergillus terreus. World J. Microbiol and Biotechnol 7:62-66.
2. Ameh, J. B., Okagbue, R. N. and Ahmad, A. A. (1989). Isolation and characterization of local yeast strains for ethanol production. Nigerian Journal of Technology Research 1:47-52.
3. Anderson PJ, McNeil K, Watson K (1986). High efficiency carbohydrate fermentation to ethanol at temperatures above 40oC by Kluyvero-myces marxianus Var. maxianus isolated from sugar mill. Appl.Environ. Microbiol. 51(6): 1124-1129.
4. Baig, M.M.V., Baig, M.L.B., Baig, M.I.A. and Majeda Y. (2004): Saccharifycation of Banana Agro waste by Cellulolytic Enzymes. African Journal of Biotechnology, 3(9):447-450.
5. Beguin, P. and Aubert, J. P. (1994) The biological degradation of cellulose. FEMS Microbiol. Rev., 13, 25–58.
6. Boulter, J. I., Trevors, J. T., and Boland, G. J. (2002) Microbial studies of compost: Bacterial identification, and their potential for turfgrass pathogen suppression. World J. Microb.Biotechnol., 18, 661–671.
7. Burbank, N.C. and Kamagai, J.S. 1965 Study of pineapple cannery waste. Proceedings of the 20th-lndustrial Waste Conference, Engineering Extension Series 118, Vol. 20, pp.365-397.
8. Purdue University.Eghafona NO, Aluyi HAS, Uduehi IS (1999). Alcohol yield from pineapple juice: Comparative study of Zymomonas mobilis and Saccharomyces uvarum. Niger. J. Microbiol. 13: 117-122.
9. EL-Din, S. M. S. B., Attia, M., and AboSedera, S. A. (2000). Field assessment of composts produced by highly effective cellulolytic microorganisms. Biol. Fertil. Soils, 32, 35–40.
10. DEV, D.K. and INGLE, U.M. 1982 Utilization of pineapple by-products and wastes--review. Indian Food Packer 36, 15-22.
11. Hankin L, Anagnostakis SL. Solid media containing carboxymethylcellulose to detect CX cellulose activity of micro-organisms. J Gen Microbiol. 1977 Jan; 98(1):109–115.
12. Hart, T. D., De Leij, F. A. A. M., Kinsey, G., Kelley, J., and Lynch, J. M. (2002) Strategies for the isolation of cellulolytic fungi for composting of wheat straw. World J. Microb. Biotechnol., 18, 471–480.
13. Hedge, J.E. and Hofreiter, B.T. (1962). In: Carbohydrate Chemistry, 17 (Eds. Whistler R.L. and Be Miller, J.N.), Academic Press, New York.Hendricks, C. W., Doyle, J. D., and Hugley, B. (1995) A new solid medium for enumerating cellulose-utilizing bacteria in soil. Appl. Environ. Microbiol., 61, 2016– 2019.
14. Jeffries, T.W., (1996). Production and Applications of Cellulase Laboratory Procedures, 1-10.
15. Ladisch MR, Lin KW, Voloch M, Tsao GT. Process considerations in the enzymatic hydrolysis of biomass. En-zyme Microb Technol 1983;5:82–100.
16. Lu, W. J., Wang, H. T., Huang, D. Y., Qiu, X. Y., and Chen, J. C. (2004) Effect of inoculating flower stalk and vegetable waste with ligno-cellulolytic microorganisms on the composting process. J. Environ. Sci. Health, Part B—Pesticides, Food Contaminants, and Agricultural Wastes, 39, 873–889.
17. Madigan MY, Martinko JM, Parker J (1997). Brock’s Biology of Microorganisms (8th edn.) U.S.A; Prentice Hall International Incorporated.Mandels, M. (1981) Cellulases. Annu. Rep. Ferment.Processes, 5, 35–78.
18. Mandels, M. and Reese, E. T. (1999) Fungal cellulases and the microbial decomposition of cellulosic fabric. J. Ind. Microbiol.Biotechnol., 22, 225–240.
19. Miller, G.L. (1959). Use of Dinitrosalicylic Acid Reagent for Determination of Reducing Sugars. Anal. Chem. 31: 426-428.
20. Rose D (1976). Yeasts for molasses alcohol, Proc. Biochem. 11(2): 10- 12, 36.
21. Sandhu, D. K. and Bawa, S. (1992). Improvement of cellulose activity in Trichoderma. Appl. Biochem. Biotechnol., 34/35, 175–192.
22. Smith RE. Rapid tube test for detecting fungal cellulase production. Appl Environ Microbiol. 1977 Apr;33(4):980–981.
23. Teather, R.M. and P.J. Wood, 1982. Use of Congo red-polysaccharide interactions in enumeration and characterization of cellulolytic bacteria from the bovine rumen. Applied Environ. Microbiol., 43: 777-780.
24. Tengerdy, R. P. and Szakacs, G. (2003) Bioconversion of lignocelluloses in solid substrate fermentation. Biochem. Eng. J., 13, 169–179.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN-0001November30General SciencesAN ASSESSMENT OF TRAINING AND SALESFORCE PRODUCTIVITY IN THE NIGERIA'S MANUFACTURING INDUSTRY: LESSON FROM NASCO COMPANY LTD, JOS
English1525Meshach Gomam GoyitEnglish Dakung Reuel JohnmarkEnglishTraining is very important and so viable that organizations cannot do without it. If organizations want to succeed and even achieve goals and objectives, reliance on the skills and knowledge of their sales force to deliver products and services to the market place becomes imperative. Deploying and sustaining a highly skilled and competitive sales force requires a strong management commitment towards effective initial and on-going training solutions. A remote training program is capable of delivering a continuous curriculum of training solutions to meet the needs of both new and veteran members of the deployed sales force. The problem under focus was to assess the impact of training on sales force productivity in the Nigeria’s manufacturing industry, using Nasco company Ltd, Jos as a case study. The data obtained from secondary sources were analyzed and the hypothesis formulated was tested using regression analysis. The result from the hypothesis tested revealed that there is a significant relationship between investment in training and profit of Nasco Company Ltd. Based on our findings we recommended that: rather than outsourcing the distribution of its products, Nasco Company should train its sales force personnel. Since investment in training of the sales force enhances the company’s productivity as well as company’s profit, the company under review should invest more on the training of its sales force.
EnglishTraining, Sales force, ProductivityINTRODUCTION
The basis for the development of any country depends on the level of training. Training is very important and so viable that organizations cannot do without, if an organization wants to succeed and even achieve its goals and objectives. Companies rely on the skills and knowledge of their sales force to deliver products and services to the market place. Deploying and sustaining a highly skilled competitive sales force requires a strong management commitment towards effective initial and on-going training solutions (Hall, 2005). Sales management is ultimately responsible for the direction and content of the training provided to the remote sales force, by directly or indirectly managing the training needs. A remote training program is capable of delivering a continuous curriculum of training solutions to meet the needs of both new and veteran members of the deployed sales force. According to Lorge and Smith (1998), by providing product knowledge and sales skill training to the sales force, companies can position their products into the market place, knowing that the remote sales force has the necessary skills and information to make the sale, service their customers, and recognize additional sales opportunities. The role that effective sales training plays in a firm's strategic advantage extends from home country to global business environments (Honeycutt, Ford and Simintiras, 2005). As a result, global powerhouses like Canon, Wyeth Pharmaceuticals, and Saab invest sales training dollars across national borders (Hall, 2005). In 2000, $56.8 billion (N8, 520 billion) were invested in training (Galvin, 2001) of which one-quarter or $14.2 billion were devoted to sales training (Wilson, Strutton and Farris, 2002). Global firms believe that investing in sales training programs contribute positively to sales force motivation (Liu, 1996), effectiveness (Piercy, Craven and Morgan, 1998), and performance (Pelham, 2002). On average, each member of the sales force generated approximately $15,000 (N225, 000) to $25,000 (N375, 000) of revenue per day, depending upon the territory. Therefore, the time dedicated to the training needed to be both practical and effective, off-setting the missed selling opportunities when the sales representative is out of their territory. Additionally, the sales training department’s curriculum had to be flexible enough to integrate new product training to warrant the travel and lodging costs associated with the training (Skiera and Albers, 1998). According to Piercy et al. (1998), the need for training is very necessary for employee as well as organizational productivity. Training represents the single largest investment in enhancing employee productivity. Manufacturing industries in Nigeria are always emphasizing training of sales force and most often, substantial funds are being invested in it. In order to inculcate quality delivery (to satisfy customers), training and workshops are being arranged. For instance, Companies such as GCOML, SWAN, JIB, NASCO Foods, Coca-Cola, Integrated Dairies Ltd generally develop their own guidelines for training. The quantitative literature on sales force management has examined several methods by which sales force productivity can be increased. These include, but are not limited to, sales force compensation (Basu, Lal, Srinivasan and Staelin, 1986; Basu and Kalyanaram, 1990), sales force sizing (e.g., Lodish, Curtis, Ness and Simpson, 1988), call allocation (e.g., Lodish, 1971), territory design and alignment (Rangaswamy, Sinha and Zoltners, 1990; Skiera and Albers, 1998), and sales force benchmarking (Horsky and Nelson, 1996). Seemingly overlooked, however, has been the use of training as a means to increase the productivity of the sales force. This omission is surprising given that studies have consistently stressed that training is a prerequisite for successful selling (Churchill, Hartle and Walker, 1986). Training increases sales force productivity by giving salespeople the skills needed to perform their tasks effectively. For example, data from a Bell South video sales training program showed that training increased sales effectiveness by 50% (Martin and Collins, 1991). Training also increases profits by lowering the firm’s selling and supervision costs. A study of Nabisco’s sales training program by Klein (1997) found a $122 (N18, 300) increase in sales and a twenty-fold increase in profit for every dollar invested in training. Adept salespeople are particularly important for a firm to maintain its competitive edge in the face of keen competition (Ingram and LaFord, 1992). Today’s customers expect salespeople to have deep product knowledge, to add ideas to improve the customer’s operations, and to be efficient and reliable. These facts, highlights the crucial role of training sales force which brings about the profit maximization of the company. With this understanding in mind, it is very important to assess the training and sales force productivity in the Nigeria’s manufacturing industry. Statement of the Problem Sales teams are under constant pressure to meet customer expectations, while bringing in revenue for the company. As globalization brings the world closer together, these pressures increase. A recent Aberdeen survey revealed; companies that implement mobile sales force automation solutions are 1.5 times more likely to see an improvement in sales force productivity versus those that do not. Sales teams are looking at Mobile Sales Force Automation (SFA) technologies to arm their field representatives to be able to handle the ever increasing customer demands on a global basis.The challenge most companies face is that users are not fully utilizing or even using salesforce.com at all. They are noticing an increase in user resistance, not adoption, and what will be accomplished through sales training. When objectives are aligned with strategic organizational objectives and identified salesperson needs, deficiencies, requirements and competencies, then sales training is maximized (Attia et al., 2005). They further listed the sales training objectives derived from global/crosscultural research appearing over the past two decades to include: ? Improve sales force negotiation skills to increase successful sales encounters and longterm relationships for small/medium sized firms. ? Decrease sales training costs for local firms, improve sales force control for global companies, and improve customer relations and time management for both global and local firms. ? Improve sales force morale, sales routing, selling skills, market share, sales volume, and competitive position. ? Impart effective product, selling, intercultural skills, and increase salesperson knowledge about companies. ? Reduce turnover rates and increase salesperson motivation levels. ? Promote communication flow between parent companies and subsidiaries related to selling and compensation policies. ? Build customer information systems and databases, and disseminate parent companies market orientation practices. ? Improve salespersons’ negotiation skills, increase abilities to nurture and sustain longterm relationships and help evaluate performance (quantitative/qualitative) measures. Sales training program design and implementation Firms cautiously adapt and transfer training content and methods to locations within and abroad. For example, Geber (1989) recommended that global firms utilize local bi-cultural employees or consultants to identify gaps in training programs designed in the home country. Montago (1996), discussed how Korean trainers met with their U.S. managers and then modified the training concepts and ideas to address local cultural conditions. Jantan and Honeycutt (2002), reported that global firms in Malaysia translated training manuals, used joint headquarters/local trainers, and selected/integrated training methods to minimize cultural barriers. Also, different training methods were necessary to transfer salesperson negotiation skills/behaviors in northern European (UK, Netherlands, and Finland) and southern European (Spain and Portugal) countries because these two groups of nations exhibit distinct cultural characteristics (Roman and Ruiz, 2003). In Singapore for instance, local and global hotel training programs offered different program content, levels of demonstration, and inclass participation. Global firms also incorporated sales training into their strategic marketing plan (Honeycutt et al., 2005). Global firms’ sales managers in Malaysia, in contrast to their local counterparts, reported significant improvement in salespersons performance (sales presentation, communication, technical, and customer relations skills) after completing sales training (Jantan et al., 2004). Global companies employ a higher level of demonstration methods, while local firms use onthe-job (OJT) training methods (Honeycutt et al., 2005 and Jantan and Honeycutt, 2002). Empirical studies conducted in Saudi Arabia (Erffmeyer et al., 1993), Singapore (Honeycutt et al., 2005), Malaysia (Jantan and Honeycutt, 2002), and Slovakia (Honeycutt et al., 1999), reveal that the sales training content of global companies consistently focused on market and customer information, in contrast to product knowledge for local firms. Also, ethical sales issues were significantly more prevalent in global sales training programs in Singapore (Honeycutt et al., 2005). Other issues that can affect sales training program content and methods include: translation problems (Kallet, 1981 and Honeycutt et al., 1996), industry and corporate culture-related issues (Keater, 1994 and Keater, 1995), parent firm market orientation (Cavusgil, 1990; Erffmeyer et al., 1993 and Honeycutt et al., 1999), and technological capability (Flynn, 1987 and Zeira and Pazy, 1985). Additionally global companies, in contrast to local firms, devote greater resources – in the form of time, effort, and money – to train new sales representatives (Honeycutt et al., 2005; Jantan and Honeycutt, 2002 and Honeycutt et al., 1999). To minimize cultural mistakes, global firms do carefully select, adapt, and balance their training delivery methods across cultures. Market orientation and Critical sales skills Market orientation relates to the firm's desired level of company-wide concern and responsiveness to customer needs and competitive actions (Kohli and Jaworski, 1990 and Narver and Slater, 1990). The construct indicates the extent to which the marketing concept has been adopted as a business philosophy (Jaworski and Kohli, 1993). Market orientation can be considered as a set of behaviors, activities and cultural norms that emphasize customers, competitors, and strong inter-functional coordination (Brown et al., 2002; Hurley and Hult, 1998] and Zhao and Cavusgil, 2006). Interests in market orientation have moved increasingly from issues of definition and measurement to those of implementation, and particularly the link between market orientation and the attitudes and behaviors of people employed in the organization (Narver et al., 1998 and Piercy et al., 2002). In examining the impact of market orientation on the sales organization, Siguaw, Brown and Widing (1994), argued strongly that the firm-level behaviors incorporated in the market orientation construct indicate the level of meaningful support provided to salespeople. They argued for a strong correspondence between the market orientation desired as a firm level, and the market orientation displayed by the sales force. Certainly, market orientation has been associated with a number of positive salesperson attitudes and behaviors (Siguaw et al., 1994), and customer orientation has been widely considered as an important salesperson characteristic. However, while market orientation has been widely studied in the marketing literature, and to a lesser extent in prior sales research, we have been unable to locate any previous studies concerning the relationship between market orientation and sales management control. In particular, prior research does not appear to have examined the impact of market orientation on sales manager control priorities, behaviors and corresponding competencies. Nonetheless, prior research suggests the advantages of a strong linkage between sales management strategy and a company's overall competitive strategy (Olson, Cravens, and Slater, 2001), and a similar logic should apply to market orientation. Importantly, sales managers in different selling situations are likely to have different priorities regarding salespersons’ skills level (e.g. competence). Therefore, market oriented imperatives for the sales unit, in terms of the most important or critical salesperson skills should be associated with the sales manager's behavior control strategy. Accordingly, the skills/management control relationship considers how well sales manager control level corresponds to the salespersons’ skills level. If the importance of skills for the organization's selling situation is correctly assessed by the sales manager, and management control activities are consistent with salespeople's critical skills needs, then a positive control level relationship should be present. The higher the importance of sales skills required by the selling situation, the higher the level of behavior-based control will be. This should provide the manager with the basis to more effectively develop these skills in salespeople and then monitor their application by salespeople to the customer relationships for which they are responsible
Concept of Productivity
Webster’s Dictionary defines productivity as a state of yielding or furnishing results, benefits or profits. This definition may be intuitively appealing, but it is of little use to managers of economic activities since it overlooks the resources used to yield the results. Economists like Prokopenko (1987) and Garvin (1992), overcome this short coming by defining productivity as the ratio of output to input, or the results achieved per unit of resource; a measure of how effectively the resources are utilized. This entry emphasizes the roles of sales management in increasing the productivity of the sales force and the firm. There is an extensive body of literature covering techniques for measuring and improving sales force productivity (Poole and Warner, 2001). The aim of this entry is to provide an overview or conceptual framework to enable sales force as well as the firm and select the techniques to be used for its implementation. According to Lawlor (1985), the conceptual approach to improvement can help sales managers to focus on productivity program results instead of on program activities. If for instance, as a result of the program, the values of fixed and variable inputs are decreased and output is increased, the sales force and firm’s productivity must increase. Conversely, if the improvement program fails to achieve any of these results, it will be a failure regardless of the amount of enthusiasm and activity it generates among the sales force and within the firm. Garvin (1992), further opined that the approach also emphasized the need for developing adequate measures for evaluating the performance of improvement programs, measures that track reductions in variables and fixed inputs and increases in outputs to ensure actual productivity (i.e sales force) improvement.
Effects of Sales training on Sales force productivity
According to Honeycutt et al., 1993; Dubinsky, 1996), sales training typically has three stages: assessment (establishing training needs and objectives); training (selection of trainers, trainees, training facilities and methods, program content and implementation) and evaluation (assessment of program effectiveness). It involves the systematic attempt to describe, explain and transfer ?good selling practices? to salespeople (Leigh 1987). The most common sales training objective is to increase sales performance (ElAnsary, 1993; Honeycutt et al., 1993; Jackson and Hisrich, 1996; Churchill et al., 1986). Salespersons’ productivity represents behaviours that are evaluated in terms of their contributions to the goals of the organisation (Walker et al., 1979). Skill level is one of the antecedents of sales performance (Churchill et al., 1985; Sujan et al., 1988) and refers to the individual capacity to implement sales tasks (Leong et al., 1989). Research suggests that training may increase the salesperson’s knowledge base and skill level, resulting in higher productivity (Anderson et al., 1995). Also, findings from Ingram et al. (1992), suggest that the most significant factors contributing to salespeople’s failure can be addressed through training. Similarly, according to the results of Piercy et al. (2002), sales managers rated sales training as one of the most important factors in improving sales force performance as well as sales force productivity. From this point of view, training enhances learning so that salespeople reach more acceptable productivity levels in less time than learning through direct experience alone (Leigh, 1987). Results that partially agree with this influence have been found by Christiansen et al. (1996) in an exploratory study based on three companies gathering data from salespeople. In relating the above discussion to sales management research, several authors argue that sales training can be effective in achieving training objectives, the most common of which is geared towards increasing sales performance and sales force productivity (Donaldson, 1998), but only if managers have the appropriate attitudes towards involvement in the training.
METHODOLOGY
The study was undertaken to assess the impact of training on sales force productivity in Jos metropolis. It is simply because the services offered by sales force personnel in this very important sector have gone through varying degree of changes and sophistication in recent times. To achieve that, secondary source of data was used to obtain the information. Information about the cost of training sales force of Nasco Company and the profit realized for the periods between 2006 -2010 was used to analyze the data. From the data collected, the hypothesis formulated was tested using regression tool of analysis.
DATA ANALYSIS AND RESULTS
To ascertain whether or not there is a significant relationship between investment in sales force training and profit, regression statistical tool was employed. The SPSS package was used to analyze the data. The results are presented below: Predicators (Constant), INVESTMENT Dependent variables: PROFIT
Interpretation
R, which is 0.999 (coefficient of relationship) explains the strength of relationship between investment in training sales force and profit. This means that there is a strong positive relationship between the two variables. It therefore implies that if there is a significant drop in investment in sales force training, there will be a corresponding decrease in profit. R2 (coefficient of determination) measures forecasting power of the independent variable. Since R2 = 0.998, it means that about 99% of the total variation in y (profit) is accounted for by a 100% increase in x (investment in sales force training). The values of t – computed for both a and b which are 26. 386 and 29.299 respectively show that they are greater than the t – tabulated (1. 960). This suggests that null hypothesis be rejected. This implies that there is significant relationship between investment in sales force training and profit,
CONCLUSION
This research study was aimed at assessing the impact of training on sales force productivity in the Nigeria’s manufacturing industry, taking an empirical study of Nasco Company Ltd Jos. Overview of training, Assessing sales training needs,
Sales training objectives setting, Sales training program design and implementation, market orientation and critical sales skills, concept of productivity and sales training effects on sales force productivity were discussed. Furthermore, from the hypothesis tested, the result revealed that there is a significant relationship between investment in training and sales force productivity of Nasco Nigeria Ltd.
RECOMMENDATIONS
Based on our findings, we hereby advance the following recommendations:
I. Nasco Company should always remember to consider the potentials of its sales force at the organization, activity, and individual levels.
II. Rather than outsourcing the distribution of its products, Nasco Company should train its employees.
III. Since investment in training sales force enhances sales force productivity as well as company’s profit, the company under review and indeed other companies as well should invest more in the training of their sales force.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1610http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16101. Anderson, A. (1993). Successful training practice: A manager's guide to personnel development, Blackwell Publishers, Oxford.
2. Anderson, R.E., Hair, J. F. and Bush, A. J. (1995), Sales Management, 2nd ed., McGraw Hill, NewYork, NY
3. Attia, A., Honeycutt Jr. E. D. and Leach, M. (2005). A three-stage model for assessing and improving sales force training and development, Journal of Personal Selling and Sales Management 25(3).
4. Basu, A. K. and Kalyanaram, G. (1990). On the relative performance of linear versus nonlinear compensation plans. International Journal of Research in Marketing, 7(3).
5. Basu, A. K., Lal, R., Srinivasan, V. and Staelin, R. (1986). Sales force compensation plans: An agency theoretic perspective. Marketing Science, 4(4).
6. Baldauf, A., Cravens, D. W. and Piercy, N. F. (2005). Sales management control research — synthesis and an agenda for future research, Journal of Personal Selling and Sales Management 25 (1)
7. Brown, T. J., Mowen, J. C., Donavan, D. T. and Licata, J. W. (2002). The customer orientation of service workers: Personality trait effects on self- and supervisor performance ratings, Journal of Marketing Research 39 (1)
8. Cascio, Wayne F. (1989), Managing Human Resources, 2nd ed. New York: McGraw-Hill 9. Cavusgil, S. T. (1990). The importance of distributor training at caterpillar, Industrial Marketing Management 19
10. Churchill, Jr., G. A., Hartley, S. W. and Walker, O. C. (1986). The determinants of salesperson performance: A meta-analysis. Journal of Marketing Research, 22.
11. Churchill, G.A., Ford, J., Hartley, S.W. and Walker, O. C. (1985), "The determinants of salespeople performance: a meta-analysis", Journal of Marketing Research, Vol. 22.
12. Christiansen, T., Evans, K.R., Schlacter, J. L. and Wolfe, W.G. (1996), "Training differences between services and good firms: impact on performance, satisfaction, and commitment", Journal of Professional Services Marketing, Vol. 15 No.1
13. Dubinsky, A. J. (1996), "Some assumptions about the effectiveness of sales training", Journal of Personal Selling and Sales Management, Vol. 16 No.3.
14. Dubinsky, A. and Barry, T. (1982). A survey of sales management practices, Industrial Marketing Management 11
15. Dubinsky, A. J. (1996). Some assumptions about the effectiveness of sales training. Journal of Personal Selling and Sales Management, 16 (3).
16. El-Ansary, A. I. (1993), "Selling and sales management in action: sales force effectiveness research reveals new insights and reward-penalty patterns in sales force training", Journal of Personal Selling and Sales Management, Vol. 13
17. Erffmeyer, R., Russ, R., and Hair, J. F. (1991). Needs assessment and evaluation in sales training programs, Journal of Personal Selling and Sales Management 11 (1).
18. Erffmeyer, R. Russ, R., and Hair, J. F. (1992). Traditional and high-tech sales training methods, Industrial Marketing Management 21
19. Erffmeyer, R., Al-khatib, J. A., Al-Habib, M. I. and Hair, J. F. (1993). Sales training practices: A cross-national comparison, International Marketing Review 10 (1).
20. Flynn, B. H. (1987). The challenge of multinational sales training, Training and Development Journal 41
21. Galvin, T.(2001). Industry report, Training 38 (10)
22. Garvin ,D,(1992).Operations Strategy: Text and Cases, Eaglewood cliffs, NJ: Prentice Itall.
23. Geber, B. (1989). A global approach to training, Training
24. Hall, B. (2005), Sales training makeovers, trainingmag.com, accessed July 4, 2005.
25. Honeycutt, E.D., Howe, V., Ingram, T.N. (1993), "Shortcomings of sales training programmes" Industrial Marketing Management, Vol. 22
26. Honeycutt, E. D. Ford, J. B. and Kurtzman, L. (1996). Potential problems and solutions when hiring and training worldwide sales teams, Journal of Business and Industrial Marketing 11 (1)
27. Honeycutt, E. D., Ford, J. B., Lupton, R. and Flaherty, T. (1999).Selecting and training the international sales force: A comparison of China and Slovakia, Industrial Marketing Management 28.
28. Honeycutt, E. D., Mottner, S. and Z. Ahmed, Z. (2005). Sales training in a dynamic market: The Singapore service industry, Services Marketing Quarterly 26 (3).
29. Horsky, D., and Nelson, P. (1996). Evaluating sales force size and productivity through efficient frontier benchmarking. Marketing Science, 15(4).
30. Hurley, R. F. and G.T.M. Hult, G.T.M. (1998). Innovation, market orientation, and organizational learning: An integration and empirical examination, Journal of Marketing 62 (3)
31. Ingram, T. N. and R.W. LaForge, R. W. (1992). Sales management: Analysis and decision making (2nd ed.), Dryden, Fort Worth, TX.
32. Ingram, T. N., Schwepker, C. H., Hutson, D. (1992), "Why salespeople fail", Industrial Marketing Management, Vol. 21.
33. Jackson, R. and Hisrich, R. (1996), Sales and Sales Management, Prentice Hall International Editions, London.
34. Jantan, M. A. and E.D. Honeycutt, E. D. (2002). Sales training practices in Malaysia, Multinational Business Review 10 (1).
35. Jantan, M.A., E. D. Honeycutt, E. D., Thelen, S. and Attia, A. (2004). Managerial perceptions of sales training and performance, Industrial Marketing Management 33 (7).
36. Jaworski, B. J. and Kohli, A. K. (1993). Market orientation: Antecedents and consequences, Journal of Marketing 57. 37. Kallet, M. W. (1981). Conducting international sales training, Training and Development Journal 35 (11).
38. Keater, M. (1994). Training the world to sell, Training. Vol. 56
39. Keater, M. (1995). International development, Training. Vol. 32
40. Kohli, A. K. and Jaworski, B. J. (1990). Market orientation: The construct, research propositions, and managerial implications, Journal of Marketing 54.
41. Klein, R. (1997). Nabisco sales soar after sales training. Marketing News, January 6, 23.
42. Lawlor, A. (1985). Productivity Improvement Manual, Wesport, CT: Quorum.
43. Learning International (1989). What Does Sales Force Turnover Cost You? Stanford, CT: Learning International, Inc 44. Leigh, T.W. (1987), "Cognitive selling scripts and sales training",Journal of Personal Selling and Sales Management.
45. Leong, S., Busch, P.S., John, R. (1989), "Knowledge bases and salesperson effectiveness: a script-theoretic analysis", Journal of Marketing Research, Vol. 26
46. Lodish (1971), CALLPLAN: An interactive salesman's call planning system, Management Science 18
47. Lodish, E. Curtis, M. Ness and M. K. Simpson (1988), Sales force sizing and deployment using a decision calculus model at Syntex laboratories, Interfaces 18
48. Martin, W. S., and Collins, B. H. (1991). Interactive video technology in sales training: A case study. Journal of Personal Selling and Sales Management, 11.
49. Montago, R. V. (1996). Integrated cross-cultural business training, Journal of Management Development 15 (4).
50. Narver, J. C., Slater, S.F. and Tietje, B. (1998). Creating a market orientation, Journal of MarketFocused Management 54
51. O’Connell, W. A. (1988). A 10-year report on sales force productivity. Sales and Marketing Management, 140(16).
52. Olson, E. M; Cravens, D. W. and Slater, S. F. (2001). Competitiveness and sales management: A marriage of strategies, Business Horizons
53. Pelham, A. (2002). An exploratory model and initial test of the influence of firm level consulting-oriented sales force programs on sales force performance, Journal of Personal Selling and Sales Management 22 (2).
54. Piercy, N. F., Craven, D. W. and Morgan, N. A. (1998). Sales force performance and behaviorbased management processes in business to business sales organizations, European Journal of Marketing 32.
55. Piercy, M. F. Harris, L. C. and Lane, N. (2002). Market orientation and retail operatives' expectations, Journal of Business Research 55
56. Pinkowitz, W. H; Moskal, J. and Green, G. (1997). How much does your employee turnover cost? Small Business Forum 14
57. Prokopenko, J. (1987). Productivity Management: A practical Handbook, Geneva: International Labour Office.
58. Rangaswamy, A; Sinha, P. and A. Zoltners, A. (1990). An integrated model-based approach for sales force structuring, Marketing Science 9 (4)
59. Richardson, R. (1999). Measuring the impact of turnover on sales. Journal of Personal Selling and Sales Management 19
60. Roman, S. and Ruiz, S. (2003). A comparative analysis of sales training in Europe: Implications for international sales negotiations, International Marketing Review 20 (3)
61. Skiera, B., and Albers, S. (1998). COSTA: Contribution maximizing sales territory alignment. Marketing Science, 17(3).
62. Siguaw, J. A. Brown, G. Widing, R. E. (1994). The influence of the market orientation of the firm on sales force behavior and attitudes, Journal of Marketing Research 31 (1994, February)
63. Sujan, H., Sujan, M., Bettman, J.R. (1988), "Knowledge structure differences between more effective and less effective salespeople", Journal of Marketing Research, Vol. 25
64. Walker, O.C., Churchill, G.A., Ford, N.M. (1979). "Where do we go from here? Some selected conceptual and empirical issues concerning the motivation and performance of industrial salesforce", in Albaum, G., Churchill, G.A. (Eds),Critical Issues in Sales Management: State of the Art and Future Research Needs.
65. Wilson, P., Phillip, Strutton, Farris; Strutton, D. and Farris, M. T. (2002). Investigating the perceptual aspect of sales training, Journal of Personal Selling and Sales Management 22 (2)
66. Zeira, Y. and Pazy, Y. (1985). Crossing national borders to get trained, Training and Development Journal (November 1985).
67. Zhao, Y. and Cavusgil, S. T. (2006). The effect of a supplier's market orientation on manufacturer's trust, Industrial Marketing Management 35
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20General SciencesSTUDIES ON THE YIELDS OF ROSE (ROSA) AND HIBISCUS (ROSAINENIS) FLOWERS IRRIGATED BY DISTILLERY SPENT WASH
English2632S. ChandrajuEnglish C. ThejovathiEnglish C. S. Chidan KumarEnglishYields of Rose (Rosa) and Hibiscus (Hibiscus rosasinenis) flowering plants were made by irrigated with distillery spent wash of different concentrations. The spent wash i.e., primary treated spent wash (PTSW), 1:1, 1:2, and 1:3 spent wash were analyzed for their plant nutrients such as nitrogen, phosphorous, potassium and other physical and chemical characteristics. Experimental soil was tested for its chemical and physical parameters. Rose and Hibiscus sets were planted in different pots (50 cm ht and 30 cm dia) and irrigated with raw water (RW), 1:1, 1:2 and 1:3 spent wash. The nature of yields of flowers was studied at their maturity. It was found that the yields of both flowers plants was very good (100%) in 1:3 SW irrigation, while very poor (25%) in 1:1 SW, moderate (80%) in 1:2 SW and 95% in RW irrigation growth. Soil was tested after harvest of flowers found no adverse effect on soil characteristics. This concludes that the diluted spent wash serves as an eco-friendly in irrigation medium.
EnglishDistillery spent wash, Rose, Hibiscus, Yields, Irrigation, Soil.INTRODUCTION
Rose (Rosa) belongs to Rosaceae family. Roses have a long storied history1 . The Chinese and Egyptians are thought to have first cultivated roses, around 5000 years’ ago. Selecting plants on the basis of flower color. During the middle Ages, monks and apothecaries grew roses for their medicinal value 2, 3, 4. The rose has been valued for its beauty and fragrance and has a long history of symbolism and meaning. Rose5 is the national flower of England and the United States, and the state flower of US states. The leaves most rose species are 5-15cm long, pinnate, with (3, 5, 9 and 13) leaflets and basal stipules the leaflets usually have a serrated margin and often a few prickles on the undesirable of the stem. Roses are of great economic importance, both as a crop for florists use and for use in perfumes. They also have minor medicinal uses. Rose perfumes are made from attar of roses are rose oil which is a mixture of volatile essential oils obtained by steam distilling the crushed petals of roses. Hibiscus (Hibiscus rosasinenis) tropical flower, it belongs the family Malvaceae. It gets its name from the Greek words. Hibiscus meaning mallow and rosa-sinessis, meaning rose of China6 . Hibiscus flower are used by malayas as a food dye in cooking toddy, agar-agar, jellies, pineapple slices and cooked vegetables7 . A juice drink made of hibiscus flowers was developed and is marketed together by the Malaysian, Agricultural Research and Development Institute. A decoction of hibiscus roots was offered, in Malaya traditional healing for the relief of venereal diseases and fever. This flower decoction was drunk as an antidote to poison. A preparation from the roots was used as eye drops for sore eyes8 . Molasses (one of the important byproducts of sugar industry) is the chief source for the production of ethanol in distilleries by fermentation method. About 08 (eight) liters of wastewater is generated for every liter of ethanol production in distilleries, known as raw spent wash (RSW), which is known for high biological oxygen demand (BOD: 5000-8000mg/L) and chemical oxygen demand (COD: 25000- 30000mg/L), undesirable color and foul odor9 . Discharge of RSW into open field or nearby water bodies’ results in environmental, water and soil pollution including threat to plant and animal lives. The RSW is highly acidic and contains easily oxidisable organic matter with very high BOD and COD10. Also, spent wash contains high organic nitrogen and nutrients11. By installing biomethenation plant in distilleries, reduces the oxygen demand of RSW, the resulting spent wash is called primary treated spent wash (PTSW) and primary treatment to RSW increases the nitrogen (N), potassium (K), and phosphorous (P) contents and decreases calcium (Ca), magnesium (Mg), sodium (Na), chloride (Cl - ), and sulphate (SO4 2- ) 12. PTSW is rich in potassium (K), sulphur (S), nitrogen (N), phosphorous (P) as well as easily biodegradable organic matter and its application to soil has been reported to increase yield of sugar cane, rice13, wheat and rice, Quality of groundnut14 and physiological response of soybean15,. Diluted spent wash could be used for irrigation purpose without adversely affecting soil fertility16, 17, 18, seed germination and crop productivity19. The diluted spent wash irrigation improved the physical and chemical properties of the soil and further increased soil micro flora20; twelve presowing irrigations with the diluted spent wash had no adverse effect on the germination of maize but improved the growth and yield21. Diluted spent wash increases the growth of shoot length, leaf number per plant, leaf area and chlorophyll content of peas22. Increased concentration of spent wash causes decreased seed germination, seedling growth and chlorophyll content in Sunflowers (Helianthus annuus) and the spent wash could safely used for irrigation purpose at lower concentration. The spent wash contained an excess of various forms of cations and anions, which are injurious to plant growth and these constituents should be reduced to beneficial level by diluting spent wash, which can be used as a substitute for chemical fertilizer23. The spent wash could be used as a complement to mineral fertilizer to sugarcane24. The spent wash contained N, P, K, Ca, Mg and S and thus valued as a fertilizer when applied to soil through irrigation with water25. The application of diluted spent wash increased the uptake of Zinc (Zn), Copper (Cu), Iron (Fe) and Manganese (Mn) in maize and wheat as compared to control and the highest total uptake of these were found at lower dilution levels than at higher dilution levels. Mineralization of organic material as well as nutrients present in the spent wash was responsible for increased availability of plant nutrients. Diluted spent wash increase the uptake of nutrients, height, growth and yield of leaves vegetables26, 27, nutrients of cabbage and mint leaf, nutrients of top vegetables, pulses28, condiments, root vegetables and yields of condiments29, 30, 31 , yields of some root vegetables in untreated and spent wash treated soil132 33, yields of top vegetables (creepers), yields of tuber/root medicinal plants34, 35, yields of leafy medicinal plants, nutrients of creeper medicinal plants36 , yields of leafy medicinal plants in normal and spent wash treated soil nutrients uptake of herbal medicinal plants in normal and spent wash treated soil,nutrients of leafy medicinal plants nutrients of ginger and turmeric in normal and spent wash treated soil nutrients of tubers/roots medicinal plants37 . However, no information is available on the studies of distillery spent wash irrigation on the yields of Rose and Hibiscus flowering plants irrigated by distillery spent wash. Therefore, the present investigation was carried out to study the influence of different concentration of spent wash on the yields of Rose and Hibiscus flowers.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
Physico-chemical parameters and amount of nitrogen (N), potassium (K), phosphorous (P) and sulphur (S) present in the primary treated diluted spent wash (1:1, 1:2 and 1:3 SW) were analyzed by standard methods38 . The PTSW was used for irrigation with a dilution of 1:1, 1:2 and1:3. A composite soil sample collected prior to spent wash irrigation was air-dried, powdered and analyzed for physico-chemical properties39-44 . Flowering plants selected for the present investigation were Rose and Hibiscus. The sets were planted in different pots 50cm(h), 30cm (dia)] and irrigated (by applying 5-10mm/cm2 depends upon the climatic condition) with raw water (RW), 1:1 SW, 1:2 SW and 1:3 SW at the dosage of twice a week and rest of the period with raw water as required. Trials were conducted in triplicate; in each case yields of flowers were recorded.
RESULTS
Chemical composition of PTSW, 1:1, 1:2, and 1:3 SW such as pH, electrical conductivity, total solids (TS), total dissolved solids (TDS), total suspended solids (TSS), settelable solids (SS), chemical oxygen demand (COD), biological oxygen demand (BOD), carbonates, bicarbonates, total phosphorous (P), total potassium (K), ammonical nitrogen (N), calcium (Ca), magnesium (Mg), sulphur (S), sodium (Na), chlorides (Cl), iron (Fe), manganese (Mn), zinc (Zn), copper (Cu), cadmium (Cd), lead (Pb), chromium (Cr) and nickel (Ni) were analyzed and tabulated (Table-1). Amount of N, P, K and S contents are presented (Table-2). Characteristics of experimental soils such as pH, electrical conductivity, the amount of organic carbon, available nitrogen (N), phosphorous (P), potassium (K), sulphur (S), exchangeable calcium (Ca), magnesium (Mg), sodium (Na), DTPA iron (Fe), manganese (Mn), copper (Cu) and zinc (Zn) were analyzed and tabulated (Table-3). It was found that the soil composition is fit for the cultivation of plants, because it fulfils all the requirements for the growth of plants. It was found that the yields of both flowers was very good (100%) in 1:3 SW irrigation, while very poor (25%) in 1:1 SW, moderate (80%) in 1:2 SW and 95% in RW irrigation growth.
DISCUSSION
Yields of Rose (Rosa) and Hibiscus (Hibiscus rosasinenis) flowers were very good in both 1:2 and 1:3 spent wash as compared to 1:1 SW and raw water. Irrigations (Table-5). This could be due to more absorption of plant nutrients (NPK) present in spent wash by plants at higher dilutions. No external fertilizer (either organic or inorganic) was required for the cultivation of plants and also it reduces the cost of cultivation. It was also found that no negative impact of heavy metals like lead, cadmium and nickel on the leaves of Rose and Hibiscus plants. The soil was tested after the harvest; found that there was no adverse effect on soil characteristics (Table-4).
CONCLUSION
It is found that the yields of both flowers were largely influenced in case of 1:2 and 1:3 SW irrigations than with 1:1 SW and raw water. In the case of 1:1 SW irrigation, the plant sporting was very poor, this could be due to the formation of thick layer of spent wash on the surface of the soil, which makes the mask on the sets.. But 1:3 SW irrigation shows more uptakes of nutrients when compared to 1:2 SW in both plants. This could be due to the maximum absorption of nutrients by plants at more diluted spent wash. After harvest, soil was tested; found that there was no adverse effect on characteristics. Since external application of fertilizer (either organic or inorganic) was not required for the cultivation of plants by spent wash irrigation media, this minimizes the cost of cultivation and elevates the economy of growers. Also spent wash serves as liquid fertilizer, non pollutant, and eco-friendly irrigation medium. Hence the spent wash can be conveniently used for irrigation purpose with required dilution without affecting environment and soil.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Authors are grateful to The General Manager, N.S.L. Koppa, Maddur Tq., Karnataka, for providing spent wash. Authors also acknowledge the immense help received from the scholars whose articles are cited and included in references of this manuscript. The authors are also grateful to authors / editors / publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1611http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16111. Rose plant Britanica.com 2007-11-19.
2. Mabberley, DJ (1997), the plant book, a portable dictionary of the vascular plants. Cambridge university press. Cambridge.
3. Activities and ground nut quality. Journal of Plant Nutrition and soil Science, 166:345-347.
4. Argon, Madison, Wisconsin, USA, pp. 15-72.
5. Rose (Plant) – Britannica online Encyclopedia. Britannica.com.2007-11-19. Retrieved 2009-12- 07.
6. Lawton, Barbara Perry (2004), Hibiscus: Hardy and Tropical plants for the Garde.Timber press p, 36,ISBN 9780881926545
7. Nation’s Restaurant News Hibiscus blossoms as a food drink ingredient.
8. Plants for a future: Hibiscus rosa-Sineasis accessed 07-05-2009.
9. Joshi HC, Kalra N, Chaudhary A, Deb DL (1994). Environmental issues related with distillery effluent utilization in agriculture in India, Asia Pac J Environ. Develop, 1: 92-103.
10. Patil JD, Arabatti SV, Hapse DG (1987). A review of some aspects of distillery spent wash (vinase) utilization in sugar cane, Bartiya sugar May, 9-15.
11. Ramadurai R, Gerard EJ (1994). Distillery effluent and downstream products, SISSTA,Sugar Journal. 20: 129-131.
12. Mohamed Haroon AR, Subash Chandra Bose M (2004). Use of distillery spent wash for alkali soil reclamation, treated distillery effluent for fertile irrigation of Crops. Indian Farm, March, 48- 51.Oxford English Dictionary.
13. Deverajan L, and Oblisami G, (1995). Effect of distillery effluent on soil fertility Status, yield and quality of rice. Madrass Agricultural Journal, 82: 664-665.
14. Amar BS, Ashik B, Sivakoti R (2003). Effect of Distillery effluent on plant and soil enzymatic.
15. Ramana S, Biswas AK, Kundu S, Saha JK, Yadava RBR (2000).Physiological response of soybean (Glycine max L.) to foliar application of Distillery effluent. Plant Soil Research 2: 1-6.
16. Kaushik K, Nisha R, Jagjeeta K, Kaushik CP (2005). Impact of long and short term irrigation of a sodic soil with distillery effluent in combination with Bio-amendments. Bioresource Technology, 96. (17): 1860-1866.
17. Kuntal MH, Ashis K, Biswas AK, Misra.K (2004). Effect of post-methanation effluent on soil physical properties under a soybean-wheat system in a vertisol. Journal of Plant Nutrition and Soil Science. 167(5): 1860-1866.
18. Raverkar KP, Ramana S, Singh AB, Biswas AK, Kundu S (2000). Impact of post methanated spent wash (PMS) on the nursery raising, biological Parameters of Glyricidia sepum and biological activity of soil. Ann. Plant Research, 2(2): 161- 168.
19. Ramana S, Biswas AK, Kundu S, Saha JK, Yadava RBR (2001). Effect of distillery effluent on seed germination in some vegetable crops. Bio-resource Technology, 82(3):273-275.
20. Devarajan L, Rajanna G, Ramanathan G, Oblisami G (1994). Performance of field crops under distillery effluent irrigations, Kisan world, 21: 48-50.
21. Singh Y, Raj Bahadur (1998). Effect of application of distillery effluent on Maize crop andsoil properties. Indian J.Agri. Science, 68: 70-74.
22. Rani R, Sri Vastava MM (1990). Ecophysiological response of Pisum sativumand citrus maxima to distillery effluents. Int. J. of Ecology and Environ. Science, 16-23.
23. Sahai R, Jabeen S, Saxena PK (1983). Effect of distillery waste on seed germination, seedling growth and pigment content of rice. Indian Journal of Ecology, 10: 7-10.
24. Chares S (1985). Vinasse in the fertilization of sugarcane. Sugarcane, 1, 20.
25. Samuel G (1986). The use of alcohol distillery waste as a fertilizer, Proceedings of International American Sugarcane Seminar.245-252.
26. Chandraju S, Basavaraju HC, (2007). Impact of distillery spent wash on Seed germination and growth of leaves Vegetables: An investigation. Sugar Journal (SISSTA). 38: 20-50.
27. Chandraju S, Siddappa and Chidan Kumar CS (2011). Studies on the germination and growth of Mustard and aster seeds irrigated by distillery spent wash, Bio-research bulletin5:110.
28. Joshi HC, Chaudhary A, Chaudhary R, Kalra N, Dwivedi MK (1998). Distillery effluent as soil amendment for wheat and rice. Journal of Indian Society for Soil Science. 46: 155-157.
29. Chandraju S, Thejovathi C, Chidan Kumar CS (2011). Sprouting and Growth studies ofRose and Hibiscus flowering plants irrigated by distillery spent wash. PlantBiology,1(2).
30. Chandraju S, Thejovathi C, Chidan Kumar CS (2011).Studies on the Germination and Growth of Zinnia and Vinca seeds irrigated by Distillery spent wash. SISSTA.
31. Chandraju S, Thejovathi C, Chidan Kumar CS, (2011). Studies on the Sprouting and Growth of Gardenia seeds irrigated by Distillery spent wash.J.Chem.Pharm.Res,, 3(5):376-381.
32. Chidan Kumar CS, Chandraju S, and Nagendraswamy R (2009). Impact of distillery spent wash on the yields of some top vegetables (creepers); An Investigation, World. Appl. Sci. Jour. 6(9): 270-1273.
33. Chidan Kumar CS, and Chandraju S, (2009). Impact of distillery spent wash irrigation on the yields of some condiments; An Investigation, Sugar. Tech. 11(3):303-306.
34. Collins RA, Ng TB Fond wp, Wan CC, Yeung HW (1997). “A comparison of humano deficiency virus type1 inhibition by partially purified aqueous extracts of Chinese medicinal. Herbs”, Life sciences 60(23):PL345-51.
35. Chen K, Shiq MUC, Kikuskie RE, Cheng YC, Lee KH (January 1994). Anti-AIDS agents.
36. Chandraju S, Siddappa and Chidan Kumar CS (2011). Studies on the germination and growth of Cotton and Groundnut seeds irrigated by distillery spent wash, current Botony 2(3):38-42.
37. Sassi AB, Harzallah-Skniri F, Bourgoughom N, Ao uni M (February 2008).
38. Manivasakam N, (1987). Phisico-chemical examination of water, sewage and Industrial Effluent. Pragathi Prakashan, Merut.
39. Jackson ML, (1973). Soil Chemical Analysis. Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi,P.
40. Lindsay WL and Norvel WA (1978). Development of DTPA soil test for Zn, Fe, Mn,and Cu. Soil Science. Soc.Am., J., 42:421- 428.
41. Piper CS, (1966). Soil and Plant Analysis, Han’s Publication, Bombay.
42. Subbiah BV, and Asija CL (1956). A rapid procedure for the estimation of Available nitrogen in Soils. Curr.Sci., 25: 259-260.
43. Walkley AJ and Black CA (1934) .An examination of the method for determining soil organic matter and proposed modification of the chromic acid titration method. Soil Sci., 37: 29- 38.
44. Wolveton Rebecca BC, Donald CMC, and Watkins EA, Jr.Retrieved 2007.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20General SciencesA STUDY ON EFFECTIVENESS OF QWL TOWARDS DHARANI SUGARS AND CHEMICALS LTD
English3338V. GeethaEnglish R. ShenbagasuriyanEnglish K. SenthilrajanEnglish“QWL refers to the level of satisfaction, motivation, involvement and commitment individuals experience with respect to their lives at work.” QWL provides for the balanced relationship among work, non-work and family aspects of life. In other words , family life and social life should not be strained by working hours including overtime work, work during inconvenient hours, business travel, transfers, vacations etc., By analyzing this research, several notable dimensions that influence quality of work life are adequate and fair compensation, welfare measures, social integration, stress at work. The aim of this study is to gain an insight into current working life policies and practices, as well as work life balance issues of employees. This report is formulated after a thorough research and is based on the information given by the company personal and through questionnaire filled by the employees. In due course of our project we have visited the company and interacted with the people concerned. By analyzing this research, we had taken samples from Dharani sugars at Vasudevanallur. The sample size of 110 was taken from employees of Dharani Sugars & Chemicals Ltd. By adopting this research, conveniences sampling are apply to collect the samples. The statistical software SPSS (Statistical Package for Social Science) used to analyze the research. The statistical tools like exploratory factory analysis, Multiple Correspondence Analyses, ANOVA used for research.
EnglishQuality of Work Life, Employees, Retention, SatisfactionINTRODUCTION
Indian sugar industry is highly fragmented with organized and unorganized players. India has become largest producer of sugar cane/sugar producing 280 MnT of cane and 16.5 MnT of sugar in 1995-96, making it the largest producer of sugar in the world, representing about 20% of cane sugar production. Sugar production picked up under the Sugar Industry Protection Act passed in 1932 and country became self sufficient in 1935. Today this sector produces 60% of country's production. In recent years many industrial concerns are facing three main problems. (i) The widespread and possibly growing dissatisfaction and /or alienation of blue collar and white-collar employees as well as many managerial personnel from their work and from the organization, which they are employed. (ii) The declining rate or growth in labor productivity in the face of energy shortage. (iii) The growing recognition of individual?s quality of work life in physical and mental health as well as in family and community. One of the major reasons for this problem is due to the presence of inadequate quality of work life. While forming the QWL the following factors are considered. Work environment factors, Relational factors, Job factors& financial factors. The company focuses on following strategies to improve Quality of Work life: Self-managed Work Teams, Job Redesign and Enrichment, Effective Leadership and Supervisory Behavior, Career Development, Alternative Work Schedules, Job Security Administrative or Organizational Justice Participative Management
Review of Literature
Robbins(1989) defined QWL as „a process by which an organization responds to employee needs by developing mechanisms to allow them to share fully in making the decision that design their lives at work?. Dr.Meenakshi Gupta proposed study that mainly focus on understanding the factors which influences the QWL affects the satisfaction level of employees. The result indicates that improving these factors quality of work life in BSNL can be enhanced. Alireza,Ali Rezaeean and Jufar Bolhari measure the level of QWL of IT Staffs and investigate the relationship between QWL and some demographic characteristics among them. Finding that there is relationships between QWL and age, work experience and income were approved. A.Sabarirajan and N.Geethanjali focusing on the effects of employment on worker health and general well being, and a way to enhance the quality of a person?s on-the-job experience. In this research investigate the extent to which the QWL among the employees of public and private Banks in Dindigul influences the performance of Banks. Nadler and Lawler1 defines QWL as “a way of thinking about people, work and organizations. Its distinctive elements are: a.)a concern about the impact of work on people as well as on organizational effectiveness, and b.)the idea of participation in organizational problem solving and decision making.”
Problem Statement
Dharani Sugars & Chemicals ltd is mainly engaged in production of sugar. The leading Dharani Sugars ltd which is located in Vasudevanllur. There are a variety of factors that can indicate an employee?s quality of work life. Improved QWL leads to improved performance should mean not only physical output but also the behavior of the workers in helping colleagues in solving job related problems, accepting orders with enthusiasm, promoting a positive team spirit and accepting temporary unfavorable work conditions without compliant.Multifarious criteria that characterize this industrial orientation include adequate & fair compensation, welfare measures, social integration, and stress at work. Continued growth and security, work environment, protection for worker?s rights, social relevance and balance between work and personal life. A management practice that manifests concern about job enrichment, employee security, career opportunities and the opportunities for employees to have voice in matters which affect them is entirely consistent with meticulously controlled operations in the interest of efficiency, effectiveness, quality assurance, customer service, profitability and high employee morale.Hence this study is focusing on the quality of work life of an employee?s in the organization. The company should maintain their sufficient welfare facilities and rest time to reducing the stress level of the employees. The research problem is formulated as follows.
Objectives of the Study
To study the effectiveness of QWL in Dharani
To analyze the employees opinion regarding safety & welfare measures in Dharani
To analyze overall satisfaction of employees on QWL in Dharani
RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
A research design is a framework or blueprint for conducting the marketing research project. Through such research we can analyze the various factors which motivate employees to work in Dharani Sugars or which make employees QWL towards Dharani. In pilot studies, convenience sample is usually used because it allows the researcher to obtain basic data and trends regarding his study without the complications of using a randomized sample. The method of sampling chosen for this study is non-probability convenience sampling which was arbitrarily chosen to be 110 samples were selected for the survey, which comprises 80 employees and 30 management cadre. In this study, a Questionnaire Cum Interview Scheduling techniques for data collection was adopted. The questionnaire consisted of 12 items of which 8 were demographic questions and the other 4 were closed ended question. Tools used in this study are exploratory factory analysis, Multiple Correspondence Analyses, ANOVA and Percentage.
Analysis and Interpretation Validity Test
The KMO and Barlett?s test of Sphericity are both tests of multivariate normality and sampling adequacy is applied to check the content and construct validity of the data. The KMO value is 0.762 which is greater than 0.7 is meritorious. By applying PCA method, seven factors with factor loadings are extracted which and listed below. The management accepts the free comments and suggestions from employees-0.797 Canteen facilities are good -0.615 Working atmosphere is clean -0.640 Salary is adequate for employees -0.419 The supervisor giving right direction and support to the workers -0.348 Company maintain standard performance appraisal system -0.666 Lighting and ventilation are enough to working condition -0.479
One Way ANNOVA
H0: There is significant difference between overall satisfaction and demographic profile of the respondents
H1: There is no significant difference between overall satisfaction and demographic profile of the respondents
The table checks whether the overall F?s for demographic profile of the respondents were significant or not by using the ANOVA program. Note that out of demographics, education wise respondent differ significantly where F ratio is used to determine the size of the mean differences for each individual independent variables comparison, F(5,74)=0.011. The test between groups shows that F ratio for education which are statistically significant (P Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1612http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16121. Dr.Meenakshi Gupta and Ms.Parul Sharma (2011),”Factors credentials boosting quality of work life of BSNL employees in Jammu region”
2. Susan J. Harrington and Julie Santiago (2006),”Organizational culture and telecommuters QWL and professional Isolation”,
3. Alireza,Ali Rezaeean, Jufar Bolhari, Sona Bairamzadeh, and Amir(2011),”The relationship between QWL and Demographic characteristics of IT Staffs”
4. Rochita Ganguly(2010),”Quality of work life and Job Satisfaction of a group of university employees”
5. Rajib Lochan Dhar(2008),”QWL:A study of municipal corporation bus drivers”
6. Mu.Subramanian, Anjani.N(2010),”Constructs of quality of work life-A perspective of Textile and Engineering Employees”
7. Guna Seelan Rethinam and Maimunah Ismail (2008),”Constructs of Quality of work life: A perspectives of information and technology professionals”
8. Md.Zohurul Islam and Sununta siengthai (2009),”Quality of work life and organizational performance: Empirical Evidence from Dhaka Export processing zone”
9. Jen Schoepke, Peter.L. T .Hoonakker and Pascale Carayon ,” Quality of working life among women and men in the information technology workforce”
10. A.Sabarirajan and N.Geethanjali , “A study on quality of work life and organizational performance among the employees of public and private banks in dindigul”
11. Uma Sekaran(1985), has examined the QWL in the Indian (Nationalized) banking industry as perceived by organizational members at different organizational levels in different job positions
12. Suri(1991) undertook a survey to study about the QWL life practices in the Indian industry, the organizations covered were manufacturing and service sectors
13. Ganguli and Joseph(1976),”Studied Quality of working life among young workers in Air India with special reference to life and job satisfaction issues “
14. National seminar on improving the quality of working life(1982)
15. Hoque and Rahman(1999), conducted a study to assess and compare the QWL of industrial workers of organization of public and private nature in Bangladesh
16. Haridasan and Sultan(2002) has examined that the extend of occupational stress felt by the library staff of the Gorakhpur University
17. Quality of work life (2010) – P.Jerlin Rupa
18. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quality_of_worki ng_life
19. http://expertscolumn.com/content/qualityworking-life-qwl
20. www.qowl.co.uk/
21. www.citehr.com/105314-ten-important-tipsimprove-quality-your-work-life.html
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20General SciencesDEGRADATION OF AZO AND TRIPHENYLMETHANE DYE BY THE BACTERIA ISOLATED FROM LOCAL INDUSTRIAL WASTE
English3949Pratiksha PradhanEnglish Harsh Dev KumarEnglish Gireesh Babu KEnglishThe local industrial sugar cane waste water sample was collected from Meerut, Uttar Pradesh for the isolation of dye degrading bacteria. The isolate SCWS5 was selected based on its maximum decolorization of dyes Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green (each 150mg/L). Phenotypic characterization and phylogenetic analysis based on 16S rDNA sequence confirmed SCWS5 as Bacillus sp. On physiochemical parameters optimization, Bacillus sp. SCWS5 degraded 10.13% (0.15mg/mL), 11.76% (0.11mg/mL) and 9.32% (0.8mg/mL) of Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green, respectively within 2h whilst 100% degradation (2.97mg/mL) at 18h for Methyl orange, 100% (2.43mg/mL) at 16h for Congo red and 100% (3.18mg/mL) at 20h for Malachite green were recorded. The degraded products were found non-toxic in nature while bacterial cells showed elongation and membrane rupturing under SEM taken from dye degraded media.
EnglishDecolorization, Azo-dye, Triphenylmethane dye, SEM, Toxicity plasma parameters.INTRODUCTION
Dyes are usually aromatic, heterocyclic compounds and often recalcitrant, some of them being toxic and even carcinogenic [1]. Various types of synthetic dyes and pigments are extensively used (approximately 100,000 tons/year) worldwide in textile sector [2]. During synthesis and usage, an estimated 10 to 15% of total dye content is released into the environment [3]. These are chemically diverse and divided into azo, anthraquinone, heterocyclic polymers and triphenylmethane dyes. Most of these are stable against light, temperature and biodegradation and have therefore accumulated in the environment as recalcitrant compounds [4]. Thus, the wastewater must be treated before releasing into the environment. For biological treatment of wastewater containing dyes, microbial decolorization and degradation of dyes has been of considerable interest [5]. Numerous studies have demonstrated on the ability of bacteria in monoculture to degrade dyes anaerobically and aerobically [6]. Many microorganisms are capable of degrading azo dyes, including bacteria, fungi and yeast [7]. Also the aerobic degradation of triphenylmethane dyes has been also demonstrated repeatedly; however these dyes resisted degradation in activated sludge systems [8]. Although research on biodegradation of different dyes by microbial consortia from polluted sites have been reported internationally but limited reports have been published on the dye degradation by the bacteria isolated from local industrial wastes. The present study emphasized on the degradation of three dyes belonging to monoazo, diazo and triphenylmethane group by the bacteria isolated from local industrial waste, which can be useful in providing an alternate method to accomplish dye degradation of a wide range of dyes in an eco-friendly manner.
MATERIALS AND METHODS Dyes and chemicals The dyes Methyl orange (Fig.1a), Congo red (Fig.1b) and Malachite green (Fig.1c) used in the study were of analytical grade procured from Himedia, Mumbai, India. The Methyl orange is a mono azo dye of the 4- dimethylaminoazobenzene-4'-sulfonic acid sodium salt and Congo red is the sodium salt of benzidinediazo-bis-1-naphtylamine-4-sulfonic acid, a secondary diazo dye whereas Malachite green is the triphenylmethane dye of {4-[(4- dimethylaminophenyl)-phenyl-methylidene]- dimethyl-azanium chloride}. The Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green has maximum absorbance (λmax) of light at 444nm [9], 530nm [10] and 620nm [11], respectively. Isolation and identification of dye degrading bacteria The wastewater sample of local sugar cane industry collected from Meerut, Uttar Pradesh, India was screened for the dye degrading bacteria. The screening and routine sub culturing of dye decolorizing bacterial isolate was carried out on nutrient media (in g/L: Peptone, 10; Sodium chloride, 5; Yeast extract, 5) at pH 7 on 35ºC. The wastewater sample was tenfold serially diluted and 100µL of 10-5 dilution was spread plated on the nutrient agar plates. After 24h incubation, morphologically distinct colonies obtained were picked, purified by streak plate method and inoculated into the separate liquid medium amended with individual 150mg/L Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green dyes to analyze their decolorizing ability. Following 10h interval, aliquot of 1mL was withdrawn and centrifuged at 10,000rpm for 10min. The clear supernatant obtained was used to measure the dye decolorization at their respective absorbance maxima (λmax) using spectrophotometer where a medium without dye and inoculum was used as blank while medium with dye but without inoculum was taken as control. The absorbances for all the isolates were taken similarly up to 50h. All the experiments were carried out in triplicates and the mean value was taken. The decolorization of dyes was calculated by the given formula [12] as; Decolorization efficiency (%)=I-F/I ×100, Where I=Absorbance of media prior to incubation, F=Absorbance of decolorized media. After calculating the percentage decolorization of dyes up to 50h, the bacterial isolate with the strongest decolorizing ability, designated as SCWS5, was selected and preserved on slant and broth as stock. The isolate SCWS5 was initially studied for the phenotypic characteristics on the nutrient agar media followed by Gram staining [13] and then outsourced to Bioserve Biotechnologies Pvt. Ltd, Hyderabad, India, for molecular identification by 16S rDNA technique. The 16S rDNA sequence obtained was initially analyzed at NCBI server (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/) using BLAST (Blastn) tool and corresponding sequences downloaded were then further used for phylogenetic analyses using MEGA version 4 [14]. Study of physiochemical parameters The isolated strain SCWS5 was further studied for the physiochemical parameters to check their effect on the dyes decolorization taking different carbon sources (1%), nitrogen sources (1%), pH (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10), temperature (25, 30, 35 and 40ºC), various dye concentrations (150, 200, 250, 300 and 350mg/L), different volumes of inoculum (100, 150, 200, 250 and 300µL) and static/shaker condition. The dyes decolorization was monitored as described in the earlier section. The decolorization analysis of the dyes was then further observed using all the optimized parameters with respect to time after every 2h interval while the cell pellets obtained were dried at 85°C and weighed mass was then expressed in mg/mL. Study of decolorization mode of SCWS5 on dyes and Scanning Electron Microscope Decolorization of dyes may take place by adsorption [15] or degradation [16]. Dye adsorption can be also easily judged by an evidently colored cell pellet, whereas those retaining their original colors are accompanied by the occurrence of biodegradation [7]. The three sets of optimized nutrient broth (25mL) inoculated (1% v/v) with pure bacterial isolate SCWS5 were incubated overnight and before addition of dyes (individually150mg/L in separate flask), one flask from each set were autoclaved at 121°C for half an hour while the unautoclaved served as control. After 24h incubation, samples from the flasks were withdrawn and centrifuged at 10,000rpm for 10min. The supernatant was used for monitoring the dye decolorization as described earlier. To determine the effect of dyes on the isolate SCWS5 cell morphology, visualization of the 24h old cultures grown in normal and individual dye (150mg/L) amended optimized nutrient broth were performed under scanning electron microscope (SEM) [17]. Toxicity study Microbial toxicity and phytotoxicity test were performed in order to assess the toxicity of dyes and their degraded products formed. The degraded products of each 150mg/L Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green from the 50mL optimized nutrient media were extracted in equal volume of ethyl acetate, dried and dissolved in 5mL sterilized distilled water to make a final concentration of 500ppm and 1000ppm. These final concentrations were then used for the microbial toxicity studies carried out in relation to Staphylococcus aureus, Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Aspergillus niger while the respective concentrations of dyes were taken as control. The growth inhibition zones of microbes (diameter in cm) were recorded after 24h and 48h incubation at 35°C for the bacterial and fungal strains, respectively. The phytotoxicity study of Methyl orange, Congo red, Malachite green and their degraded products (50mL dye degraded media extracted in ethyl acetate, dried and final concentration of 100ppm in 5mL) was also carried out (at room temp) in relation to Triticum aestivum and Phaseolus mungo (10 seeds each) by watering separately 5mL sample of control Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green and their degraded product (100ppm per day). The control set was watered with distilled water simultaneously whilst germination (%), length of plumule (shoot) and radicle (root) was recorded after 10 days. RESULTS Screening and identification of dye degrading bacteria A bacterial isolate SCWS5 was able to degrade 65.17% of Methyl orange, 69.41% of Congo red and 53.23 % of Malachite green within 50h incubation in individual dye amended nutrient broth (Fig.2). The isolate SCWS5 colonies were white, glossy, round with regular margins and 1 to 3mm in diameter and was observed to be Gram-positive rods. Sequence analysis of 16S rDNA showed that the isolate SCWS5 had highest similarity of 100% with Bacillus megaterium DMZ 32 (X60629). Based on the phenotypic characteristics and phylogenetic analysis, isolate SCWS5 was identified as Bacillus sp. Phylogenetic relationship between the isolate SCWS5 with different members of the Bacillus sp. are illustrated in the Fig.3. The 16S rDNA sequence of Bacillus sp. SCWS5 have been deposited in Gene Bank with accession number JQ900757. Analysis of physiochemical parameters Effect of carbon and nitrogen sources The dye decolorization efficiency of the bacterial strain SCWS5 was monitored with 1% different carbon and nitrogen sources as supplement in the nutrient media. Results concluded that among the different carbon sources, glucose showed maximum decolorization of 48.7, 51.8 and 49.9% for the Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green, respectively (Fig.4). Whilst among the different nitrogen supplements used, beef extract showed maximum decolorization of 49.7, 44.3 and 42.6% for the Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green, respectively (Fig.5).
Effect of pH and temperature The strain SCWS5 represented lowest dye degradation of 2.67, 4.34 and 1.21% at pH 4 while maximum degradation of 52.4, 59 and 50.7% were observed for Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green, respectively at pH 7(Fig.6). The lowest dyes degradation of 26.2, 29.6 and 25.8% at temperature of 25°C while maximum dye degradation of 69.5, 72.3 and 67.4% at 40°C were observed for Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green, respectively (Fig.7). Decolorization on static and shaker conditions It was monitored that under static condition, isolate SCWS5 degraded 56.3, 57 and 51.7% of the Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green, respectively whereas higher degradation of 59.3, 61.8 and 58.9% for Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green, respectively were recorded on the shaker condition (Fig.8). Effect of inoculum and dye concentration The decolorization of 58.3, 61.3 and 57.1% were recorded for the 100µL volume of inoculum whereas 100% decolorization were recorded with the use of 300µL volume of inoculum for the 150 mg/L of Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green after 24h incubation at 35ºC (Fig.9). The study also recorded that at 150mg/L concentration the isolate showed 58.3, 61.3 and 57.1% decolorization which decreased to 14.2, 17.1 and 10.4% for the 350mg/L of Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green, respectively (Fig.10). Effect of total physiochemical parameters The decolorization efficiency of the bacterial isolate SCWS5 on individual 150mg/L dyes and its biomass was calculated using all of the optimized parameters with respect to time (Fig.11). It was deduced that bacteria degraded 10.1% (0.15mg/mL), 11.7% (0.11mg/mL) and 9.32% (0.08mg/mL) of Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green, respectively within 2h whilst 100% degradation (2.97mg/mL) at 18h for Methyl orange, 100% (2.43mg/mL) at 16h for Congo red and 100% (3.18mg/mL) at 20h for Malachite green were recorded. This proves that the combined effect of optimized parameters attributed to the decolourization of the dyes by the isolated bacteria Bacillus sp. SCWS5. Decolorization mode of Bacillus sp. SCWS5 and SEM analysis In the heat-killed bacterial cultures, only 6.22, 6.91and 7.87% decolorization of Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green were recorded after 24h incubation while in the control culture 100% decolorization of Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green were obtained in 24h (Fig.12) and the cell pellets were not pigmented. Moreover, the scanning micrographs showed elongation and cell membrane rupturing for cells taken from the dye degraded media as compared to the normal media as depicted in Fig.13 (a, b, c, d), revealed the toxic effect of dyes on the bacteria. Microbial toxicity and phytotoxicity study The inhibition zones were observed with control Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green with all bacterial strains studied, whereas their degraded products did not show any growth inhibition (Table1). During phytotoxicity study, germination (%) of both Triticum aestivum and Phaseolus mungo seeds were less in parent dyes compared to their respective degraded products, verified no toxicity of the degraded products (Table 2). DISCUSSION This study has been aimed at isolating and characterizing the potential dye degrading bacteria from the local industrial wastes. The strain Bacillus sp. SCWS5, isolated from sugarcane waste water used glucose and beef extract as carbon and nitrogen supplement respectively. Although effects of some other carbon sources on bacterial decolorization performance have been studied in former researches where lactate, peptone, succinate, yeast extract and formate were proved to enhance decolorization but sucrose and dextrin resulted in lower decolorization activities [18]. It was also reported that addition of inorganic nutrients like nitrogen does not always enhance degradation of organic compounds, because there are many other factors which many decrease microbial activity [19]. Urea when dissolved in liquid culture causes a shift of pH more towards acidic side, which decreased the color removal, growth as well as enzyme activity of strains. Also presence of nitrate in culture media might slow down color removal process [20]. The strain Bacillus sp. SCWS5 showed maximum dye decolorization at neutral pH, was in accordance with the report that optimum pH for color removal often exists between 6.0 and 10.0 [21]. Further, the isolate Bacillus sp. SCWS5 showed highest dye degradation on shaker must be because of dissolved oxygen concentration which creates the micro-aerophillic environment in the glass vessel for the bacteria bringing about the decolorization of dyes at a faster rate [22]. Results also concluded that for 100µL inoculum, 350mg/L dye acted as inhibitor for the bacterial growth and resulted in less decolorization whereas 300µL inoculum showed 100% decolorization of 150mg/L of dyes within 24h, suggested that the concentration of dye as substrate can influence the efficiency of dye removal through a combination of factors including the toxicity of dyes at higher concentrations and the ability of the enzyme to recognize the substrate efficiently at very low concentrations [23]. Further, the toxicity results for Methyl orange, Congo red and Malachite green coincides with the other research work reported for the respective dyes degradation using other bacteria [24, 10, 11]. The non-toxicity of dye degraded products can be suggested because of hydroxylase and oxygenase produced by the bacteria [25]. CONCLUSION It was inferred that the bacterial strain Bacillus sp. SCWS5 shows 100% degradation with the optimized physiochemical parameters. Since, the degraded products of the dyes showed no toxic effect on the microbes and plants, implies that maximum degradation of a wide range of different dyes can be meted out by employing the potential bacterial strains from the local industrial wastes using optimized physiochemical parameters as it renders the ability to bio transform the toxic dyes into non-toxic products without any additional treatment. This study further recommends the identification, purification of enzymes and their kinetics involved in the degradation of dyes by the isolate and exploitation of potential bacterial consortium from the local industrial wastes in the treatment of dye polluted waste water which would be cost-effective and can contribute to eradication of the dye pollution from the water bodies. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Ms. Pratiksha Pradhan one of the authors is thankful to Dr. J.J.D Pradhan, Director, Health and Family Welfare, Sikkim, for necessary support and assistance.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1613http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16131. Vyas BRM, Mollitoris HP. Involvement of an extracellular H2O2-dependent ligninolytic activity of the white rot fungus Pleurotus ostreatus in the decolorization of Remazol Brilliant Blue R. Appl Environ Microbiol 1995; 61:3919-3927.
2. Moreira MT, Mielgo I, Feijoo G, Lema JM. Evaluation of different fungal strains in the decolourization of synthetic dyes. Biotechnol Lett 2000; 22:1499-1503.
3. Verma P, Madamwar D. Comparative study of transformation of azo dye by different white rot fungi. Indian Journal of Biotechnology 2002; 1:393-396.
4. Vasdev K. Decolorization of triphenylmethane dyes by six white-rot fungi isolated from nature. Journal of Bioremediation and Biodegradation 2011; 29(5):128-133.
5. Kalme SD, Parshetti GK, Jadhav SU, Govindwar SP. Biodegradation of benzidine based dye Direct Blue 6 by Pseudomonas desmolyticum NCIM 2112. Bioresour Technol, doi:10.1016/j.biortech.2006.05.023.
6. Banat IM, Nigam P, Singh D, Marchant R. Microbial decolorization of textile dye containing effluents: A review. Bioresour Technol 1996; 58:217-227.
7. Chen KC, Wu JY, Liou DJ, Sz-Chwun JH. Decolorization of the textile dyes by newly isolated bacterial strains, J Biotechnol 2003; 10:57-68.
8. Sarnaik S, Kanekar P. Biodegradation of methyl Violet by Pseudomonas mendocina MCH B-402. Appl Environ Microbiol 1999; 52:251-254.
9. Chen Z-X, Jin X-Y, Chen Z, Megharaj M, Naidu R. Removal of methyl orange from aqueous solution using bentonite-supported nanoscale zero-valent iron. Journal of Colloid and Interface Science 2011; 363: 601-607.
10. Aileen C. Jalandoni B, Anna LA. Decena S, Ernelea PC, Virginia LB, Wilfredo LB. Characterization and identification of Congo red decolorizing bacteria from monocultures and consortia. Philippine Journal of Science 2010; 139:71-78.
11. Parshetti G, Kalme S, Saratale G, Govindwar S. Biodegradation of malachite green by Kocuria rosea MTCC 1532. Acta Chimica Slovenica 2006; 53(4):492-498.
12. Ola IO, Akintokun AK, Akpan I, Omomowo IO, Areo VO. Aerobic decolourization of two reactive azo dyes under varying carbon and nitrogen source by Bacillus cereus. Afr J Biotechnol 2010; 9(5):672-677.
13. Aneja KR. Experiments in Microbiology, Plant Pathology and Biotechnology, 4th. Ed. (2003). New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, India.
14. Tamura K, Dudley J, Nei M. MEGA4: Molecular Evolutionary Genetics Analysis (MEGA) software version 4.0. Mol Biol Evol 2007; 24:1596-1599.
15. Aravindhan R, Rao JR, Nair BU. Removal of basic yellow dye from aqueous solution by sorption on green alga Caulerpa scalpelliformis. J Hazard Mater 2007; 142:68- 76.
16. Kumar K, Devi SS, Krishnamurthi K, Dutta D, Chakrabartiet T. Decolorisation and detoxification of Direct Blue-15 by a bacterial consortium. Bioresour Technol 2007; 98:3168-3171.
17. Kassongo J, Togo C A. The potential of whey in driving microbial fuel cells: A dual prospect of energy recovery and remediation. Afr J Biotechnol 2010; 9(46):7885-7890.
18. Xu M, Guo J, Zeng G, Zhong X, Sunet G. Decolorization of anthraquinone dye by Shewanella decolorationis S12. Appl Microbiol Biotechnol 2006; 71:246-251.
19. Steffensen SW, Alexander M. Role of competition for inorganic nutrients in biodegradation of mixtures of substrates, Appl Environ Microbiol 1995; 61: 2859–2862.
20. Carliell CM, Barday SJ, Nadidoo N, Buckley CA, Muuholland DA, Senior E. Microbial decolorization of a reactive azo dye under anaerobic conditions. Water SA (Pretoria) 1995; 21:61-69.
21. Guo JB, Zhou JT, Wang D, Tiana C, Wanga P, Uddina MS, Yua H. Biocalalyst effects of immobilized anthraquinone on the anaerobic reduction of azo dyes by the salt-tolerant bacteria. Water Res 2007; 41:426-432.
22. Hu TL. Degradation of azo dye RP2B by Pseudomonas Luteola. Water Sci Technol 1998; 38:299-306.
23. Pearce CI, Lloyd JR, Guthrie JT. The removal of colour from textile wastewater using whole bacterial cells: a review. Dyes and Pigments 2003; 58:179–196.
24. Parshetti GK, Telke AA, Kalyani DC, Govindwar S P. Decolorization and detoxification of sulfonated azo dye methyl orange by Kocuria rosea MTCC 1532. J Hazard Mater 2009; 176: 503-09.
25. Pandey A, Singh P, Iyengar L. Bacterial decolorization and degradation of azo dyes. International Biodeterioration and Biodegradation 2007; 59:73-84.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20General SciencesBIO DARK-MATTER CHEMISTRY
English5054Philip BenjaminEnglishWhere matter exists chemistry exists. The objective of this study was to examine the viability of applying principles of ordinary chemistry to "dark matter" particles with the outcome of extraordinary chemistry or "dark chemistry" akin to "SUSY Chemistry". Monopoles will substitute electric charges. Biophoton emission is considered as an evidence for weak interactions of "light" and "dark" chemical bonds. A differential distribution of the dark particles across the taxa predicts a ratio of biophoton emission rates between plants and humans which agrees with reported experimental value. The ancient notions of a "subtle body" and related anomalies may have a scientific basis.
EnglishDark-matter, biophoton, neutrino, monopole, axion.INTRODUCTION Dark-matter is estimated to account for eighty percent of all matter in the universe. It has very weak interaction, if any, with "light" matter. Kaplan et al (2009) proposed that dark matter exists as bound states of dark atoms. Then, extraordinary dark-matter chemistry and its bonds will exist corresponding to ordinary chemistry and its chemical bonds. There are many candidates suggested for dark matter such as axions, (Duffy et al, 2005, 2009, Erken et al, 2012), neutrinos (Davis et al, 1985, Lee et al, 2011) and monopoles (Gomez-Sanchez et al, 2011). Physicist Professor Nikolai Nijegorodov (2008) states: "in the nearest future physicists would prove, first theoretically and then experimentally that neutrino atom and neutrino molecules do exist. That would be enough evidence that life in the world of neutrino does exist". Okulov's (1981) neutrino model with magnetic charge (a point source of magnetic field analogous to the electric charge, e) predicts a nonzero mass. Fermionic axions have been theoretically shown to exist (Hooper and Wang, 2004). Gravitons may behave as charged particles with negative and positive color charges as well as magnetic color (H. Javadia et al, 2009). Malkus (1951) determined that the binding energies of monopoles to matter are close to those of chemical bonds, that the Dirac magnetic monopoles interact with matter and could be separated by strong magnetic fields. If darkmatter is confined to the galaxies only and if it has no chemistry, it is of no routine use for the biosphere. Chemistry and chemical bonds are essentially "spin" phenomena. Dark matter chemistry parallels SUSY chemistry (Clavelli et al, 2009); monopoles will substitute electric charges. If the human mind is purely a quantum byproduct of ordinary particles, then pan-psychism is inevitable, for which there is no experimental evidence. The humaniqueness idea of Hauser (2008) seems obvious and opposed to the late Harvard Prof. Gould's man-twig identity notion. Dark matter chemistry may perhaps give substance to the ancient notions of a "subtle body" or even Maya (EM being the Maya and non-EM being the Real) or the notions of Forms by Plato and Aristotle. It is materialism extraordinaire.
METHODOLOGY AND RATIONALE Popp FA et al (1992, 1994) had established that all living cells spontaneously emit 380-780 nm ultraweak photons (biophotons), from 1 to 1,000 photons/sq.cm/s, depending on the organism’s position on the taxonomy scale and the vitality of the cells. ["The Field" by McTaggart (2008) gives an exhaustive bibliography]. Biophotons have these characteristics: 1. They are spontaneous, continuous and intrinsic to live matter only, not in robots. 2. They are ultra-weak photons with different frequency bands for different taxa 3. These photons are coherent natural lasers 4. Plants emit 100 photons/sq.cm/s which is 10 times more than humans. 5. Sick cells emit more than healthy cells, with sudden bursts at cell-death. 6. Its origin is unknown; the very similar DNA structures cannot account for the very dissimilar emission rates .No known chemical reaction including chemi/bio luminescence explains biophotons. The biosphere seems to have distinct photonic markers for its biodiversity which cannot be accounted for by the three fermions common to all matter. Besides, something more substantial than 0.1% genetic divergence must justify the difference between humans and chimps. Ackerman et al (2009) and Feng et al (2008) posited that "dark matter couples to a new longrange force known as “dark electromagnetism,” mediated by particles known as “dark photons.” Ordinary chemical bonding occurs when two nuclei simultaneously attract one or more electrons. A two-state system of dark-matter atoms may be set up qualitatively with energy levels split between them, which result in an energy bond. A dark nucleus may consist of positive monopoles (psychons) and neutrinos. Adding a negative monopole (emoton) at a certain distance from the dark nucleus will constitute a dark atom. E0 is the ground state energy of two such nuclei A and B separated by an infinite distance. The emoton will switch positions between A and B. The exchange effects will split E0 into two sub-levels E0 +α and E0 -α where α is the probability amplitude for the exchange. The lowest energy level possible is when the emoton spends an equal time between A and B. It will depend on the distance between A and B. This causes "bonding". It is indeed much more complex than that, when various other light and dark particles are involved, but bonding energies and distances between A and B may be estimated for a qualitative basis of dark-matter chemistry. It has been proposed that they may yield dark Chemistries following the pattern of stable duet or octet configuration rules of ordinary chemistry, spin-spin interactions and couplings (Benjamin, 2003, 2007-A, 2007-B, 2010 A and B). Biophotons form ultra-weak coherent laser beams, integral waves in phase, inexplicable by ordinary chemistries. Electromagnetic (EM) matter has very little, if any, direct interactions with non-EM dark matter. Primakoff effect may convert axions to photons and vice versa in strong electromagnetic fields, but biosphere has no such strong fields other than the weak geomagnetic field. With organism's complexity, biophoton emissions decrease and magnetic fields increase. The spectral distribution of biophotons is quite flat within the range of 300 to 800 nm. Bentov (1977) describes a series of energy exchange diagrams which illustrate different frequencies of different species. The vast differences in biophoton emission rates by an order of magnitude and the different bands across the taxa point to a differential distribution of bio dark-matter particles in plants, animals and humans (Benjamin 210). Benjamin (2003) proposed an axion-like bio dark-matter and its chemistry. These axions were called emotons (E,), psychons (P) and neumatons (N) coupled respectively to electrons (e), protons(p) and neutrons (n) via spin-spin interactions. Electron/emoton pairs are common to all life forms, proton/psychon will be in animals and humans only and neutron/neumaton will be unique to humans as shown below.
Species Particles Stability Factor Humans (e/E) + (p/ P) + (n/ N) 3 3 Animals (e/E) + (p/P) + n 3 2 Plants (e/E) + p + n 3 1 Stability ratios of the dark-matter bodies will then be: 31 : 32 : 3 3 (or 1:3:9) for plants, animals and humans, where the powers 1, 2, 3 refer to the number of kinds of dark matter particles (E,P,N) in each taxon, the base 3 refer to the number of kinds of light matter common to all (e, p and n). Biophoton emission rates will be inversely proportional to the stability factor. This predicts an emission ratio of 9:1 in plants and animals, agreeing closely with experiment. Only humans will have the most complete set and most stable dark bodies. Differential incorporation of dark particles will be governed by both "dark" and "light" genetics, similar to XX and XY chromosome production. An additional scheme for neutrinos will be the same, doubling stability factors without changing ratios of emission rates. There is a correspondence here to the taxonomic gradation of sentience. Plants have only stimulusresponse. Animals add intelligence. Humans add ratiocinative self-awareness. A triune continuum (Naumenko, 2002) of life seems to exist with a taxon dependent genetically determined makeup of the dark-matter bodies. The plant realm will be a spatio-temporal continuum via emoton E, corresponding to the universal electron. The animal realm will be the constitution continuum where the plant realm is continued with the addition of psychon P, (different from the Eccles dendron). The human realm will be the information continuum where the animal realm continues by the neumaton N which is unique to humans. DISCUSSION Physicalist Dualism From an ordinary materialistic view, no single basic difference in constituent particles separates human beings from other animals or even plants. As such pan-psychism is inevitable for which there is no empirical or experiential evidence. Furthermore, 0.1% disparity in about 20 genes alone cannot account for the vast difference between humans and chimpanzees. In Sanskrit, Greek, Hebrew and Latin the root for soul and spirit is "breath" or "wind". As the ancients perceived the invisible "last breath" as the last sign of life,”breath" was identified as the "invisible life-source"- the subtle or spiritual body. Had the ancients been aware of dark matter, most probably soul/spirit would have been called dark bodies! A bio dark-matter body meets all the requirements of what is commonly called "spirit” or "soul". When fully decoupled at death from the light body of mass m, the non-entropic dark body of negligible mass will be left at a relatively negative energy state (-E = mC^2) which is needed to rise up this durable body to any functional level. That leavs little chance for roving ghosts. ET's/UFO's may be dark-matter entities at high energy states. The "light" body is coupled to a verisimilar "dark” mirror body via their respective chemical bonds involving spin-spin interactions. Depending on the extent of dissociation of these coupling bonds, anomalous phenomena such as NDE, OBE can occur in extreme situations. Appropriate magnetic fields may also effect such dissociations (Persinger 2010, 2011). Cartesian dualism leads to the conundrum of a nonphysical mind in a physical body which lacks scientific evidence ((Kim, Jaegwon, 1993). However, a reductive physicalist dualism where mental events are dependent on physical events is viable if the physical dark matter and its chemistry are incorporated. Here the EM and non-EM bodies are co-created from the moment of conception subject to dark and light genetic codes. Then physical/nonphysical dichotomy is unwarranted. Dark-matter such as the neutrinos, axions and monopoles meet the requirements of what is usually considered spiritual or mystical. Being nonelectric they cannot be easily detected by ordinary (EM) tools.
Recycling, replacement, repair, apoptosis etc create constant flux in organisms at atomic, molecular, cellular and synaptic levels, within periods ranging from seconds to days or years. However, there is nothing kaleidoscopic about the mind or brain. Its processes including memories remain intact over a life time. How can transient and ever changing "structures" of brain retain the constancy and unity of mind, or effect memory consolidation and segregation of memories into short, medium and long terms? The durable darkmatter cells acting as mirror cells will store embodied shared representations, perhaps the universal archetypal symbols which then invisibly enable the brain to interpret the neuronal representations. That may be the basis for telepathy also. The dark and light bodies are in resonance at all levels. Resonance is recognition. Coupled with entanglements, that offers a framework for self-awareness, each recognizing the other. The causal agency for an observation or action is the combined system of dark and light bodies and their neural systems correlating light and dark neurobiological states and events. CONCLUSION Something that intuitively exists internally or externally as real, but is not able to make an impression on our senses need not be nonphysical. The energetics of ordinary chemistries and chemical bonds in living cells cannot account for biophotons. Some very weak but continual interactions seem to exist. Most probably dark chemical bonds permeating light counterparts may transform their bonding electrons into very weak oscillating dipoles which then emit weak photons. Differential distribution of bio dark matter particles give stability factors which account for the experimentally observed ratios of biophoton emission rates across the taxa. In living matter governed by genetics, ordinary visible physical structures may co-exist with corresponding extraordinary invisible physical structures made of dark particles, both co-created from the moment of conception. In traumatic situations dark-matter chemical bonds may dissociate from their corresponding "light" matter bonds causing anomalous phenomena such as NDE, OBE. Low energy resonant magnetic fields can also cause the same effect. "Channeling" may be possible by alien dark-matter beings who are at a high energy state. Dark-matter chemistry gives new meaning to materialism and physicalism.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Author acknowledges the immense help received from the scholars whose articles are cited and included in references of this manuscript and is grateful to authors / editors / publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed. Encouragement from Prof. Suhrit K. Day, Prof. Richard Amoroso and Prof. Ha
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1614http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16141. Ackerman L, Buckley MR, Carroll SM, Kamionkowski M. Dark matter and dark radiation, Phys. Rev. D 2009;79 (02) 3519.
2. Arzy S, Seeck M, Ortigue S, Spinelli L, Blanke O. Stimulating illusory own-body perceptions, Neuropsychology Nature 2002; 419: 269-270 doi:10.1038/419269a; Nature 2006; 443. 287.
3. Benjamin P. Dark Chemistry and the Paranormal, WorldComp'10 Proceedings of the International Conference on Artificial Intelligence July 2010; II: 633-39. CSREA Press, Las Vegas,
4. Benjamin P. Dark Chemistry and Paranormal Phenomena, International Journal of Applied Science and Computations 2010; 17 (1): 16-36.
5. Benjamin P. Dark Matter and Dark Chemistry. NeuroQuantology 2007; 5 (3): 322-326.
6. Benjamin P. Dark Chemistry or Psychic Spin Pixel?NeuroQuantology 2007; 5 (2): 197- 204.
7. Benjamin P. Mind Matter. Noetic Journal, [Nobelist Sir John Eccles Centennial Edition]. 2003; 4 (4): 351-360
8. Benjamin P. Bio Dark-Matter. http://biodarkmatter.webs.com/index.htm . 2011
9. Bentov. Stalking the Wild Pendulum: On the Mechanics of Consciousness, E. P. Dutton, 1977. ISBN 9780525474586
10. Clavelli L, Sanjoy S. Covalent Binding in a Susy Background. Int. J. Mod. Phys. 2009; A24: 4245.
11. Davis M, Efstathiou G, Frenk, CS., and White SDM. "The evolution of large-scale structure in a universe dominated by cold dark matter". Astrophysical Journal 1985; May 15, 292: 371–394.
12. Duffy DL, Karl van Bibber. Axions as dark matter particles. New J. Phys. 2009. 11:(10) 5008.
13. Erken O, Sikivie P, Tam H, Yang Q. Axion Dark Matter and Cosmological Parameters. Phys. Rev. Lett. 2012; 108: 06 1304.
14. Feng JL, Tu H, Yu, and Hai-Bo. Thermal Relics in Hidden Sectors. J. Cosmology and Astroparticle Physics 2008;10: 43.
15. Gomez-Sanchez C and Holdom B. Monopoles, strings, and dark matter, Phys. Rev. 2011; D 83 123524 [11 pages].
16. Greyson B. Near-Death Experiences. In E. Cardeña, S. J. Lynn, and S. Krippner (Eds.), Varieties of anomalous experiences 2000; 315-352. Washington, DC: American Psychological Assocn.
17. Hauser M. A theory of "humaniqueness". American Association for the Advancement of Science, February, 2008.
18. Hooper, D and Wang, L-Tao. "Possible evidence for axino dark matter in the galactic bulge". Phys.Rev. 2004; D 70 (6): 63506
19. Javadia H, Forouzbakhshb F, Pour Imanic H. A New definition of Graviton.General Science Journal. 2009; 1-11.
20. Kaplan, D. E., Krnjaic, G.Z., Rehermann, K.R. and Wells, C.M. http://arxiv.org/abs/0909.0753v1. Cornell University Library.
21. Kim, J. Supervenience and Mind. 1993. Cambridge U Press.
22. Lee, Hye-Sung, Liu Z, Soni, A. Neutrino dark matter candidate in 4th generation scenarios. 2011. arXiv.org. hep-ph 1105.3490
23. Malkus WV, Physical Review (1951); 83 (5), 899-905,
24. McTaggart Lynne. The Field, 2008, Harper. ISBN 978-0-06-143518-8 (pbk).
25. Naumenko, A. "Triune Continuum Paradigm ". PhD thesis June 2002: 2581, Swiss Federal Inst. of Tech. - Lausanne. EPFL.
26. Nijegorodov N. "On Physical Interactions and the World of God". 2008; www.ub.bw/news.cfm?t=905, accessed on 8th May 2012.
27. Okulov Iu.I. Problem of Magnetic Charge and Neutrino Mass. 17th International Cosmic Ray Conf. Paris, July 13-25, 1981.
28. Persinger, M, Saroka, KS, Koren, SA, and StPierre, L. "The Electromagnetic Induction of Mystical and Altered States in the Lab". J. Consciousness Exploration 2010;1 (7): 808– 30. No More Secrets" 2011. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9l6VPpDu blg, accessed on 9th October 2012
29. Popp FA, Gu Q, and Li KH. Biophoton Emission. Modern Physics Letters.1994. 1269- 1296.
30. Popp FA, Li KH, Gu Q (eds). Recent Advances in Biophoton Research, 1992; Singapore: World Scientific.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20General SciencesANTIMICROBIAL POTENTIAL AND PHYTOCHEMICAL ANALYSIS OF PLANT EXTRACTS OF ANETHUM SOWA
English5564Rashmi MathurEnglishAnethum sowa are widely used traditional medicinal plant to treat various ailments. To provide a scientific basis for traditional uses of Anethum sowa,their ethanolic, aqueous,n-Butanol and petroleum ether extracts of various plant parts were tested against human pathogenic microorganisms (Pseudomonas aeruginosa , Escherichia coli, Cogulase positive staphylococci, Cogulase negative staphylococci , Enterococcus species, Candida albicans and Candida parapsilosis).The antimicrobial potential of Anethum sowa against human pathogenic microorganisms was investigated. Their isolated phytoconstituents were evaluated for their antimicrobial potential. Antimicrobial activity of various plants extracts was compared with commercially available antibiotics. The antimicrobial potential of the above plant extracts was seen against the test organism using agar gel diffusion susceptibility test by standard technique of Opara and Anasa(1993) . The resulting zones of inhibition were measured. The MIC (Minimum inhibitory concentration), MBC (Minimum Bactericidal Concentration) and MFC (Minimum Fungicidal Concentration) of the plant extracts was determined according to the Micro broth dilution technique (Murray et.al.1999). Phytochemical estimation was carried out according to the methods described by Trease and Evans (1989) .Ethanolic and n-Butanol extracts showed considerably good antibacterial activity against all bacteria and fungi. Among all solvents used ethanol extract gave the highest zone of inhibition. With Escherichia coli zone of inhibition was 23.8mm, with Cogulase (+) Staphylococci it was 24.5 mm., with Cogulase (-) Staphylococci 23.0 mm., with Pseudomonas aeruginosa 19.6 mm.,with Enterococcus sp. 15.3 mm., with Candida albicans and Candida parapsilosis it was 26.5 mm and 25.2 mm respectively. Phytochemical analysis showed the presence of alkaloids, flavonoids, tannins, saponins, steroids, triterpenoids, terpenoids, phenol and glycosides.
EnglishAntimicrobial activity, phytochemical analysis, Anethum sowaINTRODUCTION
Anethum sowa belongs to family Apiaceae, commonly known as sowa. The genus name Anethum is derived from Greek word aneeson or aneeton, which means strong smelling. Its common use in ayurvedic medicine is in abdominal discomfort, colic and for promoting digestion (Pullaiah, 2002). The collection were made from different area of Ajmer district i.e. Kishangarh (Site1), Beawar (Site2), Kekri (Site3), Pushkar (Site4)and Ajmer(Site5) for the study of antibacterial and antifungal activity. Medicinal plants have been used for the treatment of various human ailments since long. A revolution came in the medicinal world with the discovery of antibiotics, for treatment of various bacterial infections. However, their indiscriminate use has led to an alarming increase in antibiotic resistance among microorganisms, giving rise to multiresistant strains, which has become a global concern (Shariff, 2001) . Thus, there is a renewed interest in exploring natural resources for such compounds. The need of the hour is to screen a number of new medicinal plants for promising biological activity and there in vitro propagation to conserve the biodiversity (Mathur et al., 2008; Shekhawat et al., 2009, 2002) . Various plants have been documented in the development of novel drugs, by evaluating their antimicrobial activity, studying active phytochemical constituents and bioactive compounds by various modern analytical techniques. It is believed that crude extract from plants are more effective than isolated components due to their synergistic effect. From the safety point of view, spices and medicinal herbs are mostly targeted to meet the therapeutic demands. Since then efficacy of many medicinal plants in the treatment of many diseases have been put to test in many laboratories (Shajahan and Ramesh, 2004). MATERIAL AND METHODS Method of extraction:- The fresh plant parts were collected, properly washed in tap water, rinsed in sterile distilled water and then air dried in the hot air oven to remove moisture and to dry them. They were then grounded soxhlet extracted using 70% ethanol. The extraction lasted for 24 hours. Antimicrobial susceptibility testing: - The antimicrobial potential of the above plant extracts was seen against the test organisms using the agar-gel diffusion susceptibility test. Sterile Mueller – Hinton plates were taken one plate/organism tested. Three wells of about 3.0 mm diameter were aseptically punched on each agar plate using a sterile cork borer, with at least 30 mm distance between adjacent wells and the periphery. According to the standard technique of Opara and Anasa (1993) - 2-4 colonies of the test organisms were inoculated in sterile broth and these inoculums was swabbed using sterile swab on the surface of above punched Mueller - Hinton agar plates. A fixed volume (0.1 ml) of the plant extract was then introduced into the wells in the increasing concentration and then incubated at 370C for 24 hours. The resulting zones of inhibition were measured. Determination of minimum inhibitory concentration (MIC):- The MIC of the plant extracts was determined according to the micro broth dilution technique (Murray et al., 1999) . It was performed in 96-well microtiter plates for determining the minimum inhibitory concentration (MIC). Standardized suspensions of the test organisms(Pseudomonas aeruginosa , Escherichia coli, Cogulase positive staphylococci, Cogulase negative staphylococci , Enterococcus species, Candida albicans and Candida parapsilosis) were inoculated into a series of 96-well microtiter plate, including one growth and one sterility control .Brain Heart Infusion(BHI) and Sabouraud dextrose broth containing plant extracts in increasing concentration viz 2.5,5,7.5,10,12.5,15,17.5,20 mg/ml. and incubated at 37? C for 24 hours. After overnight incubation these tubes were observed for turbidity. The microtiter plate showing the minimum turbidity was noted for MIC. Minimum Bactericidal Concentration (MBC) The MBCs were determined by first selecting tubes that showed no growth during MIC determination; a loopful from each tube was subcultured onto extract free agar plates, incubated for further 24 hours at 37oC. The least concentration, at which no growth was observed, was noted as the MBC. Minimum Fungicidal Concentration (MFC) The MFC were determined by first selecting tubes that showed no growth during MIC determination; a loopful from each tube was subcultured onto extract free agar plates, incubated for further 24 hours at 37oC. The least concentration, at which no growth was observed, was noted as the MFC. Phytochemical estimation: - This was carried out according to the methods described by Trease and Evans , (1989) RESULTS All the bacterial and fungal pathogens used in this work demonstrated susceptibility to the Ethanol, n-Butanol, Chloroform, Distilled water and Petroleum ether using extracts of Anethum sowa. Ethanol extract gave the highest zone of inhibition (23.8mm) on Escherichia coli. Cogulase (+) Staphylococci showed the highest zone of inhibition i.e. 24.5 mm in diameter. Cogulase (-) Staphylococci showed the highest zone of inhibition i.e. 23.0 mm in diameter. With Pseudomonas aeruginosa the highest zone of inhibition was 19.6 mm in diameter. With Enterococcus sp. highest zone of inhibition recorded was 15.3 mm in diameter. With Candida albicans and Candida parapsilosis it showed the highest zone of inhibition i.e. 25.0 mm and 24.2 mm in diameter respectively. The observation that Anethum sowa has good inhibition against Escherichia coli, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Enterococcus sp., Cogulase (+) Staphylococcus sp., Cogulase (-) Staphylococcus sp., Candida albicans and Candida parapsilosis tends to prove worthy remedy to the problem of drug resistance against these pathogens which are already known to be resistant to most of the standard antibiotics (Penicillin, Tetracycline, Erythromycin, Streptomycin, Fluconazole and Amphotericin B) Tetracycline showed no zone of inhibition against all tested microorganisms. E.coli developed resistance against most of the antibiotics except Streptomycin. Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Enterococci showed resistance against all tested antibiotics. Anethum sowa showed effective results against most of the resistant organisms. Bacteria developed resistance against most of the tested antibiotics. Flower and Stem showed very effective results as compared to Leaf and Root of Anethum sowa. Graph 1,2,3,4 and 5 shows comparison of ethanolic, distilled water, nButanol, petroleum ether and chloroform plant parts extracts of Anethum sowa effects on test bacteria and fungi. Graph shows that ethanol solvent shows appreciable results in comparison to all solvents. Graph 6 showed Comparison of commercially available antibiotics with maximum zone found in Anethum sowa. This graph shows that antibiotics against Candida albicans and Candida parapsilosis show low level of inhibition in comparison to Anethum sowa. Table 1 showed Preliminary phytochemical screening of plant parts of Anethum sowa. During phytochemical estimation with Petroleum ether as a solvent in comparison to all plant parts root showed absence of Alkaloid where as Tannin was not found in all the plant parts except stem. In phytochemical estimation using all solvents Flavonoids, Triterpenoids, Steroids and Terpenoids were found in all plant parts. During phytochemical estimation with respect to Reducing Sugar all solvents and all plant parts showed absence of reducing sugar except Flower part with solvents petroleum ether and chloroform.Table2 showed Minimum Inhibitory Concentration of different extracts of Anethum sowa. With respect to Petroleum ether MIC and MBC was observed against all the tested organisms with all plant parts except stem with organism Enterococci and Root with organisms Cogulase (+) Staphylococci and Candida parapsilosis showed no zone of inhibition. With respect to n-Butanol extracts leaves part showed no MIC and MBC values against Candida albicans. Stem part showed no MIC and MBC values against Cogulase (-) Staphylococci ,Enterococci and Candida parapsilosis. Flower part showed against Enterococci and root part showed no MIC and MBC values against Cogulase (+) Staphylococci, Candida parapsilosis and Candida albicans. With respect to Ethanol extracts leaves part showed no MIC and MBC values against Candida albicans Stem part showed no MIC and MBC values against Cogulase (-) Staphylococci ,Enterococci and Candida parapsilosis. Flower part showed against Enterococci and root part showed no MIC and MBC values against Cogulase (+) Staphylococci and Candida parapsilosis. With respect to Aqueous extracts leaves part showed no MIC and MBC values against Candida albicans Stem part showed no MIC and MBC values against Cogulase (-) Staphylococci ,Enterococci , Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Candida parapsilosis . Flower part showed against Enterococci and root part showed no MIC and MBC values against Cogulase (+) Staphylococci, Pseudomonas aeruginosa Candida albicans and Candida parapsilosis . With respect to Chloroform extracts Stem part showed no MIC and MBC values against Cogulase (-) Staphylococci and Enterococci root part showed no MIC,MFC and MBC values against Cogulase (+) Staphylococci and Candida parapsilosis .Table3 showed Minimum Bactericidal and Fungicidal Concentrations of different extracts of Anethum sowa. The results of these investigation showed that plant extracts of Anethum sowa possess appreciable and potential antimicrobial activity against commonly encountered microorganisms in humans. DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSION The effect of Anethum sowa extracts agrees with the work of Upadhyaya and Chandrikasingh (2010) that showed antimicrobial effect of Anethum sowa over E.coli , Cogulase (+) Staphylococci , Cogulase (-), Staphylococci ,Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Candida albicans and Candida parapsilosis. The effect of Anethum sowa extracts dissagrees with the work of Bajracharya, (2008) [1]Who showed no antibacterial effect of Anethum sowa over Escherichia coli, Klebsiella spp, Citrobacter spp,Enterobacter spp, Salmonella typhi, Salmonella paratyphi, Shigella spp, Proteus vulgaris, Proteus mirabilis and Pseudomonas spp. Kaur and Arora (2010) showed the effect of Anethum graveolens, Foeniculum vulgare and Trachyspermum ammi hot water and acetone seed extracts showed considerably good antibacterial activity against all the bacteria except Klebsiella pneumoniae and one strain of Pseudomonas aeruginosa. Anethum graveolens, Elettaria cardamomum, Foeniculum vulgare, Trachyspermum ammi and Viola odorata were found to be better/equally effective compared to standard antibiotics. V. odorata was the most effective antibacterial with minimum inhibitory concentration values ranging from 1 to 2%. Jana and Shekhawat(2010) The antimicrobial potential of the aqueous and ethanolic extracts of seeds, leaves, roots, callus and in vitro regenerated plantlets leaves of Anethum graveolens have been evaluated against important bacterial strains, Escherichia coli HB101 (MTCC-82), Bacillus subtilis (MTCC-441), Bacillus cereus (MTCC1306), Micrococcus luteus (MTCC-2452). The ethanolic extracts were found to be more potent than aqueous extracts of all parts of plant studied. The ethanolic extracts of seeds showed strong activity against all bacterial strains. In comparison to in vivo, in vitro plant extracts depicted reduced activity. The phytochemical screening of the plant parts showed that leaves, stems, roots, in vitro callus and regenerated leaves were rich in tannins, terpenoids, cardiac glycosides and flavonoids. Though, the seeds of Anethum have been used traditionally as decoctions or infusions prepared in water to treat various ailments, due to the presence of active component, hence, they show maximum activity. Escherichia coli, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Enterococcus sp., Cogulase (+) Staphylococcus sp., Cogulase (-) Staphylococcus sp., Candida albicans and Candida parapsilosis produced appreciable susceptibility with the plant extracts. The result of this research has revealed that many active bioconstituents of Anethum sowa constitute potential qualities in its curative action. Thus it must be exploited upon by scientists in the development of human medicines and drugs. Anethum sowa research for human gastroenteritis, neonatal meningitis ,pneumonia, septicemia, urinary tract infection ,gastrointestinal infection, bactermia, bacterial endocarditis, diverticulitis , meningitis and candidiasis has thus opened a gate way for the possibility of finding cures for many strains of enteric microorganisms which are now resistant to many usable and common antibiotics in our countries. Anethum sowa is a promising cure for human diseases as have been demonstrated in this work .This work serves as an eye opener to many scientists who may utilize the result of the work in developing drugs from Anethum sowa against human pathogenic microorganisms.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Authors are grateful to the Head and Professors of Department of Microbiology J.L.N.Medical College, Ajmer for providing research facilities in their laboratory and also thankful to the Head, Department of Botany Govt.College, Ajmer.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1615http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16151. Bajracharya M. A., Yami D.K., Prasai T. Basnyat R.S. and Lekhak B.,(2008) Screening of some medicinal plants used in Nepalese traditional medicine against enteric bacteria. Scientific World, 6(6):107-110.
2. S. and Shekhawat S.G., (2010). Phytochemical analysis and antibacterial screening of in vivo and in vitro extracts of Indian medicinal herb: Anethum graveolens. Res. J. Med. Plant, 4: 206-212.
3. Kaur J. G. and Arora S.D.,(2010) Bioactive potential of Anethum graveolens, Foeniculum vulgare and Trachyspermum ammi belonging to the family Umbelliferae - Current status. Journal of Medicinal Plants Research 4(2), pp. 087-094.
4. Mathur, S., G.S. Shekhawat and A. Batra (2008). Somatic embryogenesis and plantlet regeneration from cotyledon explants of Salvadora persica L. Phytomorphology, 58: 57-63.
5. Murray P.R.,Baron E.J.,Pfaller M.A.,Tenover F.C.,Yolken R.H.(1999).Manual of clinical Microbiology,American society of Microbiology 7th edition,283-296.
6. Opara A.A. and Ansa M.A. (1993)The antibacterial activity of Tea and Coffee on selected organisms. J. Med. Lab. Sci.vol. 3: 45-48.
7. Pullaiah, T., (2002). Medicinal Plants in India. Vol. 2, Regency Publications, New Delhi, India, pp: 441-443.
8. Shariff, Z.M., (2001). Modern Herbal Therapy for Common Ailments. Nature Pharmacy Series Vol. I. 1st Edn., Spectrum Books Limited, Ibandan, Nigeria in Association with Safari Books (Export) Limited UK., pp: 9-84.
9. Shekhawat, G.S., A. Batra and S. Mathur, (2002). A reliable in vitro protocol for rapid mass propagation of Azadirachta indica Juss. J. Plant Biol., 29: 109-112.
10. Shekhawat, G.S., A. Batra and S. Mathur, (2009). Role of phytohormones and nitrogen in somatic embryogenesis induction in cell culture derived from leaflets of Azadirachta indica. Biologia Plantarum, 53: 707-710.
11. Shajahan, A. and S. Ramesh, (2004). Antimicrobial activity of crude ectocarp extract of pomegranate (Punica granatum L.) against some selected enteropathogenic bacteria. Asian J. Microbiol. Biotech. Env. Sci., 6: 647-648.
12. Trease G. E. and Evans W. C. (1989) A Textbook of Pharmacognosy.11th edn.. Bailliere Tindall Ltd., London, 45-50.
13. Upadhyaya P.A., Chandrikasingh and Somvanshi.(2010) Screening for the antimicrobial potentials of some of the plant extracts and phytochemical on the test organisms .
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20General SciencesA STUDY ON BIOELECTRICITY GENERATION FROM THE SEA WATER USING MICROBIAL FUEL CELL
English6572Shiv KumarEnglish Harsh Dev KumarEnglish Gireesh Babu KEnglishMicrobial Fuel Cells (MFCs) use bacteria as biocatalyst to convert biodegradable substrates into electricity. The normal sea water generated maximum Open Circuit Voltage (OCV) of 4.5mV while sterile sea water generated only 0.9mV OCV in the H-shaped MFC. On optimization of MFC setup, 100% sea water and a salt bridge (5cm × 2cm) containing a mixture of 10% sodium chloride and 5% agar, and electrodes of 32.20cm2 surface area was found ideal. Furthermore, two electrogenic bacteria were isolated from the sea water and individually studied for their electrogenicity. The isolate SWA1 was selected as electrogenic bacteria, as it generated 754.7mV OCV at 37ºC, pH 7.0 with LB medium as anolyte against vinegar as catholyte after 24h inoculation in MFC. Based on phenotypic characteristics and 16S rDNA sequencing, isolate SWA1 was identified as Pseudoalteromonas sp.
EnglishBioelectricity, Electrogenic bacteria, Microbial fuel cell, Open circuit voltage, Sea waterINTRODUCTION
World energy demand is expected to raise from 421quadrillion British Thermal Units (BTUs) in 2003 to 563 quadrillion BTUs in 2015 to 722 quadrillion BTUs in 2030 [1]. Energy production from renewable feed stocks holds great potential to meet these needs in a sustainable and environmentally sound manner and to reduce dependence on fossil fuels. Recently, microbial fuel cells (MFCs) have drawn increasing worldwide attention in directly generating electricity from organic matters [2, 3]. Microbial fuel cells (MFCs) are Bio-Electrochemical Systems (BESs) [4], which utilize bacteria to oxidize organic matter and transfer electrons to the anode, where they flow to the cathode and react with protons and oxygen to form water [5]. Bacteria which are useful in microbial fuel cell operation have the ability to transfer electrons to an electrode (anode), as a terminal electron acceptor are classified as Electrochemically Active Bacteria (EAB) or Electrogenic bacteria [6]. Conventional methods of isolating exoelectrogenic microorganisms are based primarily on identifying microorganisms that can respired using soluble or insoluble metal oxides in agar plates [7, 8]. However, not all dissimilatory metal oxide reducing bacteria are capable of producing electricity in an MFC, and not all bacteria that produce current in an MFC can grow using metal oxides [9,10]. Therefore, these methods may miss important electrochemically active strains of microorganisms. Until date, several reports have been documented on the electricity generation from the different natural waste matter like land fill, sea sediments and waste water; however a very less reports are available where normal sea water samples containing bacteria while organic and inorganic compounds in it used as fuel to monitor its potential for the electricity generation using two chambers MFC. The present study done focus on the determination of electric potential of normal sea water to generate the electricity in fabricated two chamber MFC followed by screening and identification of potent electrogenic bacteria present in it.
METHODS AND MATERIALS
Collection of samples
The sea water sample was collected in sterile containers from the Kanyakumari,Tamil Nadu, India whereas a liter of sewage wastewater from Meerut, Uttar Pradesh, India was also collected, carry and stored at 4ºC until employed in the experiment. Initially, the studies were carried with sea sediment samples as a sole anolyte against vinegar, to note the bioelectrical contribution of the microbial flora present in it.
MFC fabrication and operation
The H-shaped MFCs were fabricated with two polycarbonate bottles (500 mL) as chambers and a PVC pipe (5cm × 1cm) for preparing a salt bridge. The slat bridges were prepared by filling boiled sodium chloride (10%) solution containing 5% agar. The salt bridges were fixed to the bottles with the aid of epoxy adhesive (M-Seal, Pidilite Industries Ltd, Maharashtra, India). The sea water was used as anolyte without any pretreatment and vinegar was used as a catholyte in the MFC setups. The two graphite pencils (0.25cm × 10cm, Apollo pencil manufacturers, Mumbai, India) with surface area of 16.10cm2 were used as electrodes. To aid initial wetting, the electrodes were boiled in deionized water and soaked overnight in 1M HCl solution followed by thorough rinsing with deionized water [11]. The electrodes were inserted into respective chambers while circuit connections were set with the copper wires fixed into the drilled holes of the electrodes and sealed with epoxy resin to avoid corrosion of copper wire [12]. The fabricated MFCs were sterilized with Ethanol (70% v/v) and irradiated with UV for 15 min followed by electrolytes addition up to the brim of the respective chambers. After 24h, OCV from the MFCs was recorded at room temperature without any external resistance until 40min with an interval of 2min using the multidigital meter (UNI-DT830D, Uni-Trend Group Ltd., Kowloon, Hong Kong). Optimization of MFC operation Since, it is necessary that MFCs should be optimized in terms of reactor configuration and physiochemical parameters, MFCs were operated using different concentrations of sea water (100, 75, 50, and 25%), 10% concentration of different salts; sodium chloride(NaCl), potassium chloride(KCl), ammonium nitrate(NH4NO3), ammonium chloride(NHCl4) and mixed salts (2.5% each salt), different concentrations of optimized salt (5, 10,15 and 20 %), different lengths of salt bridge (1.5, 3 and 5cm), various radius of salt bridge (1cm and 2cm),different surface area of anode (16.1cm2 and 32.2cm2 ), exogenous mediators (phenol red and neutral red) while potential difference was monitored in terms of OCV. During the optimization experiment, the optimized parameter was employed in the optimization study of another parameter.
Sea water verses sewage water
The optimally fabricated MFC setup was monitored for the OCV generation with the sea sediments as anolyte against 500mL of sewage water as catholyte in the respective chambers of the MFC as described earlier section. Isolation of bacteria from sea sediment The sea water sample was serially diluted with saline water (0.85% w/v NaCl) and the 10-5 dilution of the sample (0.1mL) was then spread on the LB agar plate (Tryptone 10.0g, NaCl 10.0g, Agar 20.0g and Yeast extract 5.0g in 1000mL distilled water) further incubated for 24h at 35°C. Morphologically distinct bacterial colonies were purified and further studied for their Gram staining properties [13]. Physiochemical growth optimization of bacteria The LB broth prepared were inoculated with the 24 h old sea water isolates culture (1 %, v/v) separately were studied for the bacterial growth at different pH (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9) and temperature (27, 37, 47 and 57ºC) by measuring absorption at 660 nm, against the sterile LB broth as blank [14]. Electricity generation and identification of potent electrogenic bacteria Using optimized growth and MFC parameters, the isolates were studied for their electrogenicity with 500mL LB broth culture (24h old) as anolyte against 500mL vinegar as catholyte in terms of OCV. The potential isolate screen out was then outsourced to Bioserve Biotechnologies Pvt. Ltd, Hyderabad, India, for molecular identification by 16S rDNA technique. The 16S rDNA sequence obtained was initially analyzed at NCBI server (http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/) using BLAST (Blastn) tool and corresponding sequences downloaded were further used for phylogenetic analyses using MEGA version 4 [15].
RESULTS
Analysis of electricity from sea water
In order to check the presence of electrogenic bacteria in the sea water samples, electricity generation monitored from the normal sea water samples and sterilized sea water was observed against vinegar (Fig.1). The maximum OCV of 4.5mV was recorded at 16min from the normal sea water while highest OCV profile of 0.9mV at 2min was monitored from the sterilized sea water. This deduced that the normal sea water samples possessed the electrogenic bacteria which contributed into the electricity production. Analysis of MFC parameters Concentrations of sea water The sea water sample was diluted with deionized water to various concentrations served as anolyte in the MFCs where OCV was monitored (Fig.2). It was observed that maximum OCV of 4.7mV at 18min was recorded from the MFC containing 100% sea water. Effect of different salts and concentrations of ideal salt Among the different salts studied in the salt bridge having 10% concentration, the maximum OCV of 4.8mV was recorded by the salt bridge containing NaCl (Fig.3) at 18min with continuous and steady elevation in the electric potential over time in comparison to other salts. Hence, the NaCl was opted as the suitable salt which was further analyzed for its effective concentration for better OCV. The concentration of NaCl was further varied and observations revealed that 10% could yield a maximum OCV of 4.9mV at 19min with consistent increment over time (Fig.4). Dimensions of salt bridge (Length and radius) Based on optimized NaCl concentration, various lengths of the salt bridge were monitored for the MFC. Fig.5 illustrates highest OCV generation of 4.6mV from the 5cm long salt bridge with a uniform increment over time. The salt bridges having 5cm length were varied in radius and used in the MFC setups. The OCV profile (Fig.6) reveals that salt bride 2cm radius could generate more OCV of 5.5mV at 17 min in comparison to that of 1cm radius salt bridge. Anode surface area The effect of anodic surface area of 16.10cm2 and 32.2cm2 were used to check its effect on the OCV from MFC setup. The data obtained revealed that maximum OCV of 5.9mV was recorded with 32.2cm2 anodic surface area at 16min (Fig.7). The results concluded that anode with 32.2cm2 surface area was ideal for the MFC configuration. Analysis of exogenous mediator The electricity generations in terms of OCV were recorded with phenol red and neutral red amended as electron shuttles in the anodic chamber containing 100% sea water as anolyte. The maximum OCV of 1.5mV and 1.9mV were monitored for the phenol red and neutral red at 2min, respectively followed by sudden decrease in the potential (Fig.8). Analysis of electricity generation from sea water against sewage water The fabricated MFC setup was operated with all the optimized parameters studied and production of electricity was recorded after 24h of inoculation in terms of OCV from MFC with 100 % sea water as anolyte against 500mL untreated sewage water as catholyte. It was observed that MFC with sewage water as catholyte could produce (Fig.9) maximum OCV of 3.3mV at 13min but fluctuations in the reading was recorded. Study on sea water bacterial isolates The two morphologically distinct bacterial colonies isolated were named as SWA01 and SWA1. Gram staining study revealed that the sea water isolate SWA01 was gram-negative cocci and SWA1 was gram-negative rods in nature. The pH 7 and temperature 37ºC were recorded as the optimized growth requirements for both bacterial isolate. Analysis of electricity generation from the sea sediment bacterial isolates The isolates were independently studied for their potential to produce bioelectricity in the MFCs. Fig.10 represents the OCV generation from the 24h old bacterial isolates cultures recorded for 40 min at the 2 min intervals, inoculated as anolyte in the anodic chambers. The MFC containing isolate SWA1 showed the maximum OCV of 754.7mV at 40min, with significant steady increase over time in comparison to SWAO1 in the MFCs. Identification of isolates SWA1 The bacterial colonies of the isolate SWA1 observed were smooth, circular, light red in color, 1mm in diameter. Furthermore, sequence analysis of the 16S rDNA showed 100% similarity with the Pseudoalteromonas lipolytica strain K-W45 (JQ79909). Based on the phenotypic characteristics and phylogenetic analysis using 16S rDNA, isolate SWA1 was identified as Pseudoalteromonas sp. The Fig.11 shows the phylogenetic relationship between the isolate SWA1 with the Pseudoalteromonas sp. The 16S rDNA sequences for the isolate SWA1 have been deposited at Gene Bank in NCBI with accession number JX105433.
DISCUSSION
The present study concluded that the sea water harbor electrogenic bacteria which lead to the production of bioelectricity in the fabricated MFCs. The 100% sea water produced more OCV must be because of less number of bacteria in the diluted concentration of sea water. This analysis of different salts for the Salt bridge recommended the use of 10% NaCl concentration as optimized salt in the salt bridge to facilitate easy ion flux. The sodium chloride in the salt bridge yielded good OCV might be because of its good electrolytic property [16]. While 5cm length of salt bridge proved better with 2cm diameter might be because of less density of agar in longer length and easy flow ions through wider diameter. In the fabricated MFC, results concluded that use of anode with 32.2cm2 surface area showed more OVC, must be because of more space for the bacteria to liberate the electron. Also, both the exogenous mediators used showed decrease in the OCV. It was reported that most of the exogenous mediators are toxic for the microbes [2]. Electricity generation from the sea water and sewage could not produce good yield might be effect of ions present in both the electrolytes. The bioelectricity generation from the sea water bacterial isolates results indicated that isolate SWA1 contributed more effectively into overall voltage generation from the normal sea water where other strain also generate the potential but fluctuations were observed in the reading obtained during MFC operation. The OCV of 754.7mV was generated by the isolate Pseudoalteromonas sp. SWA1 was nearer to that of maximum OCV of 800mV [16] reported until now. This implies that the bacterial isolate SWA1 might have electrogenic properties like C-type cytochromes [17] or conductive nano-wires [18] on its cell membrane to generate electric potential. Also the optimum pH noted for the SWA1 was in accordance with the report in which highest bioelectricity generation observed thus far at pH 7.0 [19].
CONCLUSION
The present study revealed that the potential electrogenic bacteria can be easily procured from the natural sources like sea water by simple technique of serial dilution and spread plate for operating the MFCs other than sediment or benthic MFCs. The study recommends the further tuning of the technology for the better usage of the potential electrogenic bacterial isolate from the sea water towards the commercial utilization to generation of alternate energy to sustain the demand of future.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1616http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16161. Khanal SK. 2008, Anaerobic Biotechnology for Bioenergy production: Principles and applications, John Wiley and Sons Inc. ISBN978- 0-813-82346-1 [Chapter 10, Microbial Fuel Cell: Novel Anaerobic Biotechnology for energy generation from waste water, Hong Liu, 221-246].
2. Rabaey K, Lissens G, Siciliano S D, Verstraete W. A microbial fuel cell capable of converting glucose to electricity at high rate and efficiency. Biotechnol Lett 2003; 25:1531-1535.
3. Liu H, Logan BE. Electricity generation using an air cathode single chambers microbial fuel cell in the presence and absence of a proton exchange membrane. Environ Sci Technol 2004; 38:4040-4046.
4. Rabaey K, Rodr?´guez J, Blackall LL, Keller J, Gross P, Batstone D, et al. Microbial ecology meets electrochemistry: electricity-driven and driving communities. ISME J 2007; 1:9-18.
5. Logan BE, Hamelers B, Rozendal R, Schroder U, Keller J, Freguia S, et al. Microbial fuel cells: methodology and technology. Environ Sci Technol 2006; 40: 5181-5192.
6. Rabaey K, Boon N, Siciliano SD, Verhaege M, Verstraete W. Biofuel cells select for microbial consortia that self-mediate electron transfer. Appl Environ Microbiol 2004; 70:5373-538.
7. Logan BE. 2008. Microbial fuel cells. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., New York, NY.
8. Lovley D R. Bug juice: harvesting electricity with microorganisms. Nat Rev Microbiol 2006; 4:497-508.
9. Richter H, Lanthier M, Nevin KP, Lovley DR. Lack of electricity production by Pelobacter carbinolicus indicates that the capacity for Fe(III) oxide reduction does not necessarily confer electron transfer ability to fuel cell anodes. Appl Environ Microbiol 2007; 73:5347-5353.
10. Bretschger O, Obraztsova A, Sturm CA, Chang IS, Gorby YA, Reed SB, et al. Current production and metal oxide reduction by Shewanella oneidensis MR-1 wild type and mutants. Appl Environ Microbiol 2007; 73:7003-7012.
11. Allen RM, Bennetto HP. Microbial Fuel Cells: electricity production from carbohydrates. Appl Biochem Biotech 1993; 39(40):27-40.
12. Zou YJ, Sun LX, XU Fen, Yang Li-Ni. E.coli microbial fuel cell using new methylene blue as electron mediator. Chemical Journal of Chinese Universities 2007; 28(3):510-513.
13. Smibert RM, Krieg NR. Phenotypic characterization in methods for general and molecular bacteriology. American Society for Microbiology 1994; 611-651.
14. Safia M, Xama K, Madamwar D. Isolation, characterization and decolorization of textile dyes by a mixed bacterial consortium JW-2. Dyes and Pigments 2007; 74:723-729.
15. Tamura K, Dudley J, Nei M, Kumar S. MEGA4: Molecular Evolutionary Genetics Analysis (MEGA) software version 4.0. Mol Biol Evol 2007; 24:1596-1599.
16. Liu H, Cheng S, Logan BE. Production of electricity from acetate or butyrate using a single-chambers microbial fuel cell. Environ Sci Technol 2005; 39:658-662.
17. Kim HJ, Park HS, Hyun MS, Chang IS, Kim M, Kim BH. A mediator-less microbial fuel cell using a metal reducing bacterium, Shewanella putrefaciens. Enzyme Microb. Technol 2002; 30 (2):145-152.
18. Gorby YA, Yanina S, McLean JS, Rosso KM, Moyles D, Dohnalkova A, et al. Electrically conductive bacterial nanowires produced by Shewanella oneidensis strain MR-1 and other microorganisms. Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 2006; 103:11358-11363.
19. Gil GC, Chang IS, Kim BH, Kim M, Jang JK, Park HS, et al. Operational parameters affecting the performance of a mediator-less microbial fuel cell. Biosensors and Bioelectronics 2003; 18, 327-334.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareSTUDY OF SOCIO-DEMOGRAPHIC PROFILE OF POISONING CASES AT SHRI B M PATIL MEDICAL COLLEGE HOSPITAL AND RESEARCH CENTRE, BIJAPUR
English8084Anand MugadlimathEnglish M.A. BagaliEnglish S.R. HibareEnglish D.I. IngaleEnglish Neeraj GuptaEnglish Chandrashekar BhuyyarEnglishA retrospective analysis of all poisoning cases admitted to Shri B M Patil Medical College Hospital & Research Centre Bijapur, Karnataka from Jan 2010 to Dec 2010 was done to study the pattern of poisoning reported. Acute poisoning is a common medical emergency and one of the important causes of morbidity and mortality in developing countries due to easy availability of poisonous substances and its low cost. So it was important to know the pattern of poisoning at to Shri B M Patil Medical College Hospital & Research Centre Bijapur. Objective of the study was to evaluate the pattern of poisoning at a tertiary care hospital in North-Karnataka (Bijapur), and to study the socio-demographic profile of the same. Data collected using a pretested proforma and the values were analyzed and presented.
EnglishPoisoning, organophosphrous compounds, kerosene.INTRODUCTION
Massive use of pesticides in agriculture, rapid industrialization and exposure to hazardous chemical products, introduction of newer range of drugs for treatment, , increased alcohol consumption, unhealthy dietary habits has widened the spectrum of toxic products to which people have been exposed as compared with the early days1,2,3,4,5,6. Knowingly or unknowingly millions of people are exposed to danger by hazardous occupational practices and unsafe storage3,6 of toxic chemicals products in their day to day life. Lack of specialized toxicological services in developing countries like India has further contributed to the higher rate morbidity and mortality 1,4,2. Easy availability and low cost of hazardous chemicals plays a major role in both accidental and suicidal poisoning in developing countries like India, Srilanka, South Africa etc 1,3,4,6,7,8. Most of the fatality rate is of intentional poisoning by organophosphrous (OP) compound which has been reported from southern and central India9,10,11. According to WHO (1999) more than three million poisoning cases has been reported out of which 251,881 deaths occur world wide annually, of which, 99% of fatal poisoning occur in developing countries, predominantly among farmers due to various kinds of poisoning, including poisonous toxins from natural products are handled 11,12. Therefore, an alarm for early diagnosis, treatment and prevention is crucial in reducing the burden of poisoning related injury in any country. A comparative data revealed that in developed countries, the mortality rate due to poisoning is only 1% to 2%, but in developing countries like India it varies between 15% to 30% 13 and is the fourth most common cause of mortality especially in rural India 2,14. It is very difficult to draw a report to say which kind of poisoning is more frequent, has the nature of poisoning varies from one region another depending upon the poison availability and the knowledge and local population regarding the properties of poisons 2 . So this study has been aimed to determine the various parameters of poisoning such as type of poisoning involved, the most vulnerable age group and their marital status with religions.
METHODOLOGY
The present retrospective study was conducted by department of Forensic Medicine& Toxicology . Shri B M Patil Medical college, Bijapur, North Karnataka from Jan 2010 to Dec 2010. Data was collected from all the poisoning cases admitted that were admitted & treated at BLDEAs B M Patil Medical College Hospital & Research Centre Bijapur. Information was collected into a proforma on the type of poison consumed, incidence on age and sex, marital status, religions, hospitalization days were noted from records for each case and analyzed. RESULTS In our study there were total of 378 patients brought to BLDEAs B M Patil Medical College Hospital & Research Centre Bijapur, of whom the data were collected during the 12 months study period from Jan 2010 to Dec 2010 due to suspected poisoning. Total number of 32904 IPD cases were registered during the study period and 2197 MLC cases done, in which 378 cases (6.67%) were due to poisoning (Table 1). Total number of male patients admitted to hospital due to poisoning was 199 (52.64%) and female were 179 (47.35%) with the male: female ratio being 1.2:1 (Table 2). Majority (45.76%) of victims with suspected consumption of poison was in between 21 to 30 age group followed by the age group between 11 to 20 (26.45% )( Table3). Insecticides were the most common poison used for suicidal purpose by the entire victim aged between 15-65 years irrespective of age (Table 4). We also found that out 199 (52.64%) males came with poisoning, 55 % patients were married and 45% patients were unmarried. Out of the 179 females who admitted for poisoning 65% patients were married and 35% were unmarried (Table 5). The hospital stay of the admitted patients with poisoning ranged from 01 to 82 days and the mean hospital stay was 6.9 days. During the study period 21 (5.55%) of the patients had mortality due to poisoning (Table 6). 353 cases (93.3 %) with poisoning admitted to the hospital were Hindus followed by Muslims in 25 cases [6.61%] (Table 7). Most common (51.6%) poison used for poisoning were organophosphrous compounds 197 cases (51.63%), in 118(31.21%) cases the type of poison was not known and were treated symptomatically (Table 4). In our study 86.5% (327) of cases were from rural domicile and only 13.5 % (51) from urban population (Table 8).In season wise distribution, highest cases were recorded in the month of March & April (16.9% & 9.2%) (Table 9).
DISCUSSION
Poisoning is a major public health problem in Bijapur district, with thousands of poisonings and hundreds of deaths every year cases coming to tertiary centre represent just tip of the iceberg. Keeping this background in mind, retrospective analysis of all poisoning cases admitted to Shri B M Patil Medical College Hospital & Research Centre Bijapur, Karnataka from Jan 2010 to Dec 2010 was done to study the pattern of poisoning reported. Suicide is one of the oldest and considered the best trends of sacrificing their life by consuming different poisonous substances which are easily accessible to them compared other methods. The morbidity, mortality in any case of acute poisoning depends upon number of factors such as nature of poison dose consumed, level of available medical facilities and time interval between intake of poison and provision of medical help. The sex incidence affected with poisoning was more with male which out numbered the female the ration being 1.7:1 and tallies with the other tudies 4,8,15, 16,17,. In our study there is a male predominance (52.64%). The high incidence may be because males are more exposed to stress, strain and occupational hazards compared to females 2,11,18,19. In this study the most common age group involved was between 21-30 years followed by the age group between 11- 20 years. Thus, adolescent and young adults are at more risk compared to other groups. Similar observations were reported by studies in India and abroad 4, 8, 17,20, 21, 22, . The hospital stay of the admitted patients with poisoning ranged from 01 to 82 days. The mean hospital stay was 6.9 days, similar findings were also observed in other studies as well20.In the present study 197 cases (51.63%) were due to insecticidal organophosphrous poisons, which were the most commonly responsible agents for toxicity in poisoning cases. Similar types of findings were noted by the authors11, 23, 24. We observed that married person more often become victim of poisoning which was found similar with other studies 4,15, 25.The reason of fact could be that the amount of stress carried by the married people on their day to day life is more than the single males or females which makes them more vulnerable. Patients who were admitted due to poisoning of which, 353 (93.38%) patients were Hindus (76.35%) followed by Muslims in 25 (6.61%). This may be due to religious beliefs and low percent of muslims in the rural population, served by Shri B M Patil Medical College Hospital & Research Centre Bijapur. In our study majorly of cases were from rural domicile similar findings were seen by other Indian studies,2,3,4,5,6. .In season wise distribution, highest cases were recorded in the month of March & April this may be due to easy availability of insecticides during the harvesting season and announcement of exam results during these months.
CONCLUSION
We conclude that poising is a major public health problem in Bijapur district, especially organophosphrous poisoning. The reasons may be – agriculture is the main occupation in this part of country with easy availability of insecticide, illiteracy, and low socioeconomic status. young age persons commonly affected indicating role of psychological counseling and by tackling their problems sympathetically. We suggest the government should regulate the import, manufacture, sale, transport, distribution and use of insecticides and pesticides with a view to prevent risk to human beings. Other interventions can be creation of poison information centres, introducing separate toxicological units in the hospitals and upgrading the peripheral health centres to manage cases of poisoning in emergency.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Authors acknowledge the immense help received from the scholars whose articles are cited and included in references of this manuscript. The authors are also grateful to authors, editors and publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1617http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16171. Suresh Kumar Gupta, Sharda Shah Peshin, Amita Srivastava and Thomas Kaleekal. A study of childhood poisoning at National Poisons Information Centre, All India Institute of Medical Sciences, New Delhi. J Occup Health 2003; 45:191-196.
2. Unnikrishnan B, Singh B, Rajeev A. Trends of acute poisoning in south Karnataka. Kathmandu University Medical Journal, 2005; Vol 3, No.2, 10: 149-154.
3. Singh.D.P, Aacharya R.P. Pattern of poisoning cases in Bir Hospital. Journal of Institute of Medicine, 2006; 28:1:3-6.
4. Shreemanta Kumar Dash, Manoj Kumar Mohanty, Kiran Kumar Patnaik, Sachidananda Mohanty. Sociodemographic profile of poisoning cases. JIAFM, 2005; 27 (3): 133- 138.
5. Jayaratnam J. Acute pesticide poisoning. A major global health problem. World Health Statist Quart. 1990; 43:139- 144.
6. Eddleston M. Patterns and problems of deliberate selfpoisoning in the developing world. Q J Med 2000; 93: 715- 731.
7. Karki P, Hansdak S G, Bhandari S, Shukla A, Koirala S. A clinico-epidemiology study of organophosphrous poisoning at a rural based teaching hospital of Easter Nepal.
8. Srinivas Rao C H, Venkateswarlu V, Surender T, Eddleston M and Nick A Buckley. Pesticide Poisoning in South IndiaOpportunities for prevention and improved medical management. Trop Med Int Health. June 2005; 10(6):581- 588.
9. Thomas M, Anandan S, Kuruvilla P J, Singh P R, David S. Profile of hospital admissions following acute poisoningexperiences from a major teaching hospital in south India. Adv Drug React Toxicol Rev. 2000; 19: 313-317.
10. Batra A K, Keoliya A N, Jadhav G U. Poisoning: An unnatural cause of morbidity and mortality in rural India. JAPI, Oct 2003; 51: 955-959.
11. Pillay V.V: MKR Krishna’s Hand book of Forensic Medicine and Toxicology. 12th Ed. Paras Publication. Hyderabad: 276-299, 2001.
12. Taruni N G, Bijoy T H, Momonchand A: A profile of poisoning cases admitted to RIMS Hospital Imphal. Journ Forensic Med Toxicol 2001; 18: 31-33.
13. Sharma B K, Harish D, Sharma V and Vij K. The epidemiology of poisoning: An Indian view point. Journ Forensic Med Toxicol 2002; 19: 5-11.
14. Singh S, Sharma B K, Wahi P L, Anand B S and Chugh K S. Spectrum of acute poisoning in adults (10 years experiences). J Assoc Physic India. 1984; 32: 561- 563.
15. Lall S B, Al-Wahaibi S S, Al-Riyami M M and Al-Kharusi K. Profile of acute poisoning cases presenting to health centres and hospitals in Oman. Eastern Mediterranean Health Journal. 2003; 9 (5/6): 944-954.
16. Gupta S K, Peshin S S, Srivastava A, Kalukal T, Pandian T V. Epidemiology of acute poisoning. Natl Med J India 2002 May- June; 15 (3): 177.
17. Agarwal R, Barthwal S P. Nigam D K et al: Changing pattern of acute poisoning in eastern UP hospital based study. J. Assoc Physic India 1995; 43: 907.
18. Senanayake N and Peris H. Mortality due to poisoning in developing agricultural country: trends over 20 years. Hum Exp Toxicol. 1992; 12: 435-438.
19. Singh S, Wig N, Chaudhary D, Sood N K and Sharma B K. Changing pattern of acute poisoning in adults: Experience of a large North-West Indian Hospital (1970- 1989). J Assoc Physic India. 1997; 45: 194-197.
20. Chan Y C, Fung H T, Lee C K, Tsui S H, Ngan H K, Sy M Y, Tse M L, et al., A prospective epidemiological study of acute poisoning in Hong Kong. Hong Kong J. Emerg. Med. 2005; 12: 156-161.
21. Gulati R S. Spectrum of acute poisoning in a service Hospital. J Assoc Phy India 1995; 43: 908-909.
22. Nimal S, Laxman K. Pattern of acute poisoning in a Medical unit in central Sri Lanka. For Sci Int 1988; 36:101- 104.
23. Dhattarwal S K and Dalal S S. Profile of death due to poisoning in Rohtak, Haryana in the year 1995. J For Med Toxicol. 1995; 15: 51.
24. Gupta B D, Vaghela P. Profile of Fatal Poisoning in and around Jamnagar.JIAFM, 2005; 27 (3): 145-148.
25. Zine K U, Mohanty A C. Pattern of acute poisoning at Indira Gandhi Medical College and Hospital, Nagpur. J Ind Aca For Med. 1998; 20: 37-39
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareACTINOMYCOSIS OF BREAST-A CASE REPORT
English8588B. AroraEnglish Sumit Giri English D.R. AroraEnglishPrimary actinomycosis of the breast is a very rare disease and most commonly caused by Actinomyces israelii which normally inhabits mouth, colon, and vagina. Primary forms directly affect the breast but the etiology is unknown. Possible causes include infection of the lactiferous ducts due to trauma during breast feeding or kissing. In secondary actinomycosis, the infection at the primary sight ultimately reaches the breast. The purpose of the study is to present, in detail, a case of a 50 year old woman, with the complaint of swelling in the right breast of 6 months duration which was variable in size and associated with discharging sinuses.
EnglishActinomycosis, breast, Actinomyces israelii.INTRODUCTION
Actinomycosis is a chronic granulomatous or suppurative disease, usually caused by an anaerobic bacterium called Actinomyces israelii, which is a common organism found in the nose and throat, flora of oral cavity, particularly in the periphery of decayed teeth, and in the grooves of tonsils, as well as female genital tract [1, 2]. It is a Gram-positive, non-motile, non-sporing, nonacid- fast organism[3]. Disease is characterized by development of abscesses, draining by multiple sinus tracts containing bloody suppurative discharges and “sulphur granules” which are composed of branched filaments. The disease is classified clinically to the varieties of cervicofacial, thoracic, abdominal and pelvic. Clinical signs of disease are different, depending on the site of infection. The infection is not contagious. Actinomycosis is seen in all age groups and regions globally, but occurs frequently between 15 to 35 years, and its reported frequency in men is two times that in women [4]. Primary actinomycosis of the breast was first described by Ammentrop in 1893. Breast actinomycosis is primary when inoculation occurs through the nipple. Secondary actinomycosis of the breast refers to the extension of a pulmonary infection through the thoracic cage in a process that can affect the ribs, muscles and finally the breast [5]. Breast actinomycosis may present as sinus tract or with mass-like features mimicking malignancy. The clinical presentation makes it difficult to distinguish primary actinomycosis from mastitis and inflammatory carcinoma [6]. We report a case of primary actinomycosis of the breast caused by Actinomyces israelii that was diagnosed by fine needle aspiration cytology (FNAC) and was further confirmed on histopathologic study of a specimen obtained by excisional biopsy, Gram stain and culture.
CASE REPORT
A 50-year-old woman, otherwise healthy, presented in surgery outpatient department of our hospital with the complaint of swelling in the right breast of 6 months duration which often increased and decreased in size and was associated with episodes of on and off burst to discharge pus. No history of lung disease, breast trauma, gingivitis, or tooth problems was found and it was diagnosed as chronic breast abscess and she was referred to pathology department for FNAC. Physical examination revealed a firm fluctuating swelling in upper outer quadrant of right breast measuring 6x4 cm in size, with marked induration in the surrounding area. The overlying skin was adherent to the swelling but the underlying structures were free. On pressing the swelling, pus-like discharge came out. No palpable adenopathy was found. Examination of oral cavity, face and neck for detecting any skin lesion or mass was unremarkable. All other test results including blood biochemistry, hemoglobin electrophoresis, urine analysis and stool examination were within normal limits except for mild leukocytosis in the blood count. FNAC smears were prepared from pus-like discharge which oozed out on pressing the swelling and stained with May Grunwald Giemsa stain. Microscopy revelaed grains which comprised of hyphal fragments surrounded by a peripheral zone of swollen radiating club-shaped structures presenting as sun-ray appearance in a background dense inflammatory infiltrate (Fig.1). Histopathology confirmed the diagnosis. Gross examination revealed multiple grey white to grey yellow tissue pieces. The largest piece was skin covered measuring 6x3x3cms. Cut surface was grey brown in some areas and dark tan in others. A grain of dark colour was also seen in the dark tan area. Haematoxylin & eosin stained sections revealed lobules of breast tissue along with “sulphur granules” which were deeply stained with haematoxylin except in the periphery which was stained by eosin, which showed short, radiate, club-like structures. It was surrounded by areas of granulation tissue comprising of predominantly polymorphonuclear leukocytes, lymphocytes, plasma cells and fibroblasts (Fig.2). Pus was shaken with sterile water in a tube and “sulphur granules” were allowed to settle at the bottom. Half of these were removed with a Pasteur pipette and were crushed between two slides and stained with Gram stain. Microscopy revealed Gram-positive filaments with Gram-negative periphery (Fig.3). Remaining were crushed in a drop of saline with a glass rod and inoculated on brain heart infusion agar, blood agar and thioglycollate broth and incubated both anaerobically and aerobically with 5−10% carbon dioxide at 350 −370 C for upto 14 days. The colonies of Actinomyces israelii were 0.5−2 mm in diameter, white to grey-white, smooth, lobulated resembling molar teeth.
DISCUSSION
Breast actinomycosis is rare throughout the world and only a few cases have been published so far [5,7−11]. It has been called „the most misdiagnosed disease?, and it has been stated that „no disease is so often missed by experienced clinicians? [12]. Primary actinomycosis of the breast is an unusual condition where the most commonly isolated pathogen has been A. israelii [13]. Possible causes of this condition include trauma, lactation and kissing [14]. Most of the reported cases of primary actinomycosis of the breast were caused by A. israelii. In recent years, other strains have been found as well. For instance Brunner et al. [11] reported a catalase-negative strain of Actinomyces neuii as the possible causative agent of an infected mammary prosthesis. Mohammed in 1993 described a case of actinomycosis of the accessory breast [9].
CONCLUSION
The physician should keep actinomycosis in mind as a possible diagnosis and perform the appropriate investigation, if the pathogenic findings of a mass are in favour of granulomatous inflammatory process or microabscess formation, and if work up for tuberculosis, and or fungal infections are negative. Actinomycosis should be vigorously sought and promptly treated in patients with chronic granulomatous disease presenting with uncommon and prolonged clinical signs of infection.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Authors acknowledge the immense help received from the scholars whose articles are cited and included in references of this manuscript. The authors are also grateful to authors / editors / publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1618http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16181. Baron EJ, Finegold SM. 80'ed. Mosby, St. Louis, Baltimore 1990; P: 521-23.
2. Brook I. Actinomycosis. In: Goldman L, Ausiello D, eds.Cecil Medicine. 24th ed. Philadelphia, Pa: Saunders Elsevier; 2011:P 337.
3. Arora DR, Arora B. Actinomycetes in Textbook of Microbiology, CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi. Bangalore 3rd edition 2008, pp 481-86.
4. Zaini F, Mchbod ASA, Emami M. Comprehensive medical mycology. Tehran University Publication. Tehran Iran 1999; P: 39-40.
5. de Barros N, Issa FK, Barros AC, D?Avila MS, Nisida AC, Chammas MC, Pinoti JA, Cerri GG: Imaging of primary actinomycosis of the breast. AJR Am J Roentgenol 2000; 174:1784–86.
6. Capobianco G, Dessole S, Becchere MP, Profili S, Cosmi E, Cherchi PL, Meloni GB: A rare case of primary actinomycosis of the breast caused by Actinomyces viscosus: Diagnosis by fine-needle aspiration cytology under ultrasound guidance. Breast J 2005; 11:57–59.
7. Gogas J, Sechas M, Diamantis S, Sbokos C. Actinomycosis of the breast. Int Surg 1972; 57 (8):664-65.
8. Schouten A. A case of primary actinomycosis of the breast. Arch Chir Neerl 1973; 25(3): 319-23.
9. Mohammed KN. Actinomycosis of the accessory breast treated with cotrimoxazole. Med J Malaysia 1993; 48(2): 229-31.
10. Jain BK, Sehgal VN, Jagdish S, Ratnakar C, Smile SR. Primary actinomycosis of the breast: a clinical review and a case report. Dermatol 1994; 21(7): 497-500.
11. Brunner S, GrafS Riegel P, Altwegg M. Catalase negative Actinomyces neuii subsp. Neuii isolated from an infected mammary prosthesis. Int J Med Microbiol 2000; 290(3): 285-87.
12. Mandell GL, Bennett JE, Dolin R: Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases, ed 6. Saunders, 2005, pp 2924–31.
13. Attar KH, Waghorn D, Lyons M, Cunnick G: Rare species of actinomyces as causative pathogen in breast abscess. Breast J 2007;13:501–05.
14. Lloyd-Davies JA: Primary actinomycosis of the breast. Br J Surg 1951;38:378–81.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareCELL ADHESION MOLECULE EXPRESSION PROFILING OF HUMAN UMBILICAL CORD MATRIX AND ADIPOSE STEM CELLS
English8993S. IndumathiEnglish Rashmi MishraEnglish R. HarikrishnanEnglish J.S. RajkumarEnglish Neha KantawalaEnglish M. DhanasekaranEnglishIntroduction: The advancements and applications of redundant tissue sources such as human subcutaneous adipose tissue (SF) and human umbilical cord matrix (HUCM) tissue are gaining importance in recent years. Despite these advancements, certain stumbling blocks accounts for lack of functional improvement of the diseased. One major bottleneck for the prevailing failures relies on understanding the migratory and homing potential of stem cells. Cell adhesion molecules have been identified to play a vital role in vascular adhesion, migration, extravasations and ultimately homing. However, significance of cell adhesion molecules in therapeutic implications has not much concentrated upon in recent years unlike mesenchymal stem cells. Objective: The present study showcases the significance of cell adhesion molecules and addresses the major issue on identity of an ideal stem cell source with maximum benefits. Research methodology: To this end, the cells obtained from the human SF and HUCM were cultured until P3 and cultured cells were characterized for comparative expression profile analysis of certain cell adhesion molecules. Outcome of the study: Cultured MSCs derived from both these aforesaid sources exhibited a significant percentage of cell adhesion molecules, thereby substantiating its efficacy on tissue homing and migration. Thus, both the sources were found superior with regards to the expression of CAM and can be clinically exploited. However, umbilical cord matrix serves a better therapeutic option for allogenic transplantation, which is evident from the sparse expression of CD 34 at primary culture itself, thereby opening a gateway to circumvent the surgical complications in clinical transplantations.
Englishhuman umbilical cord matrix, human subcutaneous adipose tissue, stem cells, cell adhesion molecules, flowcytometry.INTRODUCTION
Topical research directs clinical translation of its findings to assist medication for various diseases and disorders. However, there are bouquets of clinical conditions which are either stiff to treatment or give a sluggish response. Thus, there emerged the replacement therapy which is again hindered by the shortage of donors for the procurement of tissues or organs [1,2]. Thus regenerative medicine became a necessity in healthcare owing to its potency and ability to form any kind of cells. Stem cells possess ultimate and dynamic properties that make themselves a best tool for regenerative medicine and medical therapeutics. Research focus on stem cells and its multilineage potentials isolated from human adipose tissue and cord matrix tissues has been fascinating and gained wide interest in recent years. The rationale behind this is because of the selection of source on the basis of redundancy of tissue availability, allogeneic and autologous nature that suits well for clinical implications. Human subcutaneous adipose tissue, a redundant tissue serves as an inexhaustible source of large quantity of stem cells. Accumulating evidences report on its efficacy on the proliferative potency and plasticity, thereby substantiating its imperativeness in cell based therapies. Recently, large interest relies on using subcutaneous adipose tissue as a cue to cure wide range of diseases [3, 4,5]. In a similar manner, Umbilical cord matrix tissue, which is discarded during delivery, is a potent source of stem cells as no ethical concerns are involved. In addition, the beneficial properties of umbilical cord derived MSCs for instance high proliferation and multitude differentiation potential makes it a significant source [6,7,8]. Reckoning on its clinical application, several preclinical animal models of human disease such as neurodegenerative disease, cancer, diabetes and heart disease have been reported [9,10,11,12]. However, the ability of these cells to migrate, extravagate and ultimately home to the site of injury has not much concentrated upon. It is of prime importance to look into the credentials of homing in tissue specific stem cells, which will pave way for clinical translation. To take these research pursuits to cell based therapy, it is of vital importance to study the innate property of stem cells i.e. homing. Homing stands for the stem cell capture within the vasculature of a tissue followed by transmigration across the endothelium. Potential trafficking of stem cells in-vivo is a strenuous task and hence can be studied in-vitro to develop the cell based curative concepts [13]. Cell adhesion molecules (CAM) play a major role in vascular adhesion, migration, extravasations and ultimately homing of MSCs. Studies showed blocking the CD29 (Integrin-β1) on MSCs led to reduced engraftment in ischemic myocardium. Study also demonstrates that CD44 is instrumental in MSC homing to damaged kidney and in mechanisms governing MSC trafficking [14]. Therefore this study aims at comparing the stem cells derived from human subcutaneous fat and umbilical cord matrix for the expression of cell adhesion molecules (ALCAM, HCAM, Integrin β1, CD90, CD13 and CD34) at passage 0, 1 and 3. MATERIALS AND METHODS Sampling: Human umbilical cord matrix (HUCM) samples and subcutaneous fat tissue were obtained from 3 subjects (n=3) each undergoing delivery or exploratory bariatric surgery at Lifeline multispeciality hospital, Chennai. Sampling and processing procedures were reviewed and approved by hospital ethical committee of Lifeline multi-speciality hospital and all samples were collected upon obtaining written informed consents from patients. The HUCM samples were collected immediately after birth and transported in sterile collection bottles with 0.9% normal saline supplemented with gentamycin and 1% antibiotic-antimycotic solution at 4°C. The clamped cord samples were later transferred to sterile phosphate buffered saline (PBS) for processing. About 70-100g of subcutaneous fat samples were collected and transferred to PBS. All samples were processed with 24 hours of sample collection. Explant culture The cord tissue samples were washed in sterile PBS (without Ca2+ and Mg2+) supplemented with antibiotic-antimycotic solution. The microbial contaminants were further removed by washing the samples with 70% ethanol for 30 seconds. The tissue samples were further washed in PBS and the cord vein as well as arteries was removed with the help of a surgical forceps. The cord tissues so obtained were washed to remove any blood clots and diced into fragments of 2-5mm size. The tissue fragments were placed in 6 well plates (3-4 explants per well) and dried for 10 minutes. The explants were further incubated in growth medium (DMEM-LG supplemented with 15% fetal bovine serum (FBS) and 1% antibiotic solution) at 5% CO2, 95% humidity and 37OC. The plates were left undisturbed to allow the migration of cells from explants and the media were replaced twice every week. The explants were removed after 10 days and the cells were subcultured by trypsin-EDTA method until Passage 3 (P3).
Adipose cell culture: Solid fat tissues were minced and collagenase digested using 0.075% collagenase type-1, upon washing with 1x Phosphate Buffered Saline (PBS). Debris and lipocyte content from digested sample were removed by centrifugation to obtain the Stromal Vascular Fraction (SVF). Erythrocytes in cell fractions were lysed using 0.7% NH4Cl solution. The cells were resuspended and pelleted in PBS. Viability and enumeration was done using Trypan Blue method. 3x105 cells were seeded onto 25cm2 culture flasks (Nunc) and incubated in growth medium (DMEM-LG supplemented with 15% fetal bovine serum (FBS) and 1% antibiotic solution) at 37OC, 5% CO2 and 95% humidity for 2-4 days. The primary cultures were subcultured until passage 3 with media change twice every week. Phenotypic characterization using flowcytometry About 1x105 cells of each sample were phenotypically characterized for the expression of following cell surface markers; ALCAM, H-CAM, Integrin-β1, CD 13, CD 34 and Thy1. The cells were incubated with the antigenic cocktails (Table 1) at room temperature in dark for 20 minutes, washed with BD FACS wash buffer and pelleted by centrifugation. The pellets were resuspended in BD FACS flow and analyzed on the flowcytometer (BD FACS Aria) using BD FACS-Diva software. Statistical Analysis: The expression profile of cell adhesion molecules obtained from subcutaneous fat tissue and umbilical cord matrix tissue samples (n=3) were represented as Mean ± Standard Error Mean (SEM). The data were analysed using two-tailed student t-test and the pvalues were calculated to determine the statistically significant variations. Results were considered statistically significant when pEnglishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1619http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16191. Yechoor V, Chan L (2010) Minireview:β-Cell Replacement Therapy for Diabetes in the 21st Century:Manipulation of Cell Fate by Directed Differentiation. Mol Endocrinol 24(8):1501- 1511
2. Shum E, Chern A (2006) Amendment of the Human Organ Transplant Act. Ann Acad Med Singapore 35(6):428-32
3. Deda H, Inci M, Kurekci A, Kayihan K, Ozgun E, Ustunsoy G, Kocabay S (2008) Treatment of chronic spinal cord injured patients with autologous bone marrow-derived hematopoietic stem cell transplantation: 1-year follow-up. Cytotherapy. 10(6):565-574
4. Kumar AA, Kumar SR, Narayanan R, Arul K, Baskaran M (2009) Autologous bone marrow derived mononuclear cell therapy for spinal cord injury: A phase I/II clinical safety and primary efficacy data. Experimental and Clinical Transplantation. 7(4):241-248
5. Oh SH, Muzzonigro TM, Bae SH, LaPlante JM, Hatch HM, Petersen BE (2004) Adult bone marrow-derived cells trans-differentiating into insulin-producing cells for the treatment of type I diabetes. Lab Invest 84:607-617
6. Guillot PV, Gotherstrom C, Chan J, Kurata H, Fisk NM (2007) Human fi rst-trimester fetal MSC express pluripotency markers and grow faster and have longer telomeres than adult MSC. Stem Cells 25(3):646–654
7. Troyer DL, Weiss ML (2008) Wharton’s jellyderived cells are a primitive stromal cell population. Stem Cells 26(3):591–599Breymann C, Schmidt D, Hoerstrup SP (2006) Umbilical cord cells as a source of cardiovascular tissue engineering. Stem Cell Rev 2(2):87–92
8. Nekanti U, Rao VB, Bahirvani AG, Jan M, Totey S, Ta M (2010) Long-Term Expansion and Pluripotent Marker Array Analysis of Wharton’s Jelly-Derived Mesenchymal Stem Cells. Stem Cells Dev 19(1):117-130
9. Jomura S, Uy M, Mitxhell K, Dallasen R, Bode CJ, Xu Y (2007) Potential treatment of cerebral global ischemia with Oct-4 umbilical cord matrix cells. Stem Cells 25(1):98-106
10. Rachakatla RS, Marini F, Weiss ML, Tamura M, Troyer D (2007) Development of human umbilical cord matrix stem cell base gene therapy for experimental lung tumors. Cancer Gene Ther 14(10):828–835
11. Breymann C, Schmidt D, Hoerstrup SP (2006) Umbilical cord cells as a source of cardiovascular tissue engineering. Stem Cell Rev 2(2):87–92
12. Chao KC, Chao KF, Fu YS, Liu SH (2008) Isletlike clusters derived from mesenchymal stem cells in Wharton’s Jelly of the human umbilical cord for transplantation to control type 1 diabetes. PLoS ONE 3(1):e1451 13. Rombouts WJ, Ploemacher RE (2003) Primary murine MSC show highly efficient homing to the bone marrow but lose homing ability following culture. Leukemia 17(1):160–170
14. Herrera M B, Bussolati B, Bruno S, Morando L, Mauriello-Romanazzi G, Sanavio F, Stamenkovic I, Biancone L, Camussi G (2007) Exogenous mesenchymal stem cells localize to the kidney by means of CD44 following acute tubular injury. Kidney International 72:430–441
15. Ley K, Laudanna C, Cybulsky MI, Nourshargh S (2007) Getting to the site of inflammation: the leukocyte adhesion cascade updated. Nat Rev Immunol 7(9):678-689
16. Kumar S, Ponnazhagan S (2007) Bone homing of mesenchymal stem cells by ectopic α4 integrin expression. FASEB J 21(14):3917–3927
17. Dominici M, Le Blanc K, Mueller I, SlaperCortenbach I, Marini F, Krause D, Deans R, Keating A, Prockop D, Horwitz E (2006) Minimal criteria for defining multipotent mesenchymal stromal cells. The International Society for Cellular Therapy position statement. Cytotherapy 8(4):315-317
18. Dhanasekaran M, Indumathi S, Kanmani A, Poojitha R, Revathi KM, Rajkumar S, Sudarsanam D (2012) Surface antigenic profiling of stem cells from human omentum fat in comparison with subcutaneous fat and bone marrow. Cytotechnology. (ePub Ahead of print)
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareCLINICAL OUTCOMES OF AO PHILOS PLATING FOR PROXIMAL HUMERUS FRACTURES
English9498Annamalai RegupathyEnglishThis was a retrospective analysis study done to identify the results of Philos plating for the proximal humeral fractures. The analysis was done on 11 patients with fracture to proximal humerus. The clinical and functional outcome based on X ray, Constant score, DASH score were analyzed and complications were studied in detail and discussed with literature following which the conclusions were made in this study.
EnglishINTRODUCTION
Trauma to proximal humerus often presents a real challenge to orthopedic surgeons (Peter S Rose et.al). It accounts for 2% to 3 % of all fractures to upper limb and treatment is controversy. There are various treatment options from non surgical to surgical management with numerous implants. There is no clear evidence from the literature to state the optimal method of surgery and the best implant. Wide ranges of internal fixation devices are available for treating the proximal humeral fractures (Bjorkenheim JM et.al). The latest addition in the implant list is AO Philos plate which is an anatomically contoured rounded plate with combined holes, which will allow a case specific adaptable treatment for fractures of the proximal humerus (Baker P N et.al). The principal advantage of this system is that it provides improved fixation using multiple screws at divergent angles which are locked to the plate via a thread in the screw head and a matching thread in the screw hole in the plate. Whilst the fixed angle locking screw design of the plate has been designed to improve the quality of fixation in osteoporotic bone, there have been reports in the literature of failure of fixation using the Philos plate (D M Wright et.al).
AIM AND OBJECTIVES:
The main aim of the study is to in investigate the clinical outcomes after Philos plating for proximal humeral fractures with the Objectives 1) To perform a retrospective analysis on cohort of patients who have had internal fixation for proximal humeral fractures with Philos plate.2) To determine clinical outcome in terms of pain relief and function, using appropriate scoring systems. 3) To determine the incidence of implant failure and complications with this procedure.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
The study was carried out in Ninewells Hospital during June 2003 to March 2007. The planed detail of the study was submitted for Caldicott approval and University of Dundee’s Code of Practice for Research Ethics on Human Participants committee approval. There were total of eleven patients in the study. The inclusion criteria were 1) Fractures with skeletal maturity 2) Delayed presentation 3) Closed fractures and 4) Osteoporotic fractures. The exclusion criteria were 1) Open fractures 2) Fractures without skeletal maturity and 3) Pathological fractures. Fractures were classified following Neers classification. Out of the eleven patients, nine were females and three were males. The mean age in the study group was 54.4 years and ranged from 17 years to 81 years. In the above selected patients the nature of injury, the fracture pattern, neurovascular deficit and any previous significant history of hospitalization were recorded in a proper performa. Patients underwent surgery either under regional, general or combined anaesthesia. Fracture was approached through the deltopectoral approach. Long 5 holed plate or short 3 holed Philos plate was used. Standard post operative physiotherapy protocol was followed in the study. Patients were followed up till the fracture union. X rays were taken to evaluate the radiological union and Constant score, DASH score were followed to assess the functional outcome.
RESULTS
There were total of 11 patients in which 9 were females and 2 were males. The age group in the study was from 18 years to 81 years with mean of 54.45 years. The maximum age incidence was between 41 years to 60 years. There were 8 patients with 2 part fractures and 3 patients with 3 part fractures. Ten patients had fracture on right side and one patient had fracture on left side. The commonest mechanism of injury was following trivial trauma like fall with out stretched hand in old population and in younger group the mode of injury was following high velocity injury. All the patients were taken for surgery and fracture was approached through deltopectoral approach. For seven patients 3 holed Philos plate was used to fix the fracture and for four patients 5 holed Philos plate was used. Patients were regularly followed up till fracture union. Physiotherapy was started from second post operative day. There were complications seen in three patients. They included impingement of screws, loss of abduction, continuous pain, collapse of head and implant back out (X-ray 1 and 2). All these patients underwent implant removal. The functional outcome was measured based on Constant score and DASH score. The mean Constant score was 81.16 with minimum of 55 to maximum of 100 (Figure 1). The results based on Constant score was classified as excellent of 50% cases, 16.6% of good result, 16.6% of moderate and 16.6% of poor results. The mean DASH score was 13.03 with minimum of 0.83 to maximum of 41.9.
DISCUSSION
The results of the present study were compared with various literatures. The sex incidence, age incidence were compared with Peter et al. 1 series, Baker et al. 2 study, Bjorkenheim et al. 3 , Reto et al. 4 study. The total revision surgery (Figure 2) rate in the present study was 27.27%. Reto et al.4 reported 25.94 % of complications (Figure 3) which included loss of reduction, screw perforation, loosening, implant breakage and avascular necrosis. There revision surgery rate was 19.6%. The complications rate reported by Sudan et al.5 was 19.34% and included implant breakage, avascular necrosis and non union. Wright et al.6 reported 30% of fracture collapse and 10% of revision surgery. Peter et al.1 reported 25% of complication rate in their study and 18.75% of revision surgery rate. . The mean constant score in the study was 81.16 which ranged from 55 to 100. There were 50% excellent result, 16.6% good result, 16.6 % moderate result and 16.6% poor result. The mean Constant score in Bjorkenheim et al.3 series was 73 which ranged from 30 to 93. The mean Constant score in Reto et al.4 series was 73 and ranged from 13 to 100. In the study reported by Koukakis et al7 . the mean Constant score was 76.1 and ranged from 30 to 100 (Figure 4). The mean DASH score in the study was 13.03 with the minimum of 0.83 and maximum of 41.9. The mean DASH score in Baker et al. (2004) study was 33.9 and ranged from 4 to 92.
CONCLUSION
From the present retrospective study following conclusions may be drawn
1) Proximal humeral fractures are difficult fractures to treat and that even though with the fixed angle screw system on the plate has been designed to avoid cut out in osteoporotic bone, the failure rate is high (about 30%).
2) Due to the spherical shape of the humeral head with 2-D screening there is risk of penetration of screws into the glenohumeral joint.
3) It is a technically demanding surgery thus a longer learning curve.
4) The results are similar to the published literature in terms of complication rates. Limitations in the study: The present study is from a small group with less follow up sample. Further recommendation: A further multi centric study with large group with more representation in all age group and a comparative study with other procedures may be necessary for better conclusion.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Authors acknowledge the immense help received from the scholars whose articles are cited and included in references of this manuscript. The authors are also grateful to authors / editors / publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed. I extend my sincere thanks to Dr L Cochrane, Mr. David Nicoll, Mr. C A Wigderowitz and Prof J Abboud, Department of Orthopaedics, Ninewells hospital, University of Dundee, UK for their esteemed guidance and untiring help during the study.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1621http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16211. Peter S Rose, Christopher R Adam and Michael E Torchin. Locking plate fixation for proximal humerus fractures, initial result with new implant. J shoulder and elbow surgery, 2007. March-April:16(2) 202-7.
2. Baker P N, Candal Couto J, Ranan A and Bennison K. Clinical outcomes followingPhilosplatefixationproximalhumerus,f ractures,www.bess.org.uk/meetings/archive.asp ?aspyear=2005andabstract=218
3. Bjorkenheim JM, Pajarinen J and Savolaine V. Internal fixation of proximal humerus fractures with locking compression plate, Acta Orthop Scand December 2004; 75(6): 741-745.
4. Reto H Babst, Christoph Sommer, Christian Bahrs, Rainer Heuwinkel, Christain Hafner, Parvo Rillman, George Kohut and Mathias Muller, Open reduction and internal fixation of proximal humerus fractures with an angular stable form plate, www.hwbf.org/ota/am/ota06/otapa/OTA06126 5.htm
5. Marc Saudan, Richard E Stern, Anne Lubbeke, Robin E Peter and Pierre Hoffmeyer. Fixation of fractures of the proximal humerus: Experience with a new locking plate, www.hwbf.org/ota/ota3/otapa/OTA03634.htm
6. D M Wright, A Acharya, R H Austin and J C Kaye. Complications and suggestions encountered with the philos plating system, J Bone Joint surgery 2004; 87-B:165e.
7. Koukakis Athanasios, Apostolou Constantinos, Taneja Tarun. Fixation of proximal humeral fractures using the philos plate, early experience, Clinical orthopaedics and related research 2006; 115-120.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcarePREVALENCE OF OVERWEIGHT AND OBESITY AMONG ADOLESCENT SCHOOL GOING CHILDREN (12-15YEARS) IN URBAN AREA, SOUTH INDIA
English99105Prasanna Kamath B.T.English Girish M. BengalorkarEnglish Deepthi R.English Muninarayan C.English Ravishankar S.EnglishBackground: Prevalence of overweight and obesity has increased for the past few decades. World Health Organization refers obesity as a global epidemic. There is a need to assess the prevalence and to find the factors responsible, so as to implement timely interventions. Aims: To assess the prevalence of overweight and obesity among school going children and the factors responsible for the same. Method: The study was conducted in children studying at a private school in Bangalore aged 12-15years. Obesity was assessed using International Obesity Task Force criteria based on the body mass index. Pretested and semi structured questionnaire was used to collect the data on physical activity, eating habits and leisure time activity. Results: The overall prevalence of overweight was 10% and obesity was 5% among 761 adolescents studied. The prevalence of overweight and obesity was 11% and 4% among boys and 9% and 5% among girls respectively. Factors like junk food, chocolate eating, physical inactivity and time spent in watching television and computer gaming were directly related to overweight and obesity. Conclusion: Overweight and obesity are multifactorial and needs a multi pronged interventions at the earliest for control and prevention.
EnglishOverweight, Obesity, leisure time activity, Commutation, Body mass index, adolescenceINTRODUCTION
Childhood overweight and obesity are global problems that are on the rise.1 Obesity is one of the most prevalent nutritional diseases of children and adolescent in many developed and developing countries. During the past two decades, the prevalence of overweight and obesity in children has increased worldwide.2 Obesity in childhood and adolescence has adverse consequences on premature mortality and physical morbidity in adulthood.3 Outcome related to childhood obesity includes hypertension, type 2 diabetes mellitus, dyslipidemia, left ventricular hypertrophy, nonalcoholic steato-hepatitis, and obstructive sleepapnea, orthopaedic and psychological problems. Childhood obesity is associated with a higher chance of obesity, premature death and disability in adulthood. In addition to increased future risks, obese children experience breathing difficulties, increased risk of fractures, hypertension, and early markers of cardiovascular disease, insulin resistance and psychological effects.4 Once considered a problem of affluent developed countries, obesity is fast growing to enormous proportions in many developing countries also. Rapid economic growth has overcame the nutritional, socio-economic and health status of many countries.5 Obesity has increased markedly with this nutritional evolution in most Asian Countries. A similar nutritional transition is underway in India as well. In addition to the nutritional and socio-economic transitions, the behavioural transition of children is also possibly contributing significantly to the rapidly rising prevalence of obesity. Unhealthy eating habits and physical inactivity are the major culprits There is significant increase in the consumption of fats, sugars and energy rich foods. Rising income and urbanization leads to substitution of servants or appliances for physical household work and motor vehicles for short distance travelling, instead of walking or cycling.6 Junk food and fast food has replaced healthy homemade meals due to paucity of time. This attitude has altered the lives of school children in terms of bad eating habits, lack of exercise, habits like computer gaming and television viewing replacing the outdoor games. The causes of childhood obesity are multifactorial. Overweight and obesity in children and adolescent is generally caused by a lack of physical activity, unhealthy eating patterns resulting in excess energy intakes, or a combination of both.7 Changes in dietary and physical activity patterns are often the result of environmental and societal changes associated with development and lack of supportive policies in sectors such as health, agriculture, transport, urban planning, environment, food processing, distribution, marketing and education.8 Added to this, academic competitiveness, overzealous parents and teachers leave the children little or no time to play or exercise. Studies on urban Indian school children from selected regions report a high prevalence of obese and overweight children.9 Hence this study was undertaken to assess the prevalence of overweight and obesity among high school children (12-15years) and to determine the factors responsible for it.
METHOD Design:
A cross-sectional study was conducted in a private school in an urban fast growing city, Bangalore. All the children belonging to 8th, 9th and 10th standard (12-15years) were included for the study. A prior informed consent for the study was taken from the school administration. Those children who were absent on those days of study were called on a separate day and a sincere effort was made to cover all children. Data regarding physical activity, leisure time activity, mode of commuting to school, food preferences, eating chocolates, fast food and junk foods, time spent for television viewing, computer gaming were collected using a pre-tested, semi-structured questionnaire. The anthropometric data, height and weight were also recorded for all the children using the standard equipments. Weight was recorded using a calibrated and standardized mechanical bathroom weighing scale to nearest 100grams. Height was recorded using the standard wall mounted anthropometric height board to the nearest 0.1 cm. Two readings of height and weight were taken and the mean was considered as final. BMI was calculated using the standard formulaweight (kilograms)/height (meter2 ) and BMI percentile was calculated according to Barlow SE and Expert Committee recommendations.10 Assessment of overweight and obesity: International Obesity Task Force (IOTF) classification was referred for the classification of the adolescent children as overweight or obese.11 Overweight was defined as children BMI value between 85th -95thpercentile for a specific age and gender. Similarly obesity was defined as with BMI value above 95th percentile for that specific age and gender. On completion of the study, we provided health education and created awareness regarding overweight and obesity, their implication on their health and how they can inculcate healthy lifestyle practices. Statistical analysis Sample size was calculated as 788 considering the prevalence of overweight as 17.8% and e=2.67 as in the study.12 The data collected was collated using Excel spreadsheets with double checking of errors. The results were assembled in tabular and graphical formats. All data was expressed as percentage. Comparison of nutritional status between boys and girls was done by using chi square test. P Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1622http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16221.World Health Organization. Preventing chronic diseases. A Vital investment. World Global Report.Geneva: World Health Organization; 2005. (Accessed January 4, 2010, at http://www.who.int/chp/chronic_disease_report /full_report.pdf)
2. De Onis, M.; Lobstein, T. Defining obesity risk status in the general childhood population: Which cut-offs should we use? Int J Pediatr Obes 2010; 5: 458-60.
3. Reilly, J.J.; Kelly, J. Long-term impact of overweight and obesity in childhood and adolescence on morbidity and premature mortality in adulthood: Systematic review. Int J Obes 2011; 35: 891-98.
4. Raj M, Sundaram KR, Paul M, Deepa AS, Kumar RK. Obesity in Indian children: Time trends and relationship with hypertension. Natl Med J India 2007; 20:288-93
5. WHO Technical Report Series 916. Diet, nutrition and prevention of chronic diseases. Geneva: WHO; 2003. (Accessed January 4, 2010, at http://whqlibdoc.who.int/ trs/who_trs_916.pdf)
6. Waker H. Simple obesity in children. A study on the role of nutritional factors. Med Wieku Rozwoj 2006; 10:3-191.
7. US Department of Health and Human Services. Childhood Obesity. (Accessed January 4, 2010, at http://aspe.hhs.gov/health/reports/child_obesity /htm)
8. Goyal RK, Shah VN, Saboo BD, Phatak SR, ShahNN, Gohel MC, et al. Prevalence of overweight and obesity in Indian adolescent school going children: Its relationship with socio- economic status and associated lifestyle factors. J Assoc Physicians India 2010; 58:151- 58.
9. Chhatwal J, Verma M, Riar SK. Obesity among pre-adolescent and adolescents of developing country(India). Asia Pac J ClinNutr 2004; 13:231-5
10.Barlow SE. Expert Committee recommendations regarding the prevention, assessment and treatment of child and adolescent overweight and obesity: Summary report. Pediatrics 2007; 120 (suppl 4):164-92.
11.Cole JC, Mary CB, Katherine MF, William HD. Establishing a standard definition for child overweight and obesity worldwide: International survey. Br Med J 2000; 320: 1240-43.
12.Prevalence of overweight in urban Indian adolescent school children’ by Ramachandran A et al published in Diabetes Research and Clinical Practice Volume 57, Issue 3, Page 185-190, September 2002.
13.Kotian MS, Kumar SG, Kotian SS. Prevalence and determinants of overweight and obesity among adolescent school children of South Karnataka, India. Indian J Community Med 2010; 35:176-8.
14.Laxmaiah A, Nagalla B, Vijayaraghavan K, Nair M. Factors affecting prevalence of overweight among 12-17year old urban adolescents in Hyderabad, India. Obesity 2007; 15:1384-90.
15.Supreet Kaur, Sachdev HRS, Dwivedi SN, Lakshmy R, Kapil U. Prevalence of overweight and obesity amongst school children in Delhi, India. Asia Pac J Clin Nutr 2008; 17:592-96.
16.Wiseman JC, Bartee RT, Wang MQ. Physical activity, television viewing and weight in US youth: Youth risk behavior survey. Obes Res 1999; 10:379-85.
17.Moazeri H, Bidad K, Zadhoush S, Gholami N, Anari S. Increasing prevalence of iron deficiency in overweight and obese children and adolescents (Tehran Adolescent Obesity study). Eur J Pediatr 2006; 165:813-14.
18.Foldmark CE, Marcus C, Britton M. Interventions to prevent obesity in children and adolescents: a systematic literature review. Int J Obes 2006; 30:579-89
19.Kelishadi R, Pour MH, Sarraf-Zadegan N, Sadry GH, Ansari R, Alikhassy H, et al. Obesity and associated modifiable environmental factors in Iranian adolescents. Isfahan Healthy Heart Program-Heart Health Promotion from Childhood. Pediatr Int 2003; 45:435-42
20.Bar-Or O, Foreyt J, Bouchard C, Brownell KD, Dietz WH, Ravussin E,et al. Physical activity, genetic, and nutritional considerations in childhood weight management. Med Sci Sports Exerc 1998, 30:2-10
21.Klesges RC, Klesges LM, Shelton ML. A longitudinal analysis of accelerated weight gain in preschool children. Pediatrics 1995; 95:126- 30.
22.Wolfe WS, Campbell CC, Frongillo EA, Haas JD, Melink TA. Overweight school children in NewYork state: prevalence and characteristics. Am J Public Health 1994; 84:807-13
23.Bhave S, Bavdekar A, Otive M. IAP National task force for childhood prevention of adult disease; Childhood Obesity. Indian Paediatr 2004; 41:559-75.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareINTRA RATER AND INTER RATER RELIABILITY OF SWAY GRAPH IN ELDERLY SUBJECTS
English106111Janakiraman BalamuruganEnglish Paulraj Anantha RajaEnglish Nagaraj S. Ramachadran ArunachalamEnglishBackground: Accurate quantification of clinically significant changes of balance impairment is a key factor in understanding the effects of various disorders and treatment techniques on balance, the sway graph instrument is designed to measure the shift in COG in standing posture. Objective: To test the reliability of sway graph and to develop it as an accurate outcome measure of balance impairments. Subjects: One hundred and eighty nine community dwelling older adults (Mean age: 66 years) participated. Study design: Prospective study design Methods: Subjects were tested twice with sway graph by the same examiner on consecutive days to evaluate intra rater reliability and Subjects were tested by two examiners with sway graph to evaluate inter rater reliability. The reliability was calculated using intra class correlation coefficients (ICC). Results: The ICC result for inter rater reliability and Intra rater reliability of sway deviation variables were r-0.98, r-0.96 for A-P swing and r- 0.96, r-0.97 Lateral swing. The SDD of the variable were 19.391and 19.828 for A-P swing and 13.837and14.281 for Lateral swing. Cronbach’s alpha index score were very proximal to 1(0.983, 0.981) proving excellent internal consistency. Conclusion: The study showed good reliability results for sway graph and notably minimal systematic error in measuring sway with in elderly subjects.
EnglishCentre of gravity (COG), Balance, Reliability, SwayINTRODUCTION
The ability to balance and maintain a nonswaying posture in standing underlies the level of performance of physical activities and also minimizes the incidence of fall in potentially susceptible group of subjects. The capacities to hold and align body segments specifically depends on the ability to fix and restore Centre of gravity in optimal position.2 There are three systems that give input to the CNS regarding status and maintenance of balance which includes Vestibular, Visual and Somatosensory. During rehabilitation of postural and balance impairments the exact role of various protocols which attempts to slow down the decline in postural control, retraining balance is yet unclear. One major obstacle to the researches involved in examining the impact of treatments, age and diseases on balance is lack of an ideal tool to quantitatively measure balance. Health care professional have thrived to invent a measuring tool/device, which can detect and quantify even a very minimal change in balance. An ideal clinical tool would be the one which has reproducibility, sensitivity, cost effective, safe and uncomplicated in procedures. Measure of balance may be highly related to other variable such as lower extremity strength due to its force generating capacity and a thorough evaluation of the independent contribution of balance requires evaluating these other relationship to accurately determine the true magnitude of effect1 Several tools have been reported in literatures to measure balance which includes centre of pressure (COP), Brunel balance assessment, Berg balance scale, Trunk impairment scale, arm raise and forward reach tests, step/tap and stepup tests reached and Time up and Go (TUG) tests.6 A recent review of literatures shows dissatisfaction with parameters of static postural recordings has led researchers to develop dynamic testing protocols using moveable platforms, visual images and weighted pulleys, all designed to test subjects reaction to external forces.3, 4, Hausdortt JM states that there seems to be a need to perform reliability assessments of postural control in groups with identified fallers and non-fallers. No reliability studies have been reported that specifically included fallers. However, since one-third of community-dwelling people over 65 years of age experience one or more falls each year, it seems important to include elderly subjects in reliability studies on balance measuring tools.15Clinical studies need an objective and valid measure of balance to compare groups of patient, effectiveness of treatments, prognosis and progression. We have attempted to develop a safe, less expensive and accurate outcome measuring tool (sway graph) which can quantitatively measure swaying in standing postures and the primary objective of this study is to test the reliability of sway graph in elderly population. If proven to be reliable this tool could very easily become a major innovative step towards development of new tool to measure balance in various postures.
METHODS
Subjects A total of 189 subjects were selected from a population of 562 community dwelling old aged subjects with a mean (S.D) age of 66 years (4.0), the mean height was 159 (5.5) cm, the mean weight was 59 (10.3) kg. The scholars involved in the study were all faculties of our medical college and none of the subjects reported any neurological condition, postural hypotension, musculo- skeletal impairments and psychological disorders. The study was approved by the institutional ethical committee and all the subjects provided written informed consent. Raters The study involved four raters (I, II, III, and IV) to record sway graph. The rater I and III were post graduate students of the institution and they possess an under graduate degree with at least 1 years of clinical experience and rater II andIV were consultant physiotherapist of the institution with vast experience. Procedure As an initial step in the beginning session, all raters tested all subjects. The order in which the raters tested the subjects was randomly assigned from a series of order obtained from a numbers encoded Latin square design. The test was demonstrated to subjects prior to commencement and standardized instructions were given. The subjects were made to wear the sway graph device, which consist of a lumbar belt, a back pointer with pen holder (matching S2 spinous process) and graph sheet to record the sway readings with two degree of freedom which measures Anterior-Posterior swing and Lateral swing. Now, the subjects were made to stand on a static platform e.g. floor for 45 seconds with their back facing the table with graph, so that the pen is in contact with the graph sheet, a standard foot position (4 inches apart) and angle (150 toe out) was used and the table height is adjustable in par with the subjects height. After the first reading the subjects were turn over to the next rater and the procedures were repeated. Each rater was unaware of the scores of other raters and the marks on subjects are removed following each rater, the subjects were not shown their graph pattern after the test. To obtain intra rater data’s the test was conducted again after a week period by rater I.
STATISTICAL ANALYSIS:
All data were analyzed statistically using SPSS 20 for windows software. The Intra class correlation coefficient was used as parameter of reliability and ICC model 3 was used to determine intra rater reliability, inter rater reliability was computed using ICC model 2. The 95% confidence interval was used to determine statistical significance. Cronbach’s alpha reliability estimates were used as an index to determine internal consistency or average correlation and higher the score, the more reliable the generated scale is. Nunnaly (1978) has indicated 0.7 to be an acceptable reliability coefficient but lower thresholds are sometimes used in the literature.18 RESULTS Inter rater reliability The mean value of Anterior –Posterior swing deviation and Lateral swing deviation for both the raters were shown in Table 01.Inter rater reliability was excellent with a high ICC value of 0.98 for Anterior –Posterior swing deviation and ICC of 0.96 for Lateral swing deviation. The standard deviation for both variables A-P swing and LAT swing were 19.391 and 13.837 respectively. There was a statistically significant similarity between the data of the raters and the smaller value of SE is indicating very minimal systematic error. Cronbach’s alpha reliability estimates were 0.981 Intra rater reliability There was no significant difference between Test 1 and Test 2 of rater I in both variables. The ICC value (0.96, 0.97) and small SE value (0.5, 0.5) of table 01 clearly indicates existence of minimal random and systematic error. The standard deviation value of both variable were A-P swing 19.828 and Lateral swing 14.281.The data of both Test 1 and Test2 of the rater showed excellent similarity as suggested by r value. Cronbach’s alpha reliability estimates were 0.983
DISCUSSION
Though impairment in balance is acknowledged as a major predictor of falls, there have always been limitations in recommending specific clinical assessment scales of balance.8, 9, 10, 11 Our study suggests that Antero-Posterior swing and Lateral swing measurement by sway graph device can be reliably performed by the same therapist and also by different therapist with accuracy. The amount of measurement error being reasonably low is indicative of an evidence to support the use of sway graph as an objective measurement tool among other scales in practice. The clinical assessment of balance is used as a means for measuring the integrity of the postural stability system, which involves the integration of information from somatosensory, musculoskeletal, visual, and vestibular systems and cognition.12 According to Horak and Shumway-Cook evaluating balance by observing subjects response under given conditions of varying sensory input provides information on the mechanism of postural control and this approach provides a systematic evaluation. According to David Levine Chattecx balance system (CBS) has a least reliability in antero-posterior direction because the base of support is relatively short in this position, but the postural sway occurs about the ankle joint, which is physically separated by a large distance from the centre of gravity of the body.17 The reliability found in our study may be due to the fact that the displacement of COG is recorded from close proximity to S2 unlike pressure distribution recorder which is used to measure balance, error can be introduced from foot movements without COG displacement. The most important characteristic feature of the device has been though, there is a difference in the skill levels and experience of the therapists (raters) there exist no short fall in the repeatability of balance measurements by Sway graph. The sway graph device constructed by our team measure with only two degree of freedom and it allows only static balance measure in standing posture, which makes it rather odd to be used in certain population of patient with severe impairments. But, with the given potential uses and reproducibility of this tool to all health care professionals, further development and testing are in order.
CONCLUSION
This study clearly demonstrates the potential of the device as a clinical tool with good reproducibility; sway graph device will definitely add more cost effective objectivity to static balance measurements in standing posture. More over these results may form a basis for further research examinations of this tool with more added features and to investigate validity issues.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Authors acknowledge the immense help received from the scholars whose articles are cited and included in references of this manuscript. The authors are also grateful to authors / editors / publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed. The authors are also thankful to the engineers of Anna University for helping us in constructing the device.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1623http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16231. Horak FB. Postural orientation and equilibrium: what do we need to know about neural control of balance to prevent falls. Age Ageing. 2006; 35 (suppl 2):ii7–ii11.
2. Berg K.Balance and its measure in the elderly: a review Physiother can 1989; 41:240-246.
3. Nashner .Adapting reflexes controlling the human posture. Exp Brain Res 1976;26:59- 72
4. Nashner LM.Fixed patterns of rapid postural responses among leg muscles during stance.Exp Brain res 1977; 30:13-24.
5. Nashner LM, Black FO, Wall C.Adaptation to altered support surfaces and visual conditions in patients with vestibular deficits neurosci 1982; 2:536-544.
6. SF Tyson LA Connell, How to measure balance in clinical practice Clinical rehabilitation September 2009; 23: 824-840.
7. Shumway-Cook A, Horak F.B Assessing the influence of sensory interaction on balance. Suggestion from the field. Phys Ther 1986; 66:1548-1550.
8. Scott V, Votova K, Scanlan A, Close J. Multifactorial and functional mobility assessment tools for fall risk among older adults in community, home-support, longterm and acute care settings. Age Ageing. 2007; 36: 130–139.
9. Perell KL, Nelson A, Goldman RL, et al. Fall risk assessment measures: an analytic review. J Gerontol A Biol Sci Med Sci.2001; 56:M761–M766.
10. American Geriatrics Society; British Geriatrics Society, and American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons Panel on Falls Prevention. Guideline for the prevention of falls in older persons. J Am Geriatr Soc.2001; 43:664–672.
11. National Institute of Clinical Excellence. Clinical Guideline 21: The Assessment and Prevention of Falls in Older People, 2004. www.nice.org.uk. Accessed June 21, 2005.
12. Susan W. Muir, Katherine Berg, Bert Chesworth, et al. Balance Impairment as a Risk Factor for Falls in CommunityDwelling Older Adults Who Are High Functioning: A Prospective StudyJ Apta Phys ther. 2010; 90: 338-347.
13. Berg KO, Maki BE, Williams JI, et al. Clinical and laboratory measures of postural balance in an elderly population. Arch Phys Med Rehabil. 1992; 73:1073–1080.
14. Berg KO, Wood-Dauphine´e SL, Williams JI, Maki B. Measuring balance in the elderly: validation of an instrument. Can J Public Health. 1992; 83(suppl 2):S7–S11.
15. Hausdortt JM, Edelberg HK, Mitchell Sl, Goldberger AL Increased gait unsteadiness in community dwelling elderly fallers. Arch Phys Med Rehabil1997, 78:278-283.
16. Byl NN. Spatial orientation to gravity and implications for balance training. Orthopedic Physical Therapy Clinics of North America, October 1992:207-40.
17. David Levine, Michael W.Whittle, MD, Jeannette A. Beach et al Test-retest reliability of the Chattecx Balance System in the patient with hemiplegia Journal of Rehabilitation Research and development, Vol.33, February 1996, 36-44.
18. J.Reyanldo A.Santos Cronbach’s Alpha: A tool for assessing reliability scale.Vol.37, April 1999.22-25.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareSIGNIFICANCE OF VARIOUS SACRAL MEASUREMENTS IN THE DETERMINATION OF SEX IN SOUTH INDIAN POPULATION
English112118Mamatha H.English SandhyaEnglish Sushma R.K.English Suhani S.English Naveen KumarEnglishIntroduction: In the identification of sex in human skeletal remains, sacrum is an important bone of the human skeletal system. Being a component of axial skeleton and because of its contribution to the pelvic girdle and in turn to the functional differences in the region between the sexes, it has an applied importance in determining the sex and related disorders with the help of measurements carried upon it. Therefore a study for sex determination was carried on 50 sacra, in the department of Anatomy Kasturba medical college, Manipal. India Materials and methods: The parameters used for the study were the different dimensions of the sacrum. Using the same the sacral index, auricular index were calculated. The morphology of the sacral hiatus and the extensions of the auricular surface were also studied. All the measurements were carried out using the digital vernier calliper. The readings were recorded and their mean and standard deviations were calculated. Results and conclusion: All the parameters chosen for the study were found to be reliable in sexing the sacra and identifying the related disorders.
EnglishSacrum, sacral index, auricular index, sacral hiatus, auricular surface, sex determinationINTRODUCTION
Sex determination of a skeleton is a problem of concern to paleoanthropologists, paleodemographers, forensic scientists and anatomists. Pelvic bones are most important for sex determination, followed by skull and the long bones. Forensic expert is often faced with a single specimen on whom he is asked to pronounce an opinion about its origin in general terms; or it may be necessary to establish as probably belonging to a given person when the identity is already suspected on circumstantial evidence (Kanika et al, 2011) The sex classification of a bone is possible with a degree of certainty only when it can be compared to a series of bones of known sexual dimorphism. Otherwise, a female bone could be classified as a male when the series to which it belonged was particularly robust. (Kanika et al, 2011) It has long been customary among anatomists, anthropologists and forensic experts to judge the sex of the skeletal material by non-metric observations. Lately, sexual divergence has been based upon actual measurements in different bones (Mishra SR et al, 2003). Sacrum is one such important bone for the identification of sex in human skeletal system. Since it is a component of axial skeleton and because of its contribution to the pelvic girdle and in turn to the functional differences in the region between the sexes, it has an applied importance in determining sex with the help of measurements carried upon it (MM Patel et al, 2003). Sacrum is a large, triangular bone formed by fusion of five vertebrae and forms postero-superior wall of pelvic cavity, wedged between the two innominate bones. Its blunted caudal apex articulates with the coccyx and its superior wide base with the fifth lumber vertebra at the lumbosacral angle. Since it is a component of axial skeleton and because of its contribution to the pelvic girdle and in turn to functional differences in the region between the sexes, it has an applied importance in determining the sex with the various measurements carried upon it (Standrig et al, 1988). The sacral hiatus is an opening present at the caudal end of the sacral canal. It is formed due to the failure of fusion of laminae of 5th sacral vertebra. Sacral hiatus has been utilized for administration of epidural anaesthesia in obstetrics as well as in orthopaedic practice for treatment and diagnosis. The area of auricular surface defines the magnitude of weight transmission to the hip bones (Standrig et al, 1988). Though sacrum is often considered to be an important bone, while dealing with sex differences in skeletal material, there is paucity of metrical data available for this bone. Metrical study of sacrum has been done by various authors (Wilder H. in 1920, Faweet E. in 1938, Davivongs V. in1963). Jit I et al, (1968) and Singh S et al (1968) advocated the demarking point, which identify the sex with 100% accuracy. Singh S et al (1968) have reported that even within the same general population, mean value may be significantly different in bones from different zones. Singh and Singh have shown that demarking point should be calculated separately for different regions of population because the mean of a parameter differs in values in different regions. The available literature clearly shows that the Indian sacra have not been studied widely except by Mishra et al (2003), Singh et al (1988)and Raju et al (in 1981), Jana et al (1988). The materials studied by them are from Agra, Varanasi and Burdwan and regions respectively. Therefore, the present study was undertaken with a view to study the sexdifferences in the South Indian population. MATERIALS AND METHODS The present study was performed on 50 adult sacra (25 male and 25 female) obtained from the Department of Anatomy, Kasturba Medical College, Manipal, India. All the sacra were normal and fully ossified. The following parameters of sacrum were measured using digital Vernier calliper. (Figure I) 1. Maximum width of the sacrum: was measured on the anterior surface with the sliding calliper by taking two points at the upper part of auricular surface anteriorly (or lateral most part of alae of sacrum). 2. Maximum height / length of sacrum: measured along the midline from the anterosuperior margin of the promontory to the middle of antero-inferior margin of last sacral vertebra. 3. Width of base / transverse diameter of the body of 1st sacral vertebra: measured by taking one point on each side of the lateral most part on the superior surface of the body of 1st sacral vertebra. 4. Transverse diameter of the wing (ala): measured on both the sides by taking one point on the lateral most part of superior surface of the body of 1st sacral vertebra and another point on the lateral most part of the alae. 5. Auricular surface length: It is the vertical auricular length, measured on the lateral aspect of sacrum by taking one point on the upper most part of auricular surface and another point on the lower most part of the auricular surface. 6. Extensions of auricular surface in relation to the sacral segments and morphology of the sacral hiatus were also observed. Using the above parameters sacral index, auricular index on either side were calculated. 7. Sacral index: Width × 100 / Height.
8. Auricular index: Length of auricular surface × 100 / Width The readings were recorded, tabulated and subjected for statistical analysis. RESULTS The mean and standard deviations of various parameters are given in Table1. The mean values of width and height of the sacrum, transverse diameter of the wing and the auricular surface length was more in males as compared to females. However the width of the base was higher in females than in males. The mean values of sacral index (Table 2) and auricular index (Table 3) is higher in females than in males. The extension of the auricular surface corresponding to the sacral segments was also noted. (Table 4) Morphology of the sacral hiatus was also studied (Figure II, III, IV) and tabulated in Table 5. Also complete agenesis of dorsal bony wall of sacral canal (Figure V) was observed in one of the sacra. DISCUSSION The sacrum has always attracted the attention of the medico-legal experts for establishing the sex, because of its contribution to pelvic girdle and associated functional sex differences. While teaching sex differences in bones much stress is laid on the importance of sacrum. Actually, very little data is available to test the validity of the number of parameters described to identify the sex of sacra (Devivongs V, 1963). The demarking points of various parameters will help to identify the sex with certainty, which is of paramount importance in medico-legal cases. The mean length (Table1) of the male sacra in the present study is 87.2mm, which is lower when compared to that of Agra region (107.53mm) studied by Mishra et al. and the Varanasi region (104.96mm) studied by Raju et al (1981). The mean length of the female sacra (81.65mm) is also shorter when compared to Agra and Varanasi regions. Comas and Charles (1961) reported a wide variation between the male and female in the Chinese, Negroes and Bushmen. Davivongs (1963) in his study of Australian aboriginal sacra has re-ported mean length of sacrum to be 96.52mm and 88.12mm in the male and female respectively, which is very much in agreement with the measurements in the present study. The mean width (Table 1) of the male sacra in the present study is 100.1mm which is close to similar observations made by Mishra et.al (2003).in the Agra region (105.34mm) and Raju et al. (1981) in the Varanasi region (105.33mm) respectively. However, in the females the present study showed a lesser value (99.6mm) than that of Agra and Varanasi regions. In the Australian aboriginal females, the maximum width of sacrum was 101.24mm, which is higher than that of males (99.92mm) of the same race (Davivongs V, 1963). Thus there exists a regional and racial difference in the length and width of the sacrum. The female ranges of transverse diameters of body of S1 (Table 1) are narrower than that of males and fall within the corresponding male ranges. The result is that the separation of any female sacrum from the males by the above measurements alone is impossible. The differences in the length of auricular surface (Table 1) between the males and females is significantly higher in male than in female supporting the normal description in the text books of Anatomy that the auricular surface for articulation with ilium is shorter in females than that of males. Based on the sacral index, anthropologists have classified the sacra into specific groups. The mean sacral index (Table 2) of the male and female sacra in the present series are 115.92mm and 125.2mm respectively falls under the platyheiric group (sacral index>106). Similar observation was reported by Martin (1960) (males: 112.4mm and females: 114.8mm), Raju et al (1981) and Davivongs (1963). However Mishra et al., in his study has classified the male sacra (sacral index: 98.22mm) under dolichoheiric group (narrow sacrum with sacral index up to 99.9) and female sacra (sacral index: 125.2 mm) under platyheiric group similar to the present study. Any way an attempt to use the sacral index for ethnic discrimination is very doubtful (Davivongs, 1963). However, its importance in sex determination cannot be denied since the differences between the males and females are highly significant. The mean auricular index (Table 3) is more in females (Left: 69.28mm; Right: 70.26mm) than males (Left: 62.52mm; Right: 62.69mm), unlike the observations made by Mishra et.al. in the Agra region wherein the latter had reported the auricular index to be higher in males (59.78mm) and females (51.69mm). The extensions of the auricular surface (Table 4) when observed, a majority of 55% was found to extend up to S2 vertebral level. The available literature does not mention about length and the extensions of the auricular surface in any of the sacra. The study on the morphology of the sacral hiatus (Table 5) revealed the most common to be is the inverted V shaped hiatus in 54.2% of males and inverted U in 37.9% of females. Elongated V, U and irregular shapes were also observed. Nagar S.K (2004) in his study had noted the shapes of sacral hiatus, most common being inverted U (41.5%) and inverted V (27%) similar to our study. In 13.3% its outline was dumbbell shaped, while in 14.1% it was irregular. Bifid hiatus was seen in 1.5% which was not present in our study. Vinod Kumar et al (1992) had also observed various shapes of sacral hiatus, most common being inverted V and inverted U in 76.23% of sacra, 7.43% were dumb bell shaped. There was complete agenesis of dorsal bony wall of sacral canal in 2% sacra of the present study. This is similar to that reported by previous workers namely Nagar S.K. (2004) 1.5%, Trotter (1947)1.8% and Vinod Kumar et al (1992) 1.49%. CONCLUSION Since sacrum is a component of pelvic girdle with functional differences between the two sexes, it itself becomes important for identification of sex in the human skeletal system. All the parameters used in the present study contribute to the sex determination in a positive way, the most significant being the sacral index and the auricular index. However a single parameter may not be of much use in sexing the sacra. Hence, it can be concluded that for the determination of sex of sacrum, maximum number of parameters should be taken to attain 100% accuracy. In addition to sex differences, regional and racial differences of the sacra are also stressed upon in the present study. The extension of the auricular surface varies in human sacra. These variations are associated with differential load bearing at the sacral joints. The position of the auricular surface can explain or possibly predict low back pain situations. The anatomical variations of the sacral hiatus are to be understood for it may be useful in improving the success of caudal epidural anaesthesia. In the present study inverted U and inverted V shapes were found in a significant percentage, which should be kept in mind while giving caudal anaesthesia in the South Indian population. Therefore to conclude, this study will be useful for the anatomists, anthropologists and experts in forensic medicine for accurate sexing of sacra and various other clinical tenacities.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1624http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16241. Kanika Sachdeva, Rajan Kumar Singla, Gurdeep Kalsey, Gaurav Sharma (2011), Role of Sacrum in Sexual Dimorphism- A Morphometric Study, J Indian Academy Forensic Med., 33(3): 0971-0973
2. Mishra SR, Singh PJ, Agarwal AK, Gupta RN (2003), Identification of Sex of Sacrum of Agra Region, J Anat. Soc. India, 52(2):132- 136
3. MM Patel, BD Gupta, TC Singel (2005), Sexing of Sacrum by Sacral index and Kimura’s Base Wing Index, J Indian Academy Forensic Med., 27(1):0971-0973
4. Standring Susan, Borley NR, (1988), Collins Patricia, Crossman AR et al, Gray’s Anatomy, 40th edition, London Press, 724 – 728, 1359.
5. Wilder HH (1920), A laboratory manual of anthropometry, P. Blakistons sons and Co. Philadelphia, 193.
6. Faweet E, (1938). The sexing of the human sacrum, Journal of Anatomy London, 72: 638.
7. Davivongs V (1963), The pelvic girdle of the Australian aborigines- Sex difference and sex determination, American Journal of Physical Anthropology, 21: 443-455.
8. Jit I, Singh S (1966), Sexing of the adult clavicle, Indian Journal of Medical Research, 54: 551-571.
9. Singh S, Gangrade KC (1968), Sexing of adult clavicle verification and applicability of demarking point, Journal of Indian Academy of Forensic Science, 7: 20-30
10. Singh H, Singh J, Bargotra RN (1988). Sacral index as observed anthropometrically in the region of Jammu, Journal of Anatomical Society of India, 37:1.
11. Singh, S, Raju PB (1977), Identification of sex from the hip bone-demarking points, Journal of Anatomical Society of India, 26 : 111- 117.
12. Jana TK, Koley T K, Saha SB, Basu D, Basu SK (1988), Variation and sexing of adult human sacrum, Journal of Anatomical Society of India, 37 : 2-3
13. Raju PB, Singh S, Padmanabhan R (1981), Sex determination and sacrum, Journal of Anatomical Society of India, 30 : 13-15
14. Comas J, Charles C, Manual of Physical anthropology (revised and enlarged English edition) 1961, Thomas Springfield, Illinois, USA, 415-416
15. Martin, Cited by Comas J, Manual of Physical Anthropology (1960) 2nd Edition, Charles C, Thomas Springfield, Illinois U.S.A., 415
16. Nagar S K, Study of sacral hiatus in dry human sacra, Anatomical Society of India (2004), 53(2): 18-21
17. Vinod Kumar, Pandey SN, Bajpai RN, Jain PN, Longia GS. Morpho-metrical study of sacral hiatus, Journal of Anatomical Society of India,(1992), 41 (1):7-13.
18. Trotter M .Variations of the sacral canal; their significance in the administration of caudal analgesia, Anaesthesia and analgesia, (1947), 26 (5): 192-202.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN-0001November30HealthcareA STUDY ON PREVALENCE OF ISCHEMIC HEART DISEASE IN YOUNGER AGE GROUP (40 YEARS) IN PATIENTS WITH METABOLIC SYNDROME
English119124Rajesh KhoiwalEnglish Sandeep VaishnavEnglishObjective — we estimate the prevalence of ischemic heart disease in younger age group (< 40 years) patients with metabolic syndrome. Research Design and Methods— 100 patients who satisfied the selection criteria were thoroughly examined and undertook relevant routine investigation to assess the diabetic status, hypertension, and lipid profile. Anthropometry i.e. height, weight, Body Mass Index, waist circumference and diabetic complication, were selected for Tread Meal Test. Those who are Tread Meal Test positive were taken for study. Results— The mean value of metabolic syndromes of Waist Circumference, Triglyceride, High Density Lipoproteins, Systolic Blood Pressure , Diastolic Blood Pressure and Fasting Blood Sugar in ischemic heart disease patients was (95.67+8.22), (193.10+36.92), (36.63+3.2), (148.04+12.63), (89.43+4.94) and (130.60+25.83) respectively. All criteria of metabolic syndrome were significantly different in between Ischemic Heart Disease and non Ischemic Heart Disease group. Conclusions-The finding of the present study clearly reveals that high prevalence of Ischemic Heart Disease in younger metabolic syndrome patients.
Englishacute ischemic stroke, C- reactive protein, Serum lipid profileINTRODUCTION
Customary health variations are a worldwide problem. Lessening of preventable human suffering caused by insufficient access to healthcare amenities is being advocated worldwide. But what is the scenario for human being health in developing countries where there is an increased risk of adult chronic diseases against a backdrop of persistent catastrophe of infectious diseases, environmental degradation, and political apathy? (1)A major pattern is that of cardiovascular disease (CVD). Studies showed that CVD has arrived at epidemic peak in many developing countries. In India, mortality attribute to CVD is anticipated to go up by 103% in men and by 90% in women from 1985 to 2015 (2). More importantly, the disease grabs Indians young. Therefore, to stop the callous attack of CVD in developing countries, there is an urgent need to describe the disease in the health plan of these countries. A cost effective preventive approach will necessitate to center on plummeting risk factors both in the individual and in the population at large. Therefore, it is vital to carry out some prospective studies in developing countries such as India to identify CAD risk factors, particularly modifiable. However, scientific evidence for modifiable CAD risk factors (elevated serum total and low density lipoprotein cholesterol) [LDL-C], low high-density lipoprotein cholesterol [HDL-C], smoking, diabetes, hypertension, low level of physical activity, and obesity) in this population may be supportive in inventing a straight CAD prevention policy. (3)
The occurrence of Ischemic Heart Disease(IHD) has increased noticeably for the period of last decade, not only in urban areas but in rural areas also, but it is not that abrupt because life style variation have affected populace in urban areas more than in rural areas.(4) This syndrome is often related with obesity, diabetes mellitus, dyslipidemia, and hypertension. All of these abnormalities promote a cardiovascular disease risk, and collectively they are categorizing as the insulin resistance syndrome or the metabolic syndrome. (5) Although the all entities of the metabolic syndrome are evidently connected with increased risk for coronary heart disease (CHD), we wanted to quantify the increased prevalence of CHD among people with metabolic syndrome. The current study was designed to evaluate the cross sectional relationship between the metabolic syndrome (defined by the ATP III criteria) and the prevalence of ischemia heart disease in Indian subjects.
MATERIAL AND METHOD
This study was conducted in the Department of Medicine and Cardiology, JLN Medical College and Hospital, Ajmer. The study included the patients who attended the medical OPD and get admitted in the wards during June 2008 to May 2009. Selection Criteria: 1. Asymptomatic patient having no history of chest pain suggestive of coronary artery disease. 2. Obese personalities. 3. Age less than 40 years. 4. Patient irrespective of blood sugar / blood pressure level but fit for TMT. Exclusion Criteria 1. Follow up patient of myocardial infarction / CVA / angina. 2. Patient of valvular heart disease. 3. Patient of conduction defect. 4. Patient of COPD / bronchial asthma. 100 patients who satisfied the selection criteria were thoroughly examined and underwent relevant routine investigation to assess the diabetic status, hypertension, lipid profile. Anthropometry i.e. height, weight, BMI, waist circumference and diabetic complication were selected for TMT. Those who are TMT positive were taken for study.
RESULTS
Age of the patients varied between 29 - 40 years. Mean age of patients was 36.05 years. Out of 100 patients, 62 were males and 38 were females. Mean age of male patients was 36.30 and mean age of female patients was 35.57 years. There was no case found below 29 years. All age group had male predominance except 29-31 years of age group where all the patients were females. This can be due to less number of patients studied. Maximum numbers of patients were in age group 38-40 years. Out of 100 patients 46 were Tread Meal Test positive (having Ischemic Heart Disease). Out of these 46 patients, 24 (52.17%) were male and 22 (47.83%) were female. In non-IHD group out of 54 patients, 38 (70.37%) were male and 16 (29.62%) were female. The prevalence of IHD among males was found to be 38.70% (24/62) and that in females was 57.89% (28/38).P value is 0.0674 denote that ischemic heart disease is equally distributed in male and female and there is no sex correlation. As in our study 52.17% male and 47.83% female had ischemic heart diseases those were fulfilling the criteria for metabolic syndrome. Out of 100 patients with metabolic syndrome, 31 (31.00%) had both IHD and blood sugar level >110 mg/dl. Out of 46 patients with IHD, 31 (67.39%) had blood sugar level >110 mg/dl. In males with IHD, out of 41 patients, 15 (36.58%) had blood sugar >110 mg/dl. In females with IHD, out of 38 patients, 16 (42.10%) had blood sugar >110 mg/dl. Female patients having high blood sugar level and IHD was more in comparison to male.
Out of 100 patients with metabolic syndrome, 44 (44.00%) had both IHD and high blood pressure (BP >130/85 mmHg).Out of 46 patients with IHD, 44 (95.65%) had blood pressure >130/85 mmHg. In male patients 24/62 (38.70%) had IHD and hypertension. In female patients 20/38 (52.63%) had IHD and hypertension. Percentage of females having high blood pressure and IHD was more than males. Out of 100 patients with metabolic syndrome, 45 (45.00%) had both low High Density Lipoprotein (HDL) level and IHD. Out of 46 patients with IHD, 45 (97.83%) had low HDL level (below cut off value).In male patients, 23/62 (37.1%) had both IHD and low HDL level (150 mg/dl. Out of 46 patients with IHD, 42 (91.30%) had TG >150 mg/dl.In males out of 62, 23 (37.09%) had TG >150 mg/dl and in females out of 38, 19 (50.00%) had TG >150mg/dl. Percentage of females with increased TG (50.00%) was more than males (37.09%). Out of 100 patients with metabolic syndrome, 26 (26.00%) had both IHD and increased waist circumference. Out of 46 patients with IHD, 26 (26/46 - 56.52%) had both IHD and waist circumference more than cut off value. In male patients, out of 62, 10 (10/62 - 16.12%) had both IHD and increased waist circumference above cut off value. In female patients out of 38, 16 (16/38 - 42.10%) had both IHD and increased waist circumference above cut off value. Percentage of females with increased waist circumference and having IHD (42.10%) was more than the percentage of males (16.12%).
The mean value of metabolic syndromes of Waist Circumference (WC), Triglyceride (TG), High Density Lipoprotein (HDL), Systemic Blood Pressure (SBP), Diastolic Blood Pressure (DBP) and Fasting Blood Sugar (FBS) in ischemic heart disease patients was (95.67+8.22), (193.10+36.92), (36.63+3.2), (148.04+12.63), (89.43+4.94) and (130.60+25.83) respectively. It was observed that mean values of 4 criteria of metabolic syndrome except HDL were higher in IHD patients group as compared to non IHD patient group. Mean value of HDL was lower in IHD patients as compared to non IHD patients. All criteria of metabolic syndrome were significantly different in between 2 groups (IHD/non IHD group).
DISCUSSION
The study was carried out in the Department of Medicine and Cardiology, JLN Medical College and Associated Group of Hospitals, Ajmer on the patients who were referred for TMT. All patients who fulfill the NCEP ATP III criteria were included in this study. This study was conducted on 100 patients, attending Medicine outdoors and wards found to have metabolic syndrome. In our study we categorized metabolic syndrome group patients into two groups TMT positive patients and TMT negative patients. Metabolic syndrome is very common with 44% of the western countries population over 50 years of age meeting the NCEP ATP III diagnostic criteria.(5)It is estimated that it affect 65% male and 47.8% female in India (6).Recent study showed that the metabolic syndrome is associated with an increased prevalence of IHD. One possible reason for the high prevalence of IHD associated with metabolic syndrome is the direct effect of insulin resistance on the heart and arteries (7). A study was conducted by the National Centre for Health Statistics (NCHS) 3 Centre for Disease Control and Prevention in two phases - Phase I (1988-1995) and Phase II (1991-1994) showed that excess prevalence of IHD was attributed to metabolic syndrome and/or diabetes was 37.4% in the group with metabolic syndrome. In our study, there were 100 patients with metabolic syndrome, out of which 38 were female and 62 were male. Mean age among total patients was 36.05 years. The mean age among male was 36.30 years and mean age of female patients was 35.57 years. Out of 100 patients with metabolic syndrome 46 (46%) were found to have IHD. Among these 46 IHD patients 24 (52.17%) were male and 22 (47.83%) were female. The prevalence of IHD among male was found to be 38.70% (24/62) and that in female was 57.89% (22/38). There is no significant correlation between sex and IHD (P=0.0674). In contrast to our observation a study carried out by NCHS (8) showed prevalence of IHD is 38%. In our study it was 46% because in our study all criteria of metabolic syndrome were present. A study carried out by R. Gupta (2002) (4) showed the prevalence rate of IHD in urban males was 60.98 per thousand and rural males was 67.01 per thousand while in urban females prevalence rate was 30.82 per thousand and rural females was 27.33 per thousand. But in our study the prevalence of IHD among male and female was comparable. This was due to less number of patients studied. Among 46 IHD patients maximum numbers of patients were present between age group 38 - 40 years. In our study, criteria of age is restricted to only younger patients (110 mg/dl and out of 46 patients with IHD, 31 (67.39%) had blood sugar >110. In male with IHD out of 41 patients, 15 (36.58%) had blood sugar >110 mg/dl and in female with IHD, out of 38 patients, (42.10%) had blood sugar >110 mg/dl. Out of 100 patients with metabolic syndrome 44 (44.00%) had both IHD and high blood pressure. Out of 46 patients with IHD, 44 (95.65%) had blood pressure >130/85 mmHg. In males patients 24/62 (38.70%) had IHD and hypertension. In females 20/38 (52.63%) had IHD and hypertension. Percentage of females having high blood pressure and IHD was more than males. Elevated blood pressure is a risk factor of prime importance and established association with coronary atherosclerosis. Naik (1968) (11) reported that 36% cases of IHD were hypertension, But in our study high blood pressure was present in 44 (95.65%) with IHD because in our study all metabolic syndrome criteria were present which increases coronary atherosclerosis. Out of 100 patients with metabolic syndrome 45 (45.00%) had both low HDL and IHD. Out of 46 patients with IHD, 45 (97.83%) had low HDL (below cut off value). In males, 23/62 (37.1%) had both IHD and low HDL level (M)]. In the Framingham Heart Study (1986) (12), IHD was present in 44% patients with low HDL level (150 mg/dl and out of 46 patients with IHD, 42 (91.30%) had TG >150 mg/dl. Further in males out of 62, 23 (37.09%) had TG >150 mg/dl and in females, out of 38, 19 (50.00%) had TG >150 mg/dl. Percentage of females with increased TG (50.00%) was more than males (37.09%). A prospective cohort study was carried out by Nordegestgard BG et al (2007) (13) in 7857 women and 6394 men with high TG levels (>150 mg/dl) and were followed up from 1976 to 2004. They found that 1567 women (19.94%) and 1912 men (29.90%) developed IHD. But in our study prevalence of IHD was 37.09% in males and 50% in females with high TG levels. High prevalence in males and females in our study was due to presence of all metabolic syndrome criteria. In comparing IHD and WC, out of 100 patients with metabolic syndrome, 26 (26.00%) had both IHD and increased WC. Out of 46 patients with IHD, 26 (26/46 - 56.52%) had both IHD and WC. In males, out of 62, 10 (16.12%) had both IHD and increased WC (>102 cm) and in females out of 38, 16 (42.10%) had both IHD and increased WC (>88 cm). Percentage of females with increased WC and having IHD (42.10%) was more than the percentage of males (16.12%). Philip WJT (2005) (14) studied prevalence of IHD in patients with increased WC (female >88 cm, male >102 cm) and showed that prevalence was 16%. But in our study prevalence of IHD was 26%; this was because of presence of all criteria of metabolic syndrome. In comparison of mean of various criteria for metabolic syndrome patients among IHD and Non-IHD patients (Table 1). We found that the mean values of metabolic syndrome criteria for waist, TG, HDL, SBP, DBP and BS in IHD patients was (95.67+8.22), (193.10+36.96), (36.63+3.2), (148.04+12.63), (89.43+4.94), (130.60+25.83) respectively. It was observed that mean value of metabolic syndrome criteria (except HDL) were higher among IHD patients as compared to Non-IHD patients. Whereas the mean value of HDL was low in IHD compared to Non-IHD patients.
CONCLUSION
From this study it is concluded that TMT positive ischemic heart disease in metabolic syndrome patients have more waist circumference, high fasting plasma glucose, high blood pressure and high TG level but low HDL level. So there is a high prevalence of IHD in younger metabolic syndrome patients.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1625http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16251. Sharma M, Ganguly N K. Premature Coronary Artery Disease in Indians and its Associated Risk Factors. Vasc Health Risk Manag. 2005 September; 1(3): 217–225.
2. Bulatao RA, Stephens PW. Global estimates and projections of mortality by cause, 1970- 2015. Preworking paper 1007. Washington: Population Health and Nutrition Department, World Bank; 1992.
3. Aggarwal A, Aggarwal S, Goel A, Sharma V, Dwivedi S.A retrospective case-control study of modifiable risk factors and cutaneous markers in Indian patients with young coronary artery disease. J R Soc Med Cardio 2012; 1: 8
4. Gupta R, Gupta VP, Sama M et al: Prevalence of coronary heart disease and coronary risk factor in urban Indian population: Jaipur Heart Watch-2. India Heart 2002; 54: 59-66.
5. Adult Treatment Panel III, Executive summary of third report of the National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP) Expert Panel on Detection, Evaluation and treatment of high blood cholesterol in adult. JAMA, 2001; 285: 2486-2497.
6. Coronary Heart Disease in India.Park a Textbook of Preventive and Social Medicine, 17th ed, 2001: 274.
7. Stout RW: Insulin and atheroma, 20 year prospective study. Diabetes Care, 1990; 13:631-54.
8. Alexander EM, Landsman PB, Teutehsm, and Hattner SM: NCEP defined metabolic syndrome diabetes and prevalence of coronary heart disease among NHANES III participants aged 50 years and older. Diabetes 2003; 52: 1210-1214
9. Mukherjee AB: Precious ischemic heart disease. IMA 1968; 512: 207.
10. 10.Bhargava RK, Husain SA, Dave AS, Narang NK, Banerjee A, Gupta U. Incidence of heart diseases in Rajasthan. J Assoc Physicians. India. 1966; 14 (1):15-23
11. Naik CH. Incidence and epidemiology of coronary artery disease in Gujarat. Indian Heart J. 1968 Jan; 20(1):3-10.
12. Castelli WP, Garrison RJ, Willson PW, Abbot RD, Kannel WB : Incidence of coronary heart disease and lipoprotein cholesterol levels; the Framinghan Study. JAMA 1986; 256: 2835-2838.
13. Nordestgaard BG, Benn M, Schnohr P, Tybjaerg-Hansen A. Nonfasting triglycerides and risk of myocardial infarction, ischemic heart disease, and death in men and women. JAMA. 2007; 298(3):299-308.
14. James WPT. The SCOUT study: risk-benefit profile of sibutramine in overweight high-risk cardiovascular patients. Eur Heart J 2005;7(Suppl. L):L44–L48.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareUNILATERAL INCOMPLETE SUPERFICIAL PALMAR ARCH- A CASE REPORT
English125126Ch. Roja RaniEnglish B. Narasinga RaoEnglish M. Pramila PadminiEnglishSuperficial palmar arch (SPA) is an arterial arcade and a dominant vascular structure of the palm. In hand surgeries like vascular graft applications arterial repairs, free and pedicled flaps, clinicians should be aware of these variations, because in most of the traumatic events and the surgical procedures of the hand the SPA plays an important role. In the present case, the superficial palmar arch is incomplete and there is no communication between the superficial branches of radial and ulnar arteries. The ulnar artery is giving a proper digital and two common palmar digital branches and the superficial branch of radial artery is giving a common palmar digital branch to supply the half of radial side of middle finger and ulnar side of index finger and radialis indicis supplying the radial side of index finger.
Englishanastomosis, arteria princeps pollicis, flexor retinaculum, radialis indicis, superficial palmar archINTRODUCTION
Superficial palmar arch (SPA) is an arterial arcade and a dominant vascular structure of the palm. Superficial palmar arch is localized just deep to palmar aponeurosis and is superficial to digital branches of the median nerve, long flexor tendons of the forearm and lumbricals of the palm. The arch is formed by the superficial terminal branch of the ulnar artery with superficial palmar branch of the radial artery or arteria princeps pollicis (APP) or arteria radialis indicis (ARI) from the radial artery. An incomplete arch exists due to absence of anastomosis between the vessels constituting the arch. Knowledge in variations of vascular pattern in hand surgeries like vascular graft applications, arterial repairs, free and pedicled flaps is important, and clinicians should be aware of these variations. In most of the traumatic events and the surgical procedures of the hand the SPA plays an important role.
MATERIAL AND METHODS
Anatomical variations of the vessels of the palm region are carried out on 20 cadavers (18 male and 02 female during the years 2009-2012.
CASE REPORT
The present variation is observed in an adult male cadaver during routine dissection in the Department of Anatomy, MIMS, and Vizianagaram. In the present case, there is a unilateral variation of superficial palmar arch seen in the left hand. There is no anastomosis between the superficial branches of Radial artery & Ulnar artery in the left hand. The superficial branch of ulnar artery entered the palm superficial to flexor retinaculum and divide into two common and one proper palmar digital braches supplying the ulnar side of middle & radial side of ring finger, ulnar side of ring & radial side of little finger and proper branch supplying ulnar side of little finger. The superficial branch of radial artery entered the hand deep to thenar muscles and dividing into two common palmar digital braches and one proper palmar digital branch supplying the adjacent sides of thumb & index finger, index and middle finger and proper palmar digital branch supplying radial side of the thumb (fig.1). In the right hand the SPA is having a normal course.
DISCUSSION
The superficial arteries of the hand formed several diversified patterns that permitted into welldefined categories. According to Coleman’1 (1961) classification, in type A: Both superficial palmar branches of UA and RA take part in supplying the palm and fingers, but in doing so fail to anastomose and seen in 3.6% of cases. In the present case also there is a similar observation. Ikeda et al. conducted stereoscopic arteriography of 220 cadaver hands and reported complete SPA in 96.4% of cases and 3.6% as incomplete arch. Gellman et al2 .2001 reported 84.4% of cases as complete SPA and 15.5% of cases as incomplete SPA. Al Turk and Metcalf 3 (1984) showed complete SPA in 84% of cases and incomplete in 16% using Doppler flow meter. Harvesting RA for use as arterial by-pass conduits needs to look specifically for variation in collateral circulation like presence of incomplete SPA (Ruengsakulrach P 4 2001).
CONCLUSION
Patients with coronary artery disease should be screened before RA harvesting to confirm the presence of viable collateral circulation. Currently the methods of assessing hand circulation include the modified Allen test, Doppler ultrasonography, photoplethysmography. Doppler study is a useful tool in preoperative screening for RA harvesting for myocardial revascularization (Pola P5 1996)
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Authors acknowledge the immense help received from the scholars whose articles are cited and included in references of this manuscript. The authors are also grateful to authors / editors / publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1626http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16261. Coleman SS, Anson BJ. Arterial patterns in the hand based upon a study of 650 specimens. Surg Gynecol Obstet. 1961; 113: 409–424.
2. Gellman H, Botte MJ, Shankwiler J, Gelberman RH. Arterial patterns of the deep and superficial palmar arches. Clin Orthop Relat Res. 2001; 383: 41–46.
3. Al-Turk M, Metcalf WK. A study of the superficial palmar arteries using the Doppler Ultrasonic Flowmeter. J Anat. 1984; 138: 27– 32.
4. Ruengsakulrach P, Brooks M, Hare DL, Gordon I, Buxton BF. Preoperative assessment of hand circulation by means of Doppler ultrasonography and the modified Allen test. J Thorac Cardiovasc Surg. 2001; 121: 526–531.
5. Pola P, Serricchio M, Flore R, Manasse E, Favuzzi A, Possati GF. Safe removal of the radial artery for myocardial revascularization: a Doppler study to prevent ischemic complications to the hand. J Thorac Cardiovasc Surg. 1996; 112: 737–744.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareDETERMINATION OF AGE BY STUDY OF SKULL SUTURES
English127133Pragnesh ParmarEnglish Gunvanti B. RathodEnglishObjectives: The objectives of this study are to determine the age by study of skull sutures and comparing the age with standard data mentioned in different textbooks and previous studies. Material and Method: Present study based on closure of skull sutures among 220 cases between age group of 15 - 70 years with age interval of 5 years and 20 cases from each age group were studied, who were exposed to digital X-ray of skull for closure of suture ecto-cranially for age estimation. The closure of sagittal, coronal, lambdoid, parieto-mastoid, parieto-temporal (squamous) and baso-occiput with baso-sphenoid sutures were studied and compared with standard data mentioned in different textbooks and previous studies. Age of each individual studied was confirmed from birth certificate, service record, driving license, passport, ration card or voter’s card. Result: Each suture was found to close at particular age group. Suture closure occurred for sagittal, lambdoid, coronal, parieto-mastoid, parieto-temporal and baso-occiput with baso-sphenoid at age group of 50-60 years, 45-55 years, 50-60 years, 55-70 years, 60-70 years and 18-25 years respectively. Conclusion: Age of closure of sagittal, coronal, lambdoid, parieto-mastoid, parieto-temporal and baso-occiput with baso-sphenoid suture was matching with standard data given in most of the textbooks and other studies. Sutures closure occurred from their endo-cranial to ecto-cranial aspects. Closure of skull sutures occurred earlier in male than in females. The most successful estimate was done from sagittal suture, next lambdoid suture and then coronal suture.
EnglishSkull sutures, Age estimation, Sagittal suture, Coronal suture, Lambdoid suture.INTRODUCTION
Age estimation, either in living, dead or human remains, is a complex problem in medical justice in both civil and criminal matters such as identification, senior citizen concession, retirement benefits, competency as witness, attainment of majority, marriage, impotency, sterility, consent, juvenile offender, kidnapping, rape etc. In general, age estimation is done by team of forensic expert and radiologist. If proper opinion regarding the age is not given then injustice may occur to the patient. Age estimation by means of closure of skull sutures is a very important tool to solve above mentioned cases. [1] Age determination is a very difficult task as the age advances, with conventional methods. In adulthood and old age, opinion is given in the form of age range instead of any particular age. As the age advances, this range becomes wide. In order to decrease this wide age range, combined study of physical examination along with closure of skull sutures should be done. Other factors also affect the age like nutritional, hereditary, racial, endocrine etc. Epiphyses of bones unite and sutures of skull close at a particular age for a given population. Determination of age from skull sutures has great medico legal importance as it is the most reliable evidence for estimating the age of person. [2]
MATERIAL AND METHODS
In this study, 220 cases (male and female both), between age group of 15 - 70 years with age interval of 5 years and 20 cases from each age group were studied who were exposed to digital X-ray of skull both antero-posterior and lateral view for closure of suture ecto-cranially. Age of each individual studied was confirmed from birth certificate, service record, driving license, passport, ration card or voter’s card and compared with radiological findings for accuracy. In this study, we considered only complete union of the sagittal, coronal, lambdoid, parieto-mastoid, parieto-temporal (squamous) and baso-occiput with baso-sphenoid sutures instead of taking into account other scoring system of suture closure and compared with standard data mentioned in different text books and previous studies.
OBSERVATION
In our study, age of earliest union for sagittal, lambdoid, coronal, parieto-mastoid, parietotemporal and baso-occiput with baso-sphenoid suture was 46 years, 38 years, 46 years, 43 years, 54 years and 17 years respectively and age group for sagittal, lambdoid, coronal, parieto-mastoid, parieto-temporal and baso-occiput with basosphenoid suture was 50-60 years, 45-55 years, 50- 60 years, 55-70 years, 60-70 years and 18-25 years respectively as per Table – 1. Different sutures closure in different age groups were given in Table – 2. Comparison of time of closure of sagittal suture was given in Table – 3. [2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13] Comparison of time of closure of lambdoid suture was given in Table – 4. [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 14, 15] Comparison of time of closure of coronal suture was given in Table – 5. [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 14, 15, 16] Comparison of time of closure of parieto-mastoid suture was given in Table – 6. [1, 2, 6, 14, 15] Comparison of time of closure of parieto-temporal (squamous) suture was given in Table – 7. [1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 14, 15] Comparison of time of closure of baso-occiput with baso-spheoid suture was given in Table – 8. [2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 17, 18]
DISCUSSION
Identification means determination of individuality of a person. Study of closure of skull sutures is a very important tool for age estimation in adult. The most commonly studied aspect of cranial sutures is the degree of their obliterations as an indicator of age. Suture closure scoring system as per Buikstra and Ubelaker [19] was given in Table – 9. Meindl and Lovejoy scoring system (1985) [20] was given in Table – 10. Acsadi and Nemeskeri scoring system (1970) [21] and Perizonius (1984) [22] scoring system was given in Table – 11. In our study, we considered only complete union of sutures instead of taking into account other scoring system of suture closure. Observations of cranial suture closure were first observed as far back as the 1st century in the work of Hippocrates, but were not utilized as an ‘identification tool’ with relation to age until a much later date. [11, 12, 13] Vesalius and his pupil Fallopius were credited for the first noting the apparent progression of suture obliteration with age in 1542. [11, 12, 23, 24, 25, 26] Despite some early descriptions of the variability of cranial suture closure, scientific studies addressing its relationship with age have been published in great number from the 19th century to present [10]. This continued popularity has survived not due to its validity but rather the idea that, if it has been studied for so long, surely there has to be something to it, and thus it becomes a traditional research obsession. [26]
CONCLUSION
Age of closure of sagittal, coronal, lambdoid, parieto-mastoid, parieto-temporal and basoocciput with baso-sphenoid suture was matching with standard data given in most of the textbooks and other studies. Sutures closure occurred from their endo-cranial to ecto-cranial aspects. Closure of skull sutures occurred earlier in male than in females. The most successful estimate was done from sagittal suture, next lambdoid suture and then coronal suture. Studies of the ecto-cranial suture closure have the potential to underestimate age and to overcome this, study of both endo-cranial and ecto-cranial suture closure should be done.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Authors acknowledge the immense help received from the scholars whose articles are cited and included in references of this manuscript. The authors are also grateful to authors / editors /publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1627http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16271. Pradeep et al, Age estimation in old individuals by CT scan of skull, Journal of Indian Academy of Forensic Medicine, 2004, 26(1): 10-13.
2. Reddy K.S.N., The essentials of Forensic Medicine and Toxicology, 26th edition, Medical Book Company, 2007, Page 62-70.
3. Dikshit P.C., Textbook of Forensic Medicine and Toxicology, 1st edition, Peepee publishers, 2007, Page 55-60.
4. Nandy A., Principles of Forensic Medicine, 2 nd edition, New Central Book Agency, 2001, Page 78-80.
5. Mukherjee J.B., Forensic Medicine and Toxicology, 4th edition, Academic publishers, 2011, Page 141-142.
6. Karmakar R.N., Forensic Medicine and Toxicology: Oral, Practical and M.C.Q., 3rd edition, Academic Publishers, 2010, Page 13.
7. Pillay VV, Textbook of Forensic Medicine and Toxicology, 15th edition, Paras Medical Publisher, 2008, Page 77.
8. Vij K., Textbook of Forensic Medicine and Toxicology, 5th edition, Elsevier, 2011, Page 42-43.
9. Dwight T., The closure of the sutures as a sign of age, Boston Medical surgery Journal, 1890, 122: 389-392.
10. Parsons FG and Box CR, The relation of cranial sutures to age, Journal of the Royal Anthropology Institute, 1905, 35: 308.
11. Todd TW and Lyon DW, Endo-cranial suture closure, its progress and age relationship, Part I, American Journal of Physical Anthropology, 1924, 7: 325-384.
12. Todd TW and Lyon DW, Cranial suture closure, its progress and age relationship, Part II, American Journal of Physical Anthropology, 1925, 8: 23-25.
13. Mc Kern TW and Steward TD, Skeletal age changes in young American males, analysed from the stand point of identification, Headquarter QM. Res and Dev Command, Natick, MA, 1957.
14. Krogman, The Human skeletal in Forensic Medicine, 1st edition, Charles C. Thomas, 1962, Page 18-71, 76-89, 92-111.
15. Parikh C.K., Textbook of Medical Jurisprudence and Toxicology, 5th edition, CBS Publishers, 1990, Page 39-50.
16. Ramachandran C, Skeletal anatomy: Medicolegal radiological age determination, 1st edition, Paras Medical Publishers, 2003, Page 15-31, 79-87, 92-96.
17. David Dolinak, Evan W Matshes, Emma O Lew, Forensic Pathology: Principles and Practice, Elsevier, 2005, Page 585 – 586.
18. Pekka Saukko, Bernard Knight, Knight’s Forensic Pathology, 3rd edition, Arnold, 2004, Page 120-121.
19. Buikstra J, Ubelaker DH, Standards for Data Collection from Human Skeletal Remains, Fayetteville, AR: Arkansas Archaeological Survey, 1994.
20. Meindl, Richard S. And C. Own Lovejoy, Ecto-cranial suture closure: a revised method for the determination of skeletal age at death based on the lateral-anterior sutures, American Journal of Physical Anthropology, 1985, 68(1): 57-66.
21. Acsadi G.Y. and J. Nemeskeri, History of human lifespan and mortality, Budapest, Akademiai Kiado, 1970.
22. Perizonius W.R.K., Closing and non closing sutures in 256 crania of known age and sex from Amsterdam (A.D. 1883-1909), Journal of Human Evolution, 1984, 13: 201-216.
23. Ashley-Montagu M.F., Ageing of the skull, American Journal of Physical Anthropology, 1938, 23(3): 355-375.
24. Singer R., Estimation of age from cranial suture closure: Report on its unreliability, Journal of Forensic Medicine, 1953, 1: 52-59.
25. Masset C., Age estimation on the basis of cranial sutures in age markers in human skeleton, 1st edition, Springfield III, Charles C. Thomas, 1989, Page 71-103.
26. Hershkovitz et al., Why do we fail in ageing the skull from the sagittal suture? American Journal of Physical Anthropology, 1997, 103: 393-399
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareRATE PRESSURE PRODUCT - A DIAGNOSTIC TOOL IN DETERMINING THE CARDIOVASCULAR RISK IN POSTMENOPAUSAL WOMEN
English134138Sangeeta NagpalEnglish Kalpana GuptaEnglish Jitendra AhujaEnglishObjective: Rate pressure product (RPP) is an indirect measure of Myocardial oxygen consumption (MVO2).It increases progressively with exercise and the RPP at peak of exercise is Peak rate pressure product (PRPP). The low value of PRPP suggests significant compromise of coronary perfusion. In the present study effect of exercise on RPP of Pre menopausal women and Post menopausal women were compared. Research Design and Methods: The study was conducted on a total of 50 healthy volunteer women. They were subjected to treadmill exercise test and baseline and maximum RPP was calculated. Results: The RPP in premenopausal women increased significantly from 10.83 ± 2.11 to 28.98 ± 2.93 mm of Hg beats / min x 10-3 during exercise and in postmenopausal from 12.52 ± 2.69 to 28.03 ± 4.14. The percentage increase in RPP was significantly more in Premenopausal women (63%) as compared to postmenopausal women (55%). Conclusions: It can be concluded that Rate pressure product reaches the critical value before the symptoms appear and the percentage increase in Rate pressure product was less in postmenopausal women. The results also suggest that the measurement of Peak rate pressure product in response to exercise can detect Coronary Artery Disease (CAD) even before the appearance of clinical signs and symptoms in postmenopausal women and thus can be used as a diagnostic tool.
EnglishINTRODUCTION
Menopause is a period used to express the permanent cessation of the prime function of the human ovaries, the ripening and release of ova and the release of hormones that cause both the creation of the uterine lining and the subsequent shedding of the uterine lining. Menopause signals the end of the fertile phase of a woman's life. Menopause has a wide starting range, but can usually be expected in the age range of 42–58(1). Menopause is associated with increased risk of Coronary Artery Disease (CAD) due to loss of cardio protective effect of estrogen. Estrogen deficient state affects myocardial efficiency by enhancing cardiovascular response to mental stress, by changing lipid profile, decreasing vascular reactivity (2) and by increasing homocysteine levels (3). Moreover there is accelerated cell death in the aging myocardium leading to depletion of functional myocytes that decreases the contractile performance (4) Myocardial oxygen consumption (MVO2) is a good indicator of the response of the coronary circulation to increased oxygen demand. Coronary blood flow (CBF) increases in direct proportion to the myocardial oxygen requirements. Thus the determinants of MVO2 are also the determinants of CBF (5). Direct measurement of MVO2 is difficult in routine clinical practice but it can be easily measured indirect methods like stroke work, Fick’s principle ,the tension time index and rate pressure product (RPP) (6) RPP is the product of heart rate and systolic blood pressure. It reflects the work of the heart and correlates well with MVO2 .It is calculated as [RPP = Heart rate (HR) x Systolic blood pressure (SBP) / 1000].The value is divided by 1000 to make the number more manageable. (7). It increases with the increase of stress or work load on the heart. It is a simple non invasive easily measurable index, which defines the response of coronary circulation to myocardial metabolic demand. It is a good index of MVO2in patients with ischemic heart disease (8). It has been shown that in any particular patient with CAD, the onset of angina appears at a constant RPP. Most patients would complaint of some pain at a constant RPP of 20,000. (9) Rate pressure product is also called as Robinson index (10). The internal myocardial work performed is represented by RPP and external myocardial work performed is generally expressed as stages of exercise. Many comparative studies have been done to know the influence of hormones on hemodynamic parameters in postmenopausal women but there are few reports on the effect of exercise on RPP in postmenopausal women. Hence this study was designed to evaluate the effect of exercise on RPP in postmenopausal women and determine the importance of RPP in the diagnosis and the prevention of CAD in postmenopausal women. MATERIAL AND METHODS The present study was done to access the cardiovascular performance in postmenopausal women by measuring various hemodynamic parameters like Heart rate, Systolic blood pressure and Rate pressure product. The study was conducted in 50 volunteer women. They were divided into two groups. The Group A consisted of 25 healthy postmenopausal women with no systemic disorder and Group B consisted of 25 postmenopausal women with and no systemic disorder .the study protocol was approved by the Institutional ethics committee. Written informed consent was taken from all the volunteers before enrollment. The study included recording of anthropometric parameters like age, height and weight. All the subjects were first thoroughly examined and those having systemic disease were excluded. The baseline heart rate, systolic blood pressure and ECG were recorded. SBP was recorded by auscultatory method. .Baseline RPP was calculated. RPP, which is the product of systolic blood pressure and heart rate, was computed as (7): RPP = SBP in mm Hg x HR beats /min x 10-3 Exercise stress test was performed on Treadmill, which is the most commonly used dynamic exercise device for this test. The subject was subjected to graded exercise. The treadmill is started at a relatively slow speed. The treadmill speed (km/hr) and its grade of slope (%) or inclination are increased every three minutes according to a preprogrammed protocol. Bruce protocol is the commonest protocol used. The protocol dictates the precise speed and slope of treadmill. According to this, each three minute interval is called as a stage. The treadmill is set with the stage I, speed (2.74km/hr) and grade of slope (10%) and subject commences the test. At the appropriate times during the test, the speed and slope of treadmill are adjusted. So after 3 minutes, the speed is adjusted to 4.02km/hr and slope to 12%. After 6 minutes, the speed is adjusted to 5.47km/hr and slope to 14%. The subject was made to run on a treadmill till exhaustion. Treadmill exercise variables of HR, SBP and ECG were determined. The ECG was constantly displayed on the monitor. It was also recorded on paper at one minute interval. The patient’s blood pressure was recorded during second minute of each stage. The maximum RPP was calculated. The maximum RPP at maximum exercise is called as Peak RPP (PRPP). The exercise test is said to be maximal when the subject appears to give true maximal effort i.e. Effort done to the point of body exhaustion or when other clinical end points are reached. The exercise stress test was terminated in the subjects if the target heart rate was achieved or they complained of fatigue. Exercise was also discontinued if there were abnormal changes like decrease in SBP of 10mm Hg along with evidence of ischemia, abnormal ECG pattern like ST segment displacement, appearance of arrhythmias, bundle branch block or if subject complains of chest pain.
Statistical analysis
Data was represented as mean and standard deviation (SD).Analysis was done using Student’s paired t-test and Wilcoxon Signed Ranks Test. PvalueEnglishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1628http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16281. Sekarbabu Hariram, Sowmya S, Hamsalatha P, Gayathri G, Priyadarsini C, Thiripurasundari M, Saranya, Vivekanand P .Screening the Clinical Parameters in Menopause Women. Research Journal of Pharmaceutical, Biological and Chemical Sciences. July – September 2011; 2:1065.
2. Ariyo AA, Villablanca AC. Can HRT, designerestrogens and phytoestrogens reduce cardiovascular risk markers after menopause? Postgraduate Medicine: Estrogens and Lipids2002; 111: 23–30.
3. Kamellian R.Dimitrova, Kerry DeGroot, Adam K. Myers, Young D. Kim Estrogen and homocysteine. Cardiovascular research 2002; 53: 577-588
4. Torella D, Rota M, Nurzynska D et al. Cardiac stem cell and myocyte aging, heart failure, and insulin-like growth factor-1 overexpression CircRes 2004; 94: 514–524.
5. John Ross, Jr. Cardiovascular system. In: Best and Taylor’s physiological basis of medical practice. West JB(Ed).12th edition. New Delhi: B.I .Waverly Pvt. Ltd; 1990 p. 265.
6. Sarnoff SJ, Braunwald E. Hemodynamic determinants of oxygen consumption of heart with special reference to the tension-time index .Am J Physiol 1958; 192: 148-156.
7. Navalta JW, Sedlock DA, Park K-S. Physiological responses to downhill walking in older and younger individuals. Journal of exercise physiology 2004;7(6):45-51
8. Zargar JA, Naqash IA, Gurcoo SA, Mehraj-UdDin. Comparative evaluation of the effect of metoprolol and esmolol on rate pressure product and ECG changes during laryngoscope and endotracheal intubation in controlled hypertensive patients. Indian J Anaesth 2002; 46: 365-368.
9. Robinson B F. Relation of heart rate and systolic blood pressure at the onset of pain in angina pectoris. Circulation 1967; 35:1073- 1083
10. Siegelova J, Fier B, Duek J, Placheta Z, Cornelissen G, Halberg F.Circadian variability of rate pressure product in essential hypertension with enalpril therapy. Scripta Medica (Brno) 2000; 72:67-75.
11. Ellestad MH. Stress testing.4th edition. New Delhi: Jaypee Bothers; 1996 p. 17.
12. Ellestad MH. Stress testing.4th edition. New Delhi: Jaypee Bothers; 1996 p. 379.
13. Sussman MS, Anversa P.Myocardial aging and senescence. Ann Rev Physiol 2004; 66:29-47
14. Chaitman BR .Exercise stress testing. In: Heart disease: A Textbook of Cardiovascular Medicine. Braunwald E, Zipes DP, Libby P (eds).6th ed.Philadelphia: WB Saunders; 1997 p.153-157.
15. Fletcher GF, Cantwell JD, Watt EW. Oxygen consumption and hemodynamic response pf exercises used in training of patients with recent myocardial infarction. Circulation 1979; 60:140-144.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareCOMPARATIVE ANALYSIS OF COMMUNICABLE AND NON COMMUNICABLE DISEASES IN RURAL AND URBAN LOCALITIES OF TIRUPATI IN INDIA
English139142C. Kumaraswamy NaiduEnglish Y. SuneethaEnglish B. V. Sai PrasadEnglishCommunicable diseases (CD) are the main cause of death around the world for years followed by non-communicable diseases (NCD) causing major problems in industrialized countries. Among all NCDs and CDs, Cancers (NCD) and Tuberculosis (CD) constitute the major cause of morbidity and mortality in developing countries, including India. The specific aim of this study is to quantify the prevalence of communicable (Tuberculosis) and non communicable diseases (Cancers) in urban and rural areas of Tirupati and to analyze the relative epidemic using a comparable framework. The data was analyzed statistically using Chi-Square test and Odds ratio with 95% confidence interval. All analyses were performed with SPSS version 13 software. Compared to rural areas, people from Urban areas of Tirupati (52.1% Vs 47.9%) has increased risk of NCDs: patients with Breast Cancer (33% ), Cervical Cancer (35%), Oral Cancer (8.9%), Prostrate Cancer (6.3%), Skin Cancer (4%) and Other Cancers (12.9%) like Bladder, Colon, Lung, Rectal, Stomach, Uterine. There was a significant urban-rural difference in having Tuberculosis in the years 2010 to 2011 (71.4% vs 28.6%, respectively; P < 0.001) and there was a significant urban-rural difference in Communicable and non communicable diseases in the years 2010-2011(54.1% vs 45.9%, respectively; P = 0.03). These finding suggests that there is an increasing prevalence of Communicable and non communicable diseases in Tirupati as a result of lifestyle changes and urbanization. These are the challenges that are to be tackled in new millennium.
EnglishCommunicable diseases, Non-communicable diseases, Rural, UrbanINTRODUCTION
India is one of the famous countries around the world for cultural activities. In India, one of the major pilgrimage cities is Tirupati which is located at the foothills of Eastern Ghats, Andhra Pradesh. Being a major pilgrimage, millions of people visit Tirupati daily. Being a famous tourist spot in Andhra Pradesh, Tirupati is prone to disease exposure. Diseases can be broadly categorized into two types: Communicable and Non Communicable. Communicable diseases (CD) were the main cause of death around the world for years followed by non-communicable diseases (NCD) causing major problems in industrialized countries. The spread of non-communicable diseases (NCDs) principally heart disease, stroke, diabetes, cancers, and chronic respiratory disease represents a global crisis; in almost all countries and in all income groups, men, women, will account for 80% of the global burden of disease, causing seven out of every ten deaths in developing nations, compared with less than half today [1] .Globally, around 57 million people died and children are at risk of these diseases [2]. Epidemics of non-communicable diseases (NCD) are presently emerging or accelerating in most developing countries [3]. In 2008, 33 million (58%) of the deaths were due to chronic (non-communicable) diseases (mainly cardiovascular disease, diabetes, cancer, and chronic respiratory diseases) [4]. In 2004, 4.8 million (59.4 percent) of the estimated 8.1 million Indian deaths were due to NCDs [5]. Communicable diseases (CDs) like tuberculosis (TB), cholera, meningitis, hepatitis, malaria, dengue, yellow fever, AIDS, Ebola, SARS and others in parallel also continue to be the major cause of mortality in developing countries [6]. Even Asian countries like India have a major public health challenge of growing magnitude of non communicable and communicable diseases in the present century. In India, among all NCDs and CDs, Cancers (NCD) [7] and Tuberculosis (CD) [8] constitute the major cause of morbidity and mortality. In this paper, we use the term chronic non-communicable disease to refer to major chronic disorder such as Cancer and communicable disease to refer Tuberculosis; other disorders are not covered in this paper. The specific aim of this study is to estimate and compare the relative incidence of communicable and non communicable diseases in Urban and Rural areas of Tirupati. A comparison was made of the age-specific incidence rates in Tirupati region at 2-year intervals from 2010 to 2011. MATERIALS AND METHODS Study site This study was conducted based on data from Bharath, Diagnostic Center, Tirupati. All the newly diagnosed cases in the years 2010 and 2011 were included as the study cases. Among 3000 patients’ biopsy data in the lab, only cases having Cancers (CD) and Tuberculosis (NCD) were included in this study. The data was a clinical examination data containing Biopsy number, Disease type, age, sex, Locality, Height, Mark section, cut section, Histopathological examination and Microscopic examination. Among these variables only disease type, age, sex, locality was considered for the study. The reference date for recording information was the date of diagnosis for cases. Statistical Methods The data was analyzed statistically using ChiSquare test and Odds ratio with 95% confidence interval. All analyses were performed with SPSS version 13 software.
RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
Non communicable diseases Among the various NCDs like cardiovascular diseases, Diabetes and Cancers, only cancers were used for this study. Cancers that are used in the study includes Breast, Cervical, Colon, Bladder, Lung, Oral, Prostrate, Rectal, Skin, Uterine and Stomach Cancer. Among 3000 patients biopsied in the year 2010 to 2011, 303 patients were seen affected with these cancers. Compared to rural areas ( i.e., 10 villages surrounding Tirupati), people from Urban areas of Tirupati (i.e., People living in Tirupati town) (52.1% Vs 47.9%) has increased risk of NCDs: patients with Breast Cancer (33% ), Cervical Cancer (35%), Oral Cancer (8.9%), Prostrate Cancer (6.3%), Skin Cancer (4%) and Other Cancers (12.9%) like Bladder, Colon, Lung, Rectal, Stomach, Uterine ( P=0.07, Table 1). The prevalence of the non communicable diseases in urban and rural areas is diagrammatically represented in the chart (Chart 1) given below.
CONCLUSION
Our findings suggest that the observed differences between urban and rural women could be substantially reduced by changing the lifestyle or proper detection in the early stages. It is also important to educate the public and health care professionals in rural and urban areas in order to promote early detection. Overall, our study concludes that people residential of Tirupati are more exposed to both communicable and non communicable diseases compared to those from 10 villages surrounding Tirupati.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
C. Kumaraswamy Naidu is grateful to UGC, New Delhi for providing financial help under UGCRFSMS scheme. Ethical Approval The study has ethics approval from Sri Venkateswara Medical College, Tirupati.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1629http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16291. A. Boutayeb, The double burden of communicable and non-communicable diseases in developing countries, Transactions of the Royal Society of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene., 2006, 100, 191.
2. Ala Alwan. Global status report on noncommunicable diseases 2010. World Health Organization, 2011.
3. Murray CJL, Lopez AD. Global Health Statistics: Global Burden of Disease and Injury Series. Volumes I and II. Boston: Harvard School of Public Health, 1996.
4. A. Alwan, D. R. MacLean, L. M. Riley, E. Tursan d’Espaignet, C. D. Mathers, G. A. Stevens, D. Bettcher. Monitoring and surveillance of chronic non-communicable diseases: progress and capacity in high-burden countries. Lancet., 2010, 376: 1861.
5. A. Mahal, A. Karan, M. Engelgau. Existing Evidence on the Economic Impact of NCDs in India and its Limitations. HNP Discussion paper., 2010.
6. World Health Organization. Cholera: the prototype “global” disease. In: Global defence against the infectious disease threat. Geneva: WHO, 2003 (WHO/CDS/2003.15).
7. T. Seth, A. Kotwal, R. Thakur, P. Singh, V. Kochupillai. Common cancers in India: knowledge, attitudes and behaviours of urban slum dwellers in New Delhi. Public Health., 2005, 119: 87.
8. M. S. Pednekar, P. C. Gupta. Prospective study of smoking and tuberculosis in India. Preventive Medicine, 2007, 44: 496.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareANOMALOUS ORIGIN OF HEPATIC ARTERY AND ITS RELEVANCE IN HEPATOBILIARY SURGERIES
English143148Sunita SethyEnglish G. R. NayakEnglish D. AgrawalEnglish B. MohantyEnglish R. BiswalEnglishBackground: Introduction of laparoscopic cholecystectomy, hepatobiliary surgeries and liver transplantations has stimulated a renewed interest in hepatic arterial anatomy. The variant arterial anatomy recognized during routine cadaveric dissection offers great learning potential. This imparts the concept of patient individuality and subsequent individualization of medical and surgical therapies and helps the surgeons for safe surgery and low morbidity. Objective of the study: To report on hepatic artery variations observed in the dissecting room and to find out the different pattern of hepatic arteries by cadaveric dissection. Materials and Methods: Twenty five human cadavers of SCB Medical College were dissected to study the source and pattern of hepatic arterial supply to liver. Results: Twenty four cadavers exhibited typical common hepatic arterial supply from the celiac trunk. Only one female body out of twenty five cadavers had an anomalous origin of common hepatic artery. Common hepatic artery originated from the superior mesenteric artery. Conclusion: Aberrant hepatic vascularisation should be assessed preoperatively to avoid fatal complications in hepatobiliary surgeries.
EnglishHepatic artery, Superior mesenteric artery, Hepatobiliary surgeries.INTRODUCTION
In adults the Common Hepatic Artery (CHA) is intermediate in size between the left gastric and splenic arteries. In fetal and early postnatal life it is the largest branch of the coeliac axis. The hepatic artery gives off right gastric, gastroduodenal and cystic branches as well as direct branches to the bile duct from the right hepatic and sometimes the supraduodenal artery. It may be subdivided into the common hepatic artery, from the coeliac trunk to the origin of the gastroduodenal artery, and the hepatic artery ‘proper', from that point to its bifurcation. It passes anterior to the portal vein and ascends anterior to the epiploic foramen between the layers of the lesser omentum. Within the free border of the lesser omentum the hepatic artery is medial to the common bile duct and anterior to the portal vein. At the porta hepatis it is divided into right and left branches before these run into the parenchyma of the liver. A replaced hepatic artery is a vessel that does not originate from an orthodox position and provides the sole supply to that lobe. Rarely a replaced common hepatic artery arises from the superior mesenteric artery and is identified at surgery by a relatively superficial portal vein (reflecting the absence of a common hepatic artery that would normally cross in front of the vein). More commonly a replaced right hepatic artery or an accessory right hepatic artery arises from the superior mesenteric artery. In this case they run behind the portal vein and bile duct in the lesser omentum and can be identified at surgery by pulsation behind the portal vein. The presence of replaced arteries can be lifesaving in patients with bile duct cancer: because they are away from the bile duct and hence not affected by cancer, making excision of the tumour feasible. Knowledge of these variations is also important in planning the whole and split liver transplantation. (Grays Anatomy-40th edition, Liver, 1169-70). The hepatic arteries may arise from the abdominal aorta, the left gastric or the superior mesenteric arteries (2). The hepatic arterial anatomy is aberrant in almost 33-41% individuals (1, 2, 3, 4). The most common anomalies include, the right hepatic artery arising from superior mesenteric artery (25%) and left hepatic artery arising from the left gastric artery (25%) (4) . Anomalies of the common hepatic artery, usually a branch of the celiac trunk, are relatively uncommon (5). However, Kadir et al., (1991) demonstrated angiographically a 5% incidence of the replaced common hepatic artery (6) whereas Woods and Traverso (1993) found the replaced common hepatic artery, branching off the superior mesenteric artery in 2.5% of the cases (7). An aberrant hepatic artery may cause a potential error in the angiographic diagnosis of traumatic liver hematoma (8). Moreover the existence of aberrant hepatic arteries emphasizes the mode of development of liver during perinatal period (9). Liver transplantation and peripancreatic surgery needs extensive, adequate and clear knowledge of varied blood supply of liver.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
We carefully dissected twenty five cadavers of SCB Medical College Cuttack origin (twenty males and five females), aged between 45-65 years and randomly assigned to medical students for dissection over a period of three years. We took the task of dissection from origin to termination of all the major arteries supplying the liver. To study the variational anatomy of hepatic arterial supply, we decided to follow all the branches of celiac and superior mesenteric arteries. Especially all hepatic vessels were painstakingly dissected from origin to ultimate distribution in the substance of liver. We selected only those bodies, which were properly embalmed and having arteries in good condition. The dissection of arteries were done and then coloured and photographed. The measurement of length and external diameter of arteries were done by sliding Vernier Callipers.
RESULT
After a careful dissection of twenty five cadavers, we analyzed the variation pattern of celiac axis, superior mesenteric artery and the source and distribution of hepatic arteries. Celiac trunk: Except one, all the cadavers exhibited classical (Hepatoleinogastric) pattern of celiac trunk's origin and distribution. In a study of twenty five celiac trunks, the length of celiac trunk varied from 6 to 25mm and the width from 9 to 20 mm. The celiac trunk was constricted at its site of origin from the abdominal aorta. The distance on the aorta between the sites of origin of celiac and superior mesenteric arteries varied from 10 to 15mm. In twenty three cases, splenic artery was the largest branch of celiac trunk, whereas in two cases common hepatic was the largest branch. However left gastric was found as the first and smallest branch of celiac trunk in all cases. Anomalous celiac trunk had only 2 branches [Fig1],[Fig-2] (1)Left gastric artery (2)Splenic artery Hepatic arteries: Five cadavers exhibited three hepatic arteries, i.e., right, left and middle hepatic arteries for the right, left and quadrate lobes of the liver respectively. Twenty cadavers had two hepatic arteries, i.e., right and left. Hepatic arteries had normal celiac origin in twenty four cadavers. One common hepatic artery had a superior mesenteric origin (4%) [Fig-1and2]. The width of the anomalous common hepatic artery (16mm) was relatively wider than that of classical celiac common hepatic artery (12mm). The anomalous common hepatic artery routed to the posterior of the head of the pancreas and, entered the right margin of hepato-duodenal part of lesser omentum, where it was lying medial to the common bile duct and anterior to the portal vein. [Fig-1, Fig-2]. The CHA then gave a branchGastroduodenal artery and continued as the Proper Hepatic artery. The proper hepatic artery was further divided into 2 branches-right and left hepatic artery. The right hepatic artery further gave cystic artery. Cystic artery: In twenty cases the cystic artery was single and arising from the right hepatic artery. The left hepatic artery was found in one case and proper hepatic artery in four cases. Superior mesenteric artery: Except one, all 24 cadavers exhibited normal branching pattern. In one case the Common Hepatic Artery was the 1st branch and middle colic artery arose from the right colic artery [Fig-1, 2 and 3].
DISCUSSION
Aberrant hepatic arterial anatomy occurs in 33- 41% of reported literature (3), (6), (10). The common hepatic artery is usually a branch of the celiac trunk (2). This classical "Michels type -I" pattern with right and left hepatic arteries originating from the common hepatic artery (of celiac origin) occurs in about 55% of the population (7). Although the normal pattern of arterial supply of hepatic parenchyma and biliary tract is well described (11), there is a considerable variation in the relative contribution of normal and abnormal arteries to parenchyma and biliary tree in the presence of anomalies (12),(13). The replaced hepatic arteries (replaced right hepatic and replaced common hepatic arteries) usually do not occupy the same position in the hepatoduodenal ligament as the normally occurring hepatic artery. Those typically lie lateral to the portal vein behind the head of the pancreas and enter the lesser omentum posterolateral to the common bile duct (6), (7). In Michels 200 liver dissections, he found half of the replaced common hepatic arteries (RCHA) actually passed through the pancreatic substance while the other half passed posterior to it. In our case the common hepatic artery never entered the pancreatic tissue. It was routing to posterior of the head of pancreas and first part of the duodenum. Later it had normal course. Another classification method is the one adopted by Michel et.al in 1955 I. standard anatomy : 55 - 61 % II. replaced LHA : 3 - 10 % III. replaced RHA : 8 - 11 % IV. replaced RHA and LHA : 0.5 - 1 % V. accessory LHA from LGA : 8 - 11 % VI. accessory RHA from SMA : 1.5 - 7 % VII. accessory RHA and LHA : 1 % VIII. accessory RHA and LHA and replaced LHA or RHA : 2 - 3 % IX. CHA replaced to SMA : 2 - 4.5 % X. CHA replaced to LGA : ~ 0.5 % XI. Others o CHA separate origin from aorta : ~ 2 % o double hepatic artery§ : 3.7 % o PHA replaced to SMA; GDA origin from aorta : 0.3 % Anomalous CHA seen in our study was similar to Michels, IX type. Moreover the existence of such an arterial variant in patients having liver metastasis carries the risk of misperfusion of intraarterial chemotherapeutic agents (14). The intraarterial chemotherapy technique for isolated, nonresectable liver metastasis achieves complete perfusion of whole liver only in patients with classical arterial anatomy. Patients having variant arterial anatomy need vascular reconstruction prior to intra-arterial chemotherapy or the use of double port catheter pumps, for ideal, uniform perfusion (15). The knowledge of hepatic arterial variations can be useful in the selection of donors for partial hepatic grafts in living related liver transplantation (LRLT) (16). Such anomalies should be ruled out preoperatively (17) by angiography, Axial CT and/or DCEMRI (18). Hepatic arterial anatomy must be defined precisely to ensure optimal donor hepatectomy and graft arterialization (19). Moreover the preoperative knowledge of anomalous vessels is also helpful for modification of surgical approach (20). Arterial anomalies preserved and managed appropriately do not necessarily compromise graft outcome. To our knowledge a unique case of aberrant common hepatic artery (of superior mesenteric origin) with a anomalous celiac trunk, having only two branches-left gastric and splenic artery was found in this study. The persistence of lower half of ventral longitudinal anastomosis between the 10th to 13th splanchnic (vitelline) arterial roots that normally disappear may be the possible embryological explanation for this variability. Such variations may be attributed to the rotation of gut, caudal displacement of abdominal viscera and hemodynamic changes taking place during organogenesis and differentiation (21), (22).
CONCLUSION
In our study we found a variant of celiac trunk, replaced common hepatic artery taking origin from superior mesenteric artery in (4%) of our dissections which is not very uncommon. Vascular injuries are the most lethal technical injuries encountered in laparoscopic cholecystectomy (24). Injury to hepatic blood supply is more common in the presence of aberrant arterial anatomy. Preoperative knowledge of normal and variant arterial anatomy can prompt to take measures to preserve the vessels and avoid fatal injury (25). The aberrant vessels can be identified on visceral angiography, dynamic contrast enhanced magnetic resonance imaging (DCEMRI) and/or spiral CT [18].
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The authors thank all the students of SCB Medical College, Cuttack, Odisha who were assigned to dissection of cadavers for their efforts in data collection and those authors and scholars mentioned in the reference for their enlightening and informative articles, journals and books that helped to draw inferences of the study. The authors are also grateful to authors/editors/publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1630http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16301. Michels NA. Variations in blood supply of liver, gallbladder, stomach, duodenum and pancreas. Year book of the Am Philosophical soc, 1943: 150.
2. Last RJ. Vessels and nerves of the gut. In: Sinnatamby CS, editor. Last's Anatomy: Regional and Applied. 10 th Ed. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone, 1999: 236-238, 254- 6.
3. Kemeny MM, Hogan JM, Goldberg DA et al. Continuous hepatic artery infusion with an implantable pump: problems with hepatic artery anomalies. Surgery. 1986 Apr;99(4):501–504.
4. Rosse C, Gaddum-Rosse P. The gut and its derivatives. In: Hollinshead's textbook of Anatomy. 5` h Ed. Philadelphia: LippincottRaven, 1997: 568-80.
5. Michels NA. Newer anatomy of the liver and its variants blood supply and collateral circulation. Am J Surg 1966; 112: 337-47.
6. Kadir S, Lundell C, Saeed M. Celiac, Superior and inferior mesenteric arteries. In: Kadir S, editor. Atlas of normal and variant angiographic anatomy. Philadelphia: WB Saunders, 1991: 297-308.
7. Woods MS and Traverso LW. Sparing a replaced common hepatic artery during pancreaticoduodenectomy. Am Surg 1993; 59: 719-21.
8. Konstam MA, Novelline RA, Athanasoulis CA. Aberrant hepatic artery: a potential cause for error in the angiographic diagnosis of traumatic liver hematoma. Gastrointest Radiol 1979; 4: 43-5.
9. Severn CB. A morphological study of the development of the human liver (II), establishment of liver parenchyma, extrahepatic ducts and associated venous channels. Am J Anat 1972; 133: 85.
10. Lygidakis NJ, Makuuchi M. Pitfalls and complications in the diagnosis and management of hepatobiliary and pancreatic disease. Thieme Med Inc, 1993: 113, 231.
11. Padbury R, Anatomy AD. In: Toouli J, editor. Surgery of the biliary tract. Edinburgh: Chuchill Livingstone, 1993: 3-19.
12. Makisalo H, Chaib E, Krokos N, Calne R. Hepatic arterial variations and liver related diseases of 100 consecutive donors. Transpl Int 1993; 6: 325-9.
13. Shaw BWJ, Wood RP, Stratta RJ et al. Management of arterial anomalies encountered in split liver transplantation. Transplant Proc 1990; 22: 420-2.
14. Civelek AC, Sitzmann JV, Chin BB et al. Misperfusion of the Liver during hepatic artery infusion chemotherapy. Am J Roentgenol 1993; 160: 865-70.
15. Eid A, Reissman P, Zamir G, Pikarsky AJ. Reconstruction of replaced right hepatic artery, to implant a single-catheter port for intra-arterial hepatic chemotherapy. Am Surg 1998; 64: 261-2.
16. Daly JM, Kemeny N, Oderman P, Botet J. Long term hepatic arterial infusion chemotherapy. Arch Surg 1984; 119: 936- 41.
17. Dooly WC, Cameron JL, Pitt HA et al. Is preoperative angiography useful in patients with periampullary tumors? Ann Surg 1990; 211: 649-55.
18. Muller MF, Meyenberger C, Bertschinger P et al. Pancreatic tumors: Evaluation with endoscopic US, CT and MR imaging. Radiol Soc N Am 1994; 190: 745-51.
19. Takayama T, Makuuchi M, Kawarasaki H, et al. Hepatic transplantation using living donors with aberrant hepatic artery. J Am Coll Surg 1997; 184: 525-8.
20. Volpe CM, Peterson S, Hoover EL, Doerr RJ. Justification for visceral angiography prior to pancreaticoduodenectomy. Am Surg 1988; 64: 758-61
21. Reuter ST, Redman HC. Vascular anatomy. In: Gastrointestinal angiography, 2nd Ed. Philadelphia, London, Toronto: W B Saunders, 1977: 31-65.
22. Arey LB. Developmental Anatomy: A textbook and laboratory manual of embryology. 7 th Ed. Philadelphia: W B Saunders, 1974.
23. Gray’s Anatomy: The Anatomical Basis of Clinical Practice by S Standring, Elsevier Health Sciences, 40th edition, 1169-70.
24. Deziel DJ, Millikan KW, Economou SG, Doolas A, Ko ST, Airan MC. Complications of laparoscopic cholecystectomy: A national survey of 4292 hospitals and an analysis of 77604 cases. Am J Surg 1993; 165: 9-14.
25. Biehl TR, Traverso LW, Hauptmann E, Ryan JA Jr. Preoperative visceral angiography alters intraoperative strategy during the whipple procedure. Am J Surg 1993; 165: 607- 12.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareA CROSS-SECTIONAL STUDY OF AWARENESS ABOUT HEPATITIS B AMONG NURSING STUDENTS OF MIMS COLLEGE AT VIZIANAGARAM, ANDHRA PRADESH
English149155Ujwala U. UkeyEnglish Satyanarayan DashEnglish K. Rama SankaramEnglish N.R. Appajirao NaiduEnglish R.SriVidyaEnglishContext: Hepatitis B is an inflammatory disease of the liver caused by Hepatitis B virus and is a global public health problem. In India the carrier rate of hepatitis B is higher among health care personnel. Nurses are probably the most commonly exposed health care staff exposed to needle prick, injuries and contact with infectious fluids. They are exposed to this risk right from there student career. Objectives: To determine the awareness about HBV, Hepatitis B, its transmission and prevention. Methods: A descriptive cross sectional study was conducted among 119 nursing students with the help of prestructured questionnaire having questions about HBV, Hepatitis B, its transmission and Hepatitis B vaccine. The statistical tools like Z test of difference between two proportions, mean and standard deviation (SD) values were employed. Results: Overall 77% of all the students knew that Hepatitis B is a member of Hepadnavirus family. On an average 81.27% of the students were correct regarding knowledge on Hepatitis B infection. After considering all the statements, answer to transmission of Hepatitis B was observed to be correct in 71.01% of students. Prevention of Hepatitis B by vaccine administration was correctly known to 104 (87.39% of 119) respondents. Conclusions: Majority of the nursing students were aware about Hepatitis B. The knowledge regarding most of the parameters was significantly higher among BSc nursing students as compared to GNM students. It was also observed that there is a lack of knowledge about the hazards of Hepatitis B, its transmission and efficacy of vaccine.
EnglishHepatitis B, Hepatitis B virus, Awareness, Nursing studentsINTRODUCTION
Hepatitis B is a leading cause of chronic hepatitis, cirrhosis and hepatocellular carcinoma.1-4 Hepatitis B previously known as serum hepatitis is an inflammatory disease of the liver caused by Hepatitis B virus (HBV) and is a global public health problem. Nearly two billion people in the world have been acutely infected by HBV and there are nearly 350 million people chronically infected. 1 In South East Asian Region, there are estimated 80 million HBV carriers (about 6% of the total population). 5, 6 HBV is a DNA virus belonging to the virus family Hepadnaviridae. HBV enters the liver via the bloodstream and replication occurs only in the liver tissue. The virus is 42-47 nm in diameter and circulates in the blood in concentrations as high as 108 virions per ml. HBV is transmitted by per cutaneous or mucosal exposure to infected blood or other body fluids through numerous routes: perinatal, mother to child, sexual, needle-sharing, and occupational/health-care-related. 4, 7
India has the intermediate endemicity of Hepatitis B with Hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAg) prevalence between 2% and 10% among the population studied. The number of carriers in India has been estimated to be over 40 millions. 5, 6 In India the carrier rate is higher among health care personnel (10.87%) as compared to the blood donors (6%) and general public (5%). Among healthcare workers seroprevalence is two to four times higher than that of the general population.8 Hepatitis B infections may occur in the health care settings due to lapse in the sterilization technique of instruments or due to the improper hospital waste management because 10 to 20% of health care waste is hazardous which may create a variety of health risks.9 The majority of the infections are subclinical, so approximately 80% of all HBV infections are undiagnosed.4 Among the health care personnel, HBV is transmitted by skin prick with infected, contaminated needles and syringes or through accidental inoculation of minute quantities of blood during surgical, gynecological and dental procedures.6 Nurses are probably the most common health care staff exposed to needle prick injuries and contact with infectious fluids. They are exposed to this risk right from there student career. Hence it is important that nurses as well as nursing students should have a thorough knowledge regarding Hepatitis B to minimize the health care settings acquired infections among them and other health personnel. With this background, the present study was conducted among the nursing students to determine the awareness about HBV, Hepatitis B, its transmission and prevention.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
The study was conducted at the College of Nursing of Maharajah’s Institute of Medical Sciences (MIMS), Nellimarla during July 2012. The type of study was descriptive cross sectional study. All the nursing students ranging from first year to fourth year present in the classrooms of the college in the campus on the day of study were included. Ultimately there were a total of 119 students i.e. 71 from Bachelor of Science (BSc) nursing and 48 from General Nursing Midwifery (GNM) streams. The participants were fully informed about the design and purpose of the study. Anonymity of the participants was maintained throughout the study. The data collection was done with the help of a pre-tested structured questionnaire distributed among these students in the classroom and they were asked to fill the questionnaire. The questionnaire consisted of closed ended questions to assess the knowledge and awareness about HBV and Hepatitis B, its transmission and Hepatitis B vaccine. Data entry was done in Microsoft excel 2007 software. Statistical analysis was done with help of SPSS software. The statistical tools like Z test of difference between two proportions; mean and standard deviation (SD) values were employed. Statistical significance was considered at p values Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1631http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16311. Lee WM Hepatitis B virus infection. N Engl J Med 1997; 337:1733-45.
2. Liaw YF, Chu CM. Hepatitis B virus infection. The Lancet. 2009; 373 (9663):582– 92.
3. Zheng Y, Huang Z, Chen X, Tian Y, Tang J, Zhang Yi et al. Effects of Telbivudine Treatment on the Circulating CD4+ T-Cell Subpopulations in Chronic Hepatitis B Patients. Mediators of Inflammation. 2012; 2012: 789859.
4. Saini R, Saini S, Sugandha RS. Knowledge and awareness of Hepatitis B infection amongst the students of Rural Dental College, Maharashtra, India. Ann Nigerian Med. 2010; 4:18-20.
5. World Health Organization, Country Office for India, Core Programme Clusters, Family and community health, Hepatitis B, http://www.whoindia.org/en/section6%5Csect ion8.htm (Accessed on 24 July 2012).
6. Singh A, Jain S. Prevention of Hepatitis B; knowledge and practices among Medical students. Healthline 2011; 2 (2):8-11.
7. Shepard CW, Simard EP, Finelli L, Fiore AE, Bell BP. Hepatitis B virus infection: epidemiology and vaccination. Epidemiol Rev 2006;28:112-25.
8. Singhal V, Bora D, Singh S. Hepatitis B in health care workers: Indian Scenario. J Lab Physicians.2009; 1:41–8.
9. Taneja N, Biswal M .Safe disposal of infectious waste, Indian perspective Journal of Hospital Infection. 2006; 62(4): 525-26.
10. Maroof KA, Bansal R, Parashar P, Sartaj A. Do the medical, dental and nursing students of first year know about hepatitis B A study from a university of North India. J Pak Med Assoc. 2012; 62(1):25-7.
11. Al-Jabri AA, Al-Adawi S, Al-Abri JH, AlDhahry SH. Awareness of hepatitis B virus among undergraduate medical and nonmedical students; Saudi Med J; 2004;25(4):484-7.
12. Maung M, Win KK, Oo KM, Htwe T. Hepatitis B surface antigen carriage in students of Institute of Nursing, Yangon. Mynammar Journal of Current Medical Practice; 2003; 7(2):75-8.
13. Misra B, Panda C, Das HS, Nayak KC, Singh SP. Study on awareness about Hepatitis B viral infection in coastal Eastern India. Hep B Annual 2009;6:19-28.
14. Cheung J, Lee TK, Teh CZ, Wang CY, Kwan WC, Yoshida EM. Cross-sectional study of hepatitis B awareness among Chinese and Southeast Asian Canadians in the VancouverRichmond community. Can J Gastroenterol 2005;19:245-9.
15. Wai CT, Mak B, Chua W, Tan MH, Ng S, Cheok A, et al. Misperceptions among patients with chronic hepatitis B in Singapore. World J Gastroenterol 2005;11:5002-5.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareBODY SENSOR NETWORK SECURITY USING CRYPTOGRAPHY APPROACH
English156161Umasankar K.English Vetrivendan R.EnglishA body sensor network (BSN), is a network of sensors de-ployed on a person’s body, usually for health care monitoring. Since the sensors collect personal medical data, security and privacy are important components in a body sensor network. At the same time, the collected data has to readily available in the event of an emergency. In this paper, we present IBE-Lite, a lightweight identity-based encryption suitable for sensors, and developed protocols based on IBE-Lite for a BSN.
EnglishSecurity, Body Sensor Networks, Identity-based cryptographyINTRODUCTION
Applying wireless sensors toward health care monitoring allows for new ways to provide quality health care to pa-tents. A diverse array of specialized sensors can be de-ployed to monitor, for instance, at-risk patients with history of heart attacks, or senior citizens living independently at home. These sensors provide continuous, long term monitoring in an unobtrusive manner, allowing doctors to diagnose problems more effectively. A body sensor network, or BSN, is a network of sensors deployed on a person’s body to collect physiological information. In this paper, we focus on a BSN deployed for medical monitoring. We term the person wearing the BSN as the Permission to make digital or hard copies of all or part of this work for personal or classroom use is granted without fee provided that copies are not made or distributed for profit or commercial advantage and that copies bear this notice and the full citation on the first page. To copy otherwise, to republish, to post on servers or to redistribute to lists, requires prior specific permission and/or a fee. The term “doctor” is used loosely, and refers to any person wanting to access the data.
Motivating Example
Privacy and security for a BSN is important since the data collected is directly associated with a particular patient. At the same time, the data must be easily accessible to relevant personal in the event of an emergency. The following scenarios serve to better illustrate such concerns. 1. Alice wears a BSN that monitors her EKG data when she is working out. One day, Alice suddenly falls un-conscious and is sent to the emergency room. The data collected by the BSN should be stored in a public place and made easily accessible in an emergency. 2. After the incident, Alice instructs her BSN to collect some additional data. Alice would like to restrict this information to only physicians in an ER. However, Al-ice cannot predict which doctor or hospital will treat her. Alice may not be physically competent to authenticate anybody when she is admitted to a hospital. ABSN security scheme should be able to tolerate this form of ambiguity. 3. Furthermore, due to privacy reasons, a doctor requiring two days worth of data prior to Alice’s illness should only be able to obtain data collected within those two days. However, since Alice does not know when she might have a relapse, a BSN should be able to limit access to the collected data, even when the data is stored in a public space. 4. Alice’s family and friends are worried about her condition. To allay their concerns, Alice would like some other family members to be able to have partial access to her BSN data. Since the data collected by the BSNbelongs to Alice, a security scheme should be flexible Enough to allow Alice to easily add additional access permissions to people she chooses.
BSN security requirements
While a complete BSN system will have many different components, a crucial factor is that any security design must be lightweight enough to be executed by a sensor in a BSNsince a sensor can be lost or stolen, leaving the data stored within the sensor exposed. From the scenario presented, we derive the following security and privacy requirements for a BSN. 1. Protect patient privacy from the storage site. Since the data is stored on a third party storage site, we cannot trust the storage site with the data. We assume an honest-but-curious storage site that will not maliciously delete the data, but may attempt to learn the contents of a patient’s data. 2. Tolerate compromised BSN sensors. The BSN sensors may be misplaced or stolen, and a compromised BSNsensor should not allow an adversary from obtaining the patient’s data. 3. Prevent unauthorized access to information. This includes a doctor with permissions to access some data and not others. We assume that a doctor may attempt to obtain additional data about a patient beyond what was authorized. Since storage site is not trusted, access control can only be performed by the CA. 4. Flexibility in granting permissions. The patient may decide to allow different people to access the BSN data, and the BSN should be able to generate keys on-the-fly without additional interaction with the CA.
Identity-based encryption
Our solutions are based on a type of cryptographic primitive known as identity-based encryption (IBE). After an initial setup phase, IBE allows a public key to be generated from an arbitrary string. The corresponding secret key can be derived separately by a trusted party. For example, Al-ice may want to encrypt a message for the doctor in charge on Monday. Alice can independently generated a public key using the strings “Monday” and “doctor” to encrypt her data without further contact with the trusted party. To decrypt the message, a doctor will have to convince the trusted party that he is a doctor in charge on Monday. The same doctor working on Tuesday cannot decrypt messages encrypted using the string “Tuesday” and “doctor” even if he knows the secret key from Monday. The simple example cannot be easily accomplished without using IBE. Alice can try to generate many public/secret key pairs, one for each occasion. However, Alice will have to store the secret key created with the trusted party each time a new public/secret key pair is generated. Otherwise, the trusted party cannot derive the secret key on its own. This is inefficient. Another possible alternative is for Alice to include some instructions with each of her message, and encrypt every-thing with the trusted parties’ public key. When a doctor receives an encrypted message, the doctor will forward it to the trusted party. The trusted party can decrypt can obtain Alice’s instructions. The trusted party will release the message to the doctor only if he meets Alice’s instructions. This solution is also inefficient since a BSN may generate many pieces of data, each of which has to be forwarded to the trusted party for decryption. Using IBE, the doctor only needs to be given a single secret key once. Our contributions In this paper, we design protocols based on identity-based encryption (IBE) that provide security and privacy protections to a body sensor network, while allowing flexible access to stored data. However, conventional IBE cannot be efficiently implemented on sensors used in a BSN. In this paper, we propose IBE-Lite, lightweight IBE scheme that is suitable for sensors. We implement a proof-of-concept of our schemes based on IBE-Litton commercially available sensors similar to the ones used in a BSN. While IBE schemes have been suggested by previous researchers to protect medical data, we are the first to present a lightweight IBE suitable for body sensor networks. The rest of the paper is as follows. The next section presents our protocols and Section 3 contains the security analysis. Our schemes are evaluated in Section 4, with related work presented in Section 5. Section 6 concludes.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
OUR SOLUTION
Our protocols are based on a lightweight IBE scheme IBE-Lite. IBE-LIE shares two properties with conventional IBE, namely the ability to use an arbitrary string to generate public key, and the ability to generate a public key separately from the corresponding secret key. We begin by first reviewing Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC), a public key primitive suitable for BSN [18], followed by the modifications made to derive IBELite. Finally, we present our protocols based on IBE-Lite.
Basic ECC Primitives
To setup ECC, we first select a particular elliptic curve over GF(p), where p is a big prime number. We also denote P as the base point of E and q as the order of P, where q is also a big prime. We then pick a secret key expand the corresponding public key y, where y = x · P, and cryptographic hash function h(). Finally, we have the secret key x and public parameters (y, P, p, q, h(.)).We denote encrypting a message m using public key asEccEncrypt (m, y). The resulting cipher text is denoted. The decryption of cipher text c using the secret key x is given as Eyck Decrypt(c, x). The algorithms for Eyck Encrypt and EccDecrypt are found in Alg. 1 and Alg. 2 respectively. Algorithm 1 EccDecrypt (m, y) 1: Generate a random number r ∈ GF (p). Encrypt m with, Er (m) 2: Calculate Ar = h(r) · y 3: Calculate Br = h(r) · P 4: Calculate _r = r ⊕ _(Ar), where _(Ar) is the x coordinate of Ar 5: Return cipher text c = h_ r, Br, Er (m) i Algorithm 2 EccDecrypt(c, x) 1: Calculate x · Br = x · h(r) · P = h(r) · y = Ar 2: Determine the x coordinate, _(Ar) 3: Derive symmetric key r with _r ⊕_(Ar) = r ⊕_(Ar)⊕ (Ar) = r 4: Apply r to Er(m) to return m IBE-Lite From the basic ECC primitives, we derive the following BE-Lite primitives, setup, and keygen, encrypt and decrypt. For ease of explanation, we assume in this subsection that all primitives are executed by the patient. The actual protocols involving the patient, CA and doctor are explained in the next subsection. The intuition behind is to let a sensor independently generate a public key on-the-fly using an arbitrary string. For example, a sensor collecting EKG readings on Monday 1 Powell first create a string str = (monday|1 pm|EKG). Using this string, the sensor can derive a public key, ystr to en-crypt the data and send it to the storage site. There is no corresponding secret key created. In fact, the sensor cannot create the secret key needed to decrypt the message. When the patient wishes to release this information to a doctor, the patient can derive the corresponding secret key,xstr, by using the same string str = (monday|1pm|EKG). This secret key only allows the doctor to decrypt messages encrypted by a sensor using the same string. This simplifies the key management, since the patient can generate the secret key on-demand without keeping track of which keys were used to encrypt which data. The only requirement is that the string used to describe the event is the same. Setup: We select an elliptic curve E over GF(p), where p is a big prime number. We also denote P as the base point of E and q as the order of P, where q is also a big prime. Asset of n secret keys x1, · · · , xn ∈ GF(q) is chosen to generate the master secret key = (x1, · · · , xn).The n public keys are then generated to make up the master public key = (y1, · · · , yn)where yi = xi · P, 1 ≤ i < n. Finally, a collision resistant one-way hash function h: {0, 1}_ → {0, 1}n is chosen. The parameter shy, P, p, q, h(.)i are released as the system public parameters. Eigen: To derive a secret key xstr corresponding to public key generated by a string str, the patient executes Eigen (str) = xstr, xstr =nXi=1hi (str) · xi, where hi(str) is the i-th bit of h(str).Encrypt: To encrypt a message m using a public key derived from string str, the sensor does Encrypt(m, str) to determine the cipher text c. Alg. 3 shows the process. BSN Security Protocols We first describe the initialization phase where the patient configures the BSN, followed by the data collection phase which outlines how a sensor encrypts the collected data. The data transfer phase describes how a BSN transfers data to storage site, and finally, the query phase which occurs when a doctor needs to obtain data from the storage site. We assume that an agreed upon syntax is used to describe the string needed to derive a public key, and this descriptions termed as STR. For example, the patient deciding to collect data on a hourly basis will set the sensors in the BSN to affix timestamp rounded to the nearest hour when creating strain other words, two EKG readings collected on Monday at1:05 pm and 1:20 pm will both be described using the same string star = {monday|1 pm|EKG}.As mentioned earlier, we assume an honest-but-curious storage site which will try to learn the contents of the stored data, but will otherwise not delete the stored data. We also assume a separate security mechanism is in place so that only the patient can store BSN data onto the storage site. Initialization: The patient first executes Setup to obtain the master secret key X = (x1, · · · , xn), and public parameters hay, P, p, q, h(.)i. The patient loads the parameter shy, P, p, q, h (.)i into every sensor in the BSN. The patient then registers the master secret key together with additional instructions with the CA. Data collection: Let the sensor collect data d at events.
SECURITY ANALYSIS
We begin by examining the basic primitives, followed by an analysis of the protocols themselves. Analysis of Basic Primitives Our Setup is similar to that of the basic ECC setup scheme, except that instead of picking a single secret x, our Setup picks n secrets and n corresponding public keys. Knowing only one star and h(str), the doctor cannot determine the patient’s master secret X since there are n unknown xi. The doctor is only able to determine X when he has in this pos-session n different secret keys x1str, · · · , xnstr.The use of star and yet as the private key and public key derived from string str does not violate the discrete logarithm property of ECC where, given a y = x · P, it is infeasible to determine x given y and P, since both are simply the result of addition of points. Also, both Encrypt and Decrypt are secure since both rely on well established ECC encryption and decryption methods. Analysis of Protocols Our protocols protect the privacy of the patient’s data by encrypting all the information before forwarding the data to the storage site. After a sensor collects the data, the sensor encrypts the data using Encrypt, resulting in the tupleSince all tulles are in cipher text; the storage site learns nothing about the patient’s data. The protocols also prevent unauthorized access to the patient’s data. Each piece of data collected by a sensor is encrypted with a yet, the public key derived from the strings. When the doctor receives permissions to access data encrypted under star, the doctor receives the secret key star, which cannot be used to decrypt any other cipher text not encrypted using yet. A compromised sensor does not allow the adversary to obtain any useful data about a patient from the storage site since the sensor only stores the publicly known parameters. At most the adversary obtains the cipher text pair (c1, c2).The adversary can try to launch a matching attack by first creating many public keys using different strings str. The adversary then encrypts all possible values using the different public keys to determine whether there is a match forth tuple (c1, c2). This is possible since the number of potential EKG readings for example is bounded. However, both c1 and c2 contains a random number n generated by the sensor. Since the adversary cannot predict the value of, the matching attack fails. Finally, our protocols provide flexibility. The string strcan be used to specify access to the data, without using additional certificates. For instance, consider the string str ={Date | ER | Doctor} used to encrypt data. A doctor wanting to obtain the corresponding secret key will have to convince the CA that he is indeed an ER doctor on the given date. The process of specifying what str to construct can be programmed by the patient without additional permissions from the CA. RELATED WORK AND RESULT The motivation behind a BSN is to place low cost sensors directly on the patient for health care monitoring. With this in mind, several research prototypes have been developed [18, 28, 8, 19]. The use of identity-based cryptography (IBE) [25, 2, 5] for medical applications was also suggested by [22, 21], but our work presents practical implementation actual sensors rather than a general architecture. Other applications of IBE include [13, 1, 11].Sensor network security is a widely researched area [24, 12], with solutions focusing on key deployment [7, 14, 17, 16, 4], public key cryptography [15, 23, 9] and management [6, 20, 3]. Unlike prior work, our security protocols incorportateidentity-based cryptography primitives.
CONCLUSION
In this paper, we presented IBE-Lite, a lightweight identity based encryption method suitable for a body sensor net-work. We provided protocols based on IBE-Lite to provide security and privacy support for a BSN. We evaluated our protocols using a combination of security analysis, simulations, and practical implementation on actual sensors.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1632http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16321. N. Asokan, K. Kostiainen, P. Ginzboorg, J. Otto, and C. Lou. Applicability of identitybased cryptography for disruption-tolerant networking. In MobiOpp 2007.
2. D. Boneh and M. Franklin. Identity-based encryption from the Weil pairing. In CRYPTO 2001.
3. S. Capkun, L. Butty´an, and J.-P. Hubaux.Self-organized public-key management for mobile adhoc networks. IEEE TMC 2003.
4. H. Chan, A. Perrig, and D. Song. Random key redistribution schemes for sensor networks. In IEEESP 2003. 5. C. Cocks. An identity based encryption scheme based on. quadratic residues. In LNCS 2260 (2001).
6. W. Du, R. Wang, and P. Ning. An efficient scheme for authenticating public keys in sensor networks. InMobiHoc 2005.
7. L. Eschenauer and V. D. Gligor. A keymanagement scheme for distributed sensor networks. In CCS 2002.
8. R. Ganti, P. Jayachandran, and T. Abdelzaher. Satire:A software architecture for smart attire. In Mobisys2006.
9. J. Girao, D. Westhoff, E. Mykletun, and T. Araki.Tinypeds: Tiny persistent encrypted data storage in asynchronous wireless sensor networks. Ad HocNetworks 2007.
10. V. Gupta, M. Wurm, Y. Zhu, M. Millard, S. Fung,N. Gura, H. Eberle, and S. C. Shantz. Sizzle: A standards-based end-to-end security architecture forthe embedded internet. In PerCom 2005.
11. U. Hengartner and P. Steenkiste. Exploiting hierarchical identity-based encryption for access control to pervasive computing information. InSecureComm 2005. 12. C. Karlof, N. Sastry, and D. Wagner. Tinysec: a linklayer security architecture for wireless sensor networks. In SenSys 2004.
13. A. Kate, G. Zaverucha, and U. Hengartner. Anonymity and security in delay tolerant networks. InSecureComm 2007.
14. L. Lazos and R. Poovendran. Serloc: Secure range-independent localization for wireless sensor networks. ACM TOSN 2005.
15. A. Liu, P. Kampanakis, and P. Ning. Tinyecc: Elliptic curve cryptography for sensor networks (version 0.3).2007. 16. D. Liu and P. Ning. Establishing pair wise keys in distributed sensor networks. In CCS 2003.
17. D. Liu, P. Ning, S. Zhu, and S. Jajodia. Practical broadcast authentication in sensor networks. InMobiQuitous 2005.
18. B. Lo and G. Z. Yang. Key technical challenges and current implementations of body sensor networks. InBSN 2005.
19. D. Malan, T. Fulford-Jones, M. Welsh, ands. Moulton. Code blue: An ad hoc sensor network infrastructure for emergency medical care. In BSN2004.
20. D. J. Malan, M. Welsh, and M. D. Smith. A public-key infrastructure for key distribution in tinyosbased on elliptic curve cryptography. In SECON 2004.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareASSESSMENT OF KNOWLEDGE AND COMPLIANCE REGARDING CONTACT LENS WEAR AND CARE AMONG FEMALE COLLEGE STUDENTS IN SAUDI ARABIA
English162169Yousef AldebasiEnglishBackground: The regular use of contact lens for improving vision has seen an increasing trend worldwide and this can be attributed to increase in awareness through better advertisement, easy availability and handling, better products through advanced manufacturing strict guidelines. Our Objectives was to assess knowledge and compliance regarding contact lens wear and care among female college students in Saudi Arabia. Methods: A cross-sectional descriptive study was conducted from March to May, 2010, among randomly selected 50 female students of King Saud University, Riyadh, who were aged between 18 – 25 years. Data were collected through pre-designed, pre-tested self- explained questionnaire with the help of optometrist. Results: It was found that significant number of the study population (88%) was regularly cleaning the lens case. However, only 58 percent of them cleaned their hands before putting the contact lens in the lens case while the remaining either did not clean at all (18%) or cleaned irregularly (24%). There were findings related to the habit of immersing the lens, only half the lens in the cleaning solution (34%). Regular visit to eye practitioners (38%) and use of contact lens beyond the expiry date (10%). Conclusion: It appears that primarily it is poor hand hygiene, inadequate care of the lens and the lens case, improper use of the cleaning solution and irregular follow up visits to the eye practitioners for eye check among the young female population.
EnglishContact lens, Saudi Arabia, eye infections, lens care.INTRODUCTION
Contact lens use for the correction of refractive error is gaining momentum world-wide. This could be attributed to the advancement in contact lens manufacturing technology; improved lens materials, production techniques as well as storage and care products. There have also been improvements on awareness and/or education on the proper use of contact lenses and contact lens care products. In Saudi Arabia, contact lens use has also been on the increase.[1] Apart from its use for the correction of refractive error and management of problem of ocular adnexa such as in exophthalmos to prevent exposure keratopathy or cornea problems such as keratoconus,[2, 3] contact lens has also been used for prosthetic and cosmetic reasons for example to enhance eye colour. There are lots of different designs available in terms of lens type and materials and at an affordable cost. These have made contact lens wear popular among the young people particularly females in Saudi Arabia. Contact lens can act as a vector for microorganisms to adhere to and transfer to the ocular surface if not used and cared properly. In the presence of reduced tissue resistance, microorganisms or transient pathogens can invade and colonize the cornea or conjunctiva to produce inflammation or infection.[4] Noncompliance has been implicated as one of the causes of complications in contact lens wear; the inadequate adherence to the practitioner’s instructions on the use of contact lenses and care products.[5] These complications which range from mild eye irritations to keratitis have in most cases posed a threat to the oculo-visual function. Studies,[6, 7] have identified several risk factors associated with lens wear complications in an attempt to encourage successful lens wear and to minimize disease burden. Amongst the identified risk factors, some are non-modifiable such as gender or age,[8] of which we cannot influence whereas others are modifiable such as poor hand cleaning and lens case hygiene[9] hence can be targeted in minimizing vision loss and maximizing successful lens wear. Ocular health education or knowledge in the correct and careful practice regarding contact lens wear can prevent complications resulting from the wearer's inappropriate behavior. One of the ways of investigating this is from the person's perception regarding his own knowledge of contact lens wear.[10] There are three primary areas of concern namely: contact lens wear schedule, lens care, and contact lens replacement schedule. Consequently the study of knowledge of compliance can contribute to the planning of educational and health campaigns aimed at reducing some of the ocular complications associated with contact lens wear. Whilst many eye care practitioners are familiar with the notion that many contact lens wearers are non-compliant, there is very little up-to-date objective data available to support this belief in Saudi Arabia. In this report we present independent research which describes the lens wear and care habits of female contact lens wearers in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia. Educational status of patients is one of the factors thought to influence compliance.[11] The current study was conducted among the female college students with a primary objective to assess the knowledge and compliance of contact lens care and their practice related to contact lens use, cleaning and maintenance.
MATERIALS AND METHODS
A cross sectional descriptive study was conducted using a structured questionnaire among the female students at King Saud University in Riyadh aged 18-25. The study got clearance from the University Ethics Committee and was implemented among the female students. Any female who has ever worn contact lens for any period of time and for whatever reason was enrolled in this study. To get a better understanding of some questions and to capture appropriate information, a pilot study (pre- test) was conducted on 10 students a week prior of starting research work and after review few modifications were done in the questionnaire for the final research work. A total of 50 contact lens wearers were identified and a structured questionnaire was introduced to collect the information from March to May 2010 after getting the informed consent for the participation in this study. The questionnaire was in Arabic language and had 35 questions. The tool was validated by three Optometry experts working in the Department of Optometry before using in this present study. For analysis purpose the questionnaire was also back translated in English to ensure the same meaning is conveyed. The questionnaire was based on the knowledge and practices of contact lens wear, care and its possible complications. All the questions were prepared in Arabic language and the answers were also given in Arabic language by the participants who participated in the study. The questionnaire was designed in a very comprehensive manner which consisted of 35 questions related to general demographic data, socio economic status, contact lens hygiene and hand cleaning, compliance to eye care provider's instructions and behavioral aspects. The tool was objective type which was not time consuming as the participant has to tick her answer on the appropriate box (answers being 'Yes', 'NO'and/ 'Sometimes'). The data that was collected in the questionnaires was coded and it was analyzed using Epi_info software version 3.5.1 2008, (CDC Atlanta). RESULTS Demographic characteristics: Fifty females participated in the study and their age distribution was as follows; 54% were under age group of 18- 21 years and the remaining 46% were between 22- 25years (Table-1). 74% (37) students were single while the rest 26% (13) were married (Graph -1). Out of the fifty contact lens users, 92% (46 females) were using soft lens and 8% (4 females) were RGP lens users. Majority of the participants 66% (33) were using contact lens for cosmetic purposes while the remaining 34% (17) were using for refractive purpose. It was observed that 52% (26) of them got their contact lenses from cosmetic center while 38% (19) got theirs from optical shop and only 10% (5) got their lenses prescribed from hospital (Table 2) Lens supply: It was also found that 82% (41) of the lens users were cleaning the lens case regularly. Out of fifty participants, 46 (92%) of them clean their hands before using contact lens and 4 (8%) of them doesn’t clean their hands before inserting contact lens in the eye. Only 58% (29) of them clean the hands before putting the contact lens in the lens case and remaining either do not clean at all 6 (12%) or clean sometimes 15 (30%) (Table 3) Lens care: Other significant finding of the study is that 74% (37) immerse the lens in cleaning solution completely while 26% (13) of them place the lens half immersed in the cleaning solution. It was also established that only 62% (31) of them visit the eye practitioner regularly. There was also usage of expired contact lens by 10% (5) participants regularly, and 16% (8) of them use the expired contact lens sometimes (Table-4). The distribution of subjects according to the usage of cleaning solution was shown in Graph 2. It showed 72% (36) subjects don’t have any ocular problem while on changing the cleaning solution, 24% (12) were using the same brand and the remaining 2 (4%) uses water temporarily. Compliance associated with Contact lens wear: Regarding history of lens related complications, 10% (5) reported having experienced a contact lens related complication. Patients were also queried on their knowledge of complications associated with contact lens wear. More than half of the patient surveyed (65%) reported that they had not experienced a contact lens-related complication. Pearson Chi square test was used to find out the association between the age, level of education and compliance of contact lens care based on the subject’s responses. There was a statistically significant association between age and Cleaning the lens cases (p=0.002), washing hands before inserting contact lenses (p=0.054), cleaning hands before keeping the lens in the lens cases (p=0.000), Immersing lens in cleaning solution (0.000), whereas no statistically significant association noted between age and follow up with the eye care practitioner among our subjects (p=0.109). The level of education showed statistically significant association with cleaning of lens case (p=0.005), cleaning hands before keeping lens in the lens case (p=0.000), Immersing lens in cleaning solution (p=0.002) and Follow up visits with the eye care practitioner (p=0.004), whereas washing hands before inserting contact lenses in the eye does not showed any significant association with level of education (p=0.295). (Table 5)
DISCUSSION
Contact lenses are a convenient alternative to eyeglasses and it is considered as a better option for certain eye conditions, such as keratoconus and irregular astigmatism. Contact lenses usually provide better vision and freedom of movement for some users, but improper care and cleaning of these products can cause discomfort, blurred vision and pain. Contact lenses are not only worn to correct vision and it can be worn for cosmetic or therapeutic purposes. In this study, 34% of females were found to be wearing CLs to correct refractive error and 66% were using CLs for the cosmetic purposes. In this study patient’s compliance on the use and care of contact lenses were weighed against lens supply, lens care regimen and contact lens replacement schedule. The place of contact lens supply; cosmetic centers, Optical showrooms and hospitals, has been found to be associated with contact related complications,[9] as there are limited instructions given to patients on the use of contact lenses. In this study, 52% of the participants agreed to have purchased their contact lens from the cosmetic centers while only 10% had obtained there lenses from an optometrist from hospitals. This is contrary to the recent study in Australia by Wu and Stapleton,[12] where majority (66%) of the participants was said to have obtained their lenses from the optometrist. This disparity between these studies reflects the difference in years of contact lens practices and laws on who can and cannot fit contact lenses as well as level of education given to patients in the two countries. In Saudi Arabia for instance, contact lens practice is more recent compared to Australia. Another reason for the differences in the two studies could have stemmed from the sample size and the demography of this study as the study had considered only female contact wearers. According to Claydon et al,[13] the major areas of non-compliance in contact lens wear have been highlighted as the lack of hand and lens-case hygiene, the over wearing of contact lenses, the poor attendance of patients at aftercare appointments and the inadequate use of care and maintenance systems. In our study, majority of the participants cared for their lens cases regularly and 92% of lens wearers reported cleaning their hands before putting on the lenses in the eye, and this was also seen in the study by Wu and Stapleton.[12] However, over half of the subjects (58%) actually cleaned their hands before replacing the lenses in the case. In the present study also, 74% of the participants immerse their lenses completely in the solution while cleaning the lenses. In a similar study conducted by Mayers et al,[14] 71% of contact lens wearers put their lenses directly into the lens case without rinsing and rubbing the lenses to clean them; 11 percent rinsed only, and only 7 percent performed rinseand-rub” cleaning technique. The lack of hands’ cleaning before touching the lens could introduce dirt on the lens surface which can be transferred to the eye, resulting in irritation and/or infection especially where the lenses are not properly cleaned. This study also found that 31% of contact lens wearers wait up to 12 months to replace their lens case and most the lens wearers reported to visit the optometrist regularly. A study done by Hickson-Curran et al,[15] among 787 contact lens wearers revealed that 48 percent replaced their case annually. Compliance with contact lens care and maintenance instructions is considered to be the most important aspect of the safe and comfortable use of lenses. The use of contact lenses is known to increase the microbial load in the eye which can adversely affect corneal health (16), ranging from a mild ocular redness and irritation to a very severe sight threatening situation like Acanthamoeba keratitis. Poor contact lens hygiene and microbial contamination of the lens storage case have been observed to be related to microbial keratitis(17,18,19) .A proper hand wash and hygiene plays an important role in controlling the risk of infection while handling contact lenses. In this study, 30% of subjects’ clean their hands before inserting CLs in the eye and remaining 12% doesn’t wash their hands at all. This may cause risk of ocular infections secondary to CL wear. Appropriate counseling regarding contact lens care, maintenance instructions and personal hygiene should be given to the subjects in the clear manner by eye care practitioners. Proper lens care is essential for safety and success, but so is adherence to prescribed replacement schedules and recommended wearing schedules, as well as regular return visits to the eye-care practitioner. In our study, 92% of subjects were using soft CLs and 8% were using RGP CLs. Soft contact lenses deteriorate over time as they become worn, dirty and accumulate protein deposits that cannot be removed even by elaborate cleaning. This can affect visual acuity and increase discomfort. There are chances of infection of the lens leading to corneal ulcer. Regular visit to the optometry clinic is believed to encourage prompt replacement of lenses as faults or abnormalities would be identified on time and appropriate management initiated. Also, each patient encounter is an opportunity to review and reinforce proper wearing and replacement time and contact lens care. Continually educating patients that contact lenses are medical devices and reviewing proper lens wearing and replacement schedules is the best way to avoid noncompliance.
RECOMMENDATIONS
Many patients see contact lens solely as a cosmetic item and not as a medical device. This attitude leads to the purchase of contact lens and care products from the cosmetic shops and over the internet. Therefore, there is need to enact laws that will regulate dispensing of contact lenses by unqualified persons as well as purchase or sale of contact lenses and care products over the internet. Education, improving communication, behavioral modifications are the main factors that helps to improve the compliance level in any population. When eye care practitioners dispense contact lenses, there is need to educate patients on the proper wearing schedule; for example not to sleep in lenses that are not approved for overnight wear. This gives patients the opportunity to ask to be fitted in a higher-Dk lens if overnight wear is an option. Patients should also be given helpful tips or written instruction on the steps to follow while cleaning the lenses as well as while fitting and replacing the lens in the case. Eye care practitioners should equally educate patients on the replacement schedule of their lenses. It is relatively easy to blame patients for poor compliance but experience has shown that poor compliance can be avoided or at least reduced by proper training at the initial fitting of contact lenses and reinforcement at the follow up visits. While some contact lens patients are noncompliant on purpose, most patients would be more compliant with their replacement schedule if they had reminders or a way of remembering when to replace their lenses. There should be a place on an eye care practitioners written contact lens prescription for the recommended wearing time, replacement schedule.
CONCLUSION
Contact lenses are the safest forms of vision correction when patients follow the proper care and wearing instructions. Contact lens wearers could be damaging their eyes by not using proper hygiene in caring for their lenses. Poor hand hygiene, inadequate lens care and not remembering when to come back for aftercare visits are the common non-compliant behaviors in lens wearers. Higher educational status does not always mean higher compliance amongst contact lens wearers. Proper contact lens care and regular follow-up visits to their eye care practitioner are essential for a patient’s safety and wearing success. Appropriate counseling regarding contact lens wear and care should be given to the subjects by contact lens dispensers or Optometrists or Ophthalmologists. Clean and safe handling of contact lenses is one of the most important measures where contact lens wearers should follow to protect their ocular health and sight. However, due to the limitation of the study to only females, this may not be generalized to the general population in Saudi Arabia. Therefore, there is need for more studies that will involve both, male and females.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1633http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16331. Briggs, S. and A. Oduntan, Contact lenses in Saudi Arabia: an overview. International Contact Lens Clinic, 1996. 23: p. 46-49.
2. Briggs, S. and A. Nacer, Contact lens status in ametropia correction: a prospective study. Clin Exp Optom., 1999. 82: p. 196-199.
3. Assiri, A., et al., Incidence and severity of keratoconus in Asir province, Saudi Arabia. Br J Ophthalmol, 2005. 89: p. 1403-1406.
4. Gray, T., et al., Acanthemoeba, bacterial, and fungal contamination of contact storage cases. Br J Ophthalmol, 1995. 79: p. 601-605.
5. Morgan, P., The science of compliance: a guide for eye care professionals. 2008.
6. McLaughlin-Borlace, L., et al., Bacterial biofilm on contact lens storage cases. Br J Ophthalmol, 1998. 84: p. 827-838.
7. Collins, M. and L. Carney, Compliance with care and maintenance procedures amongst contact lens wearers. Clin Exp Optom, 1986. 69: p. 174-177.
8. Dart, J., et al., Risk factors for microbial keratitis with contemporary contact lenses: a case study. Ophthalmology, 2008. 115: p. 1647-1654.
9. Stapleton, F., et al., The incident of contact lens-related microbial keratitis in australia. Ophthalmology, 2008. 115: p. 1655-1662.
10. De Oliveira, P., et al., self evaluation of contact lens waering and care by college students and health care workers. eye and Contact Lens Journal, 2003. 29: p. 164-167.
11. Claydon, B. and N. Efron, Non compliance in contact lens wear. Ophthal Physiol Opt, 1994. 14: p. 356-364.
12. Wu, Y. and F. Stapleton, Contact lens user profile, attitudes and level of compliance to the lens care. Contact Lens and Anterior Eye, 2010. 33: p. 183-188.
13. Claydon, B., N. Efron, and C. Woods, A prospective study of non-compliance in contact lens wear. Journal of British Contact lens Assoc, 1996. 19: p. 133-140.
14. Mayers, M., Callan B., and R. Borazjani, et al. , Complaince and contamination in contact lens wear., After American Academy of Optometry meeting, 2010; San Francisco.
15. Hickson-Curran, S., R. Chalmers, and S. Sencer, Making the case for daily disposable contact lenses: patient non compliance with storage case hygiene and replacement., 2010.
16. Dart JK, Stapleton F, Minassian D. Contact lenses and other risk factors in microbial keratitis. Lancet 1991;338:650-53
17. Radford CF, Minassian DC, Dart JK. Acanthamoeba keratitis in England and Wales: incidence, outcome, and risk factors. Br J Ophthalmol 2002;86:536-42
18. Butler TK, Males JJ, Robinson LP, Wechsler AW, Sutton GL, Cheng J, Taylor P, McClellan K. Six-year review of Acanthamoeba keratitis in New South Wales, Australia: 1997-2002. Clin Exp Ophthalmol 2005;33(1):41-6
19. Szczotka-Flynn LB, Pearlman E, Ghannoum M. Microbial contamination of contact lenses, lens care solutions, and their accessories: a literature review. Eye Contact Lens 2010;36(2):116-29
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20HealthcareVARIANT HEADS OF BICEPS BRACHII MUSCLE
English170176Sharadkumar Pralhad Sawant English Shaguphta T. ShaikhEnglish Rakhi Milind MoreEnglishAim: To study the occurrence of the variant heads of biceps brachii muscle. Materials and Methods: The 50 specimens of the 25 donated embalmed cadavers (20 males and 5 females) were dissected and observed for variations in the origin and insertion of biceps brachii muscle bilaterally in the department of Anatomy at K.J.Somaiya Medical College, Sion, Mumbai, INDIA. The dissection of arm and forearm was done meticulously in all the 50 specimens. The photographs of the supernumerary head of biceps brachii muscle were taken for proper documentation and for ready reference. Results / Observations: Out of 50 specimens, the supernumerary head was found in six specimens. The humeral head was taking origin from the anteromedial surface of the shaft of the humerus in three specimens and from the anterolateral surface of the shaft of the humerus in three specimens. In all six specimens, the supernumerary head joined with the other two heads and form a common tendon which got inserted into the radial tuberosity of the radius and bicipital aponeurosis. In the present study the incidence of supernumerary head of biceps brachii was 12%. In all the six specimens, the supernumerary head was found unilaterally (5 males and 1female specimen). In three specimens (50%) the supernumerary head was supplied by median nerve, the musculocutaneous nerve was absent in that specimen while in all other specimens the muscles of front of arm were supplied as usual by musculocutaneous nerve. The blood supply of the supernumerary head was from the brachial artery and vein. There was no variations in the vascular pattern of arm and forearm in all the specimens. Conclusion: Topographical anatomy and variations in the heads of the biceps brachii muscle is clinically important for surgeons, orthopaedicians and radiologists.
EnglishBiceps Brachii Muscle, Supernumerary Head, Musculocutaneous Nerve, Median Nerve, Surgeons, Orthopaedicians, Radiologists.INTRODUCTION
The biceps brachii is the muscle of the anterior compartment of the arm having two heads of origin proximally, a long head originating from the supraglenoid tubercle and glenoid labrum and a short head from the coracoid process of the scapula. Distally these two heads unite to form a common tendon that inserts into the posterior rough part of the radial tuberosity and bicipital aponeurosis which merges with the deep fascia of the forearm (1). This mode of insertion makes it an efficient and important supinator of the forearm. It is the only flexor of the arm that crosses the shoulder as well as the elbow joint thereby acting on both joints. It is innervated by the musculocutaneous nerve and vascularized by brachial and anterior circumflex humeral arteries and brachial vein (1). Biceps brachii has been stated as one of the muscles that shows frequent anatomical variations (2, 3, 4, 5). Some of its reported anomalies have been manifested as supernumerary fascicles that originate from the coracoid process, tendon of pectoralis major, articular capsule and head of the humerus or from humerus itself (6). Among those variations, the presence of a supernumerary fascicle arising from the shaft of the humerus, which is known as the humeral head of biceps brachii, is known to be the most common anomaly (3, 7, 8). Multiple supernumerary heads of four to seven have also been reported to a lesser extent (1, 3, 4, 5). A large body of evidence suggests a wide range of racial variations in the occurrence of humeral head of biceps brachii muscle. It was shown to have an incidence of 7.1% in Indians, 8% in Chinese, 10% in European whites, 10 % in Sri Lankans, 12% in African Blacks, 15% in Turkish, 18% in Japanese, 21.5% in South African Blacks and 8.3% in South African Whites, and 37.5 % in Colombians (3, 8, 9, 10, 11,12, 13, 14, 15, 16). From a clinical standpoint of view, muscle anomalies are difficult to differentiate from soft tissue tumors (5). High median nerve compression around the elbow joint has been described as resulting from a number of clinical and anatomical entities. The existence of an anomalous muscle in and around the elbow region may cause high median nerve palsy and compression of the brachial artery (5). Further, knowledge of the incidence of humeral head of biceps brachii will facilitate preoperative diagnosis as well as the surgical procedures of the upper limb (5,9).
MATERIALS AND METHODS
This study was carried out on a total of 25 donated embalmed cadavers (20 males and 5 females) during routine gross anatomy dissections in the Department of Anatomy at K.J.Somaiya Medical College, Sion, Mumbai, INDIA. The cadavers were preserved in 10% formalin. The age group of the cadavers varied between 65-80 years. Te skin is reflected by making a longitudinal incision on the anterior aspect of the arm extending from the level of acromian process to a point 2.5 cm below the elbow joint and horizontal incisions on both proximal and distal ends of the longitudinal incision. The arms were then dissected carefully to expose the full length of the biceps brachii muscle from its proximal to distal attachment. The presence of supernumerary heads, their origins and insertions were recorded. The photographs of the supernumerary head of biceps brachii muscle were taken for proper documentation and for ready reference.
RESULTS / OBSERVATIONS
Out of 50 upper limbs of 25 cadavers, supernumerary heads of the biceps brachii were present in 6 specimens. The supernumerary head was taking origin from the anteromedial surface of the shaft of the humerus in three specimens and from the anterolateral surface of the shaft of the humerus in three specimens. In all the six specimens, the supernumerary head joined with the other two heads and form a common tendon which got inserted into the radial tuberosity of the radius and bicipital aponeurosis. In the present study the incidence of supernumerary head of biceps brachii was 12%. In all the six specimens, the supernumerary head was found unilaterally (3 male and 3 female specimens). In three specimens (50%) the supernumerary head was supplied by median nerve, the musculocutaneous nerve was absent in that specimen while in all other specimens the muscles of front of arm were supplied as usual by musculocutaneous nerve. The blood supply of the supernumerary head was from the brachial artery and vein. There were no variations in the vascular pattern of arm and forearm in all the specimens.
DISCUSSION
Anatomy is a morphological science which cannot fail to interest the clinicians. The present study documents the incidence and morphological characteristics of supernumerary heads of biceps brachii. The standard Anatomy text states the incidence of this variation as 10% (1). Although this is based on some European populations (10), it ignores a large body of evidence with reference to other populations (3, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16). Furthermore, racial variation of the incidence of the supernumerary head of biceps brachii has been clearly demonstrated by comparative studies between Brazilian whites and black subjects. The incidence of supernumerary head of biceps brachii in blacks was found to be significantly lower than in whites (17). The variations of the incidence of the third head of biceps brachii were attributed to evolutionary or racial trends (8). In the present study the incidence of occurrence of supernumerary head of the biceps brachii was 12%. It was also interesting to note the gender differences of the occurrence of humeral heads of this muscle. The gender comparison of the incidence implies that the supernumerary head of the biceps brachii is a predominantly male condition (3, 10). The results of the present study disagree with the gender comparison documented in literature. In the present study the supernumerary head was found in 3 female specimens out of 10 female specimens (30%) and in 3 male specimens out of 40 male specimens (7.5%). Embryologically it has been stated that the third head of biceps brachii arises from the brachialis muscle and in such instances its distal insertion has been translocated from ulna to the radius (2). The innervation and vascularization of the third head of biceps brachii were from musculocutaneous nerve and brachial artery. This agrees with the normal embryologic development of the related dermatomes and myotomes. It is presumed that the development of the biceps brachii muscle is likely to influence the course and the branching pattern of musculocutaneous nerve (13,18). The median nerve supplying the supernumerary head was rare and not found in literature. In the past many variations have been described regarding the course of the musculocutaneous and median nerves. Le Minor (19) described five types of variations: Type 1: There is no communication between the median and musculocutaneous nerve. Type 2: The fibers of medial root of median nerve pass through the musculocutaneous nerve and join the median nerve in the middle of the arm. Type3: The lateral root fibers of medial root of median nerve pass through the musculocutaneous nerve and after some distance, leave it to form the root of the median nerve. Type 4: The musculocutaneous fibres join the lateral root of the median nerve and after some distance the musculocutaneous arise from the median nerve. Type 5: The musculocutaneous nerve is absent and the entire fibres of musculocutaneous pass through lateral root and fibres to the muscles supplied by musculocutaneous nerve branch out directly from median nerve. Venieratos and Anagnostopoulou (20) also described three different types of communication between musculocutaneous and median nerve in relation to coracobrachialis muscle. Type 1: communication between musculocutaneous and median nerve is proximal to the entrance of musculocutaneous into coracobrachialis. Type 2: communication between the two nerves is distal to the muscle. Type 3: neither the nerve nor its communicating branch pierced the muscle. In the present study the three specimens (50%) of supernumerary head of biceps brachii muscle were supplied by median nerve. The absence of musculocutaneous nerve was coincided with type 5 of Lee Minor but did not coincide with any of Venieratos's classification (19, 20). The knowledge of such variations is important during surgical corrections of the arm as well as in diagnosing the nerve impairments. Furthermore, it has been mentioned that any variant nerve with an abnormal origin, course and distribution is prone to accidental injuries and impairments (21). This is further proved by the fact that supernumerary heads of the biceps brachii muscle have been reported to compress the surrounding neurovascular structures leading to erroneous interpretations during surgical procedures (18). The biceps brachii is known for its powerful elbow flexion and supination of the forearm. It can be argued that the presence of supernumerary heads of biceps brachii muscle increase its kinematics. Therefore, from anatomical standpoint of view it can be presumed that the presence of a third head may increase the power of flexion and supination of the forearm (13). In addition to allowing the elbow flexion irrespective of the shoulder joint position, the supernumerary head of biceps brachii may enhance the strength of elbow flexion (16). Competing interests: The authors declare that they have no competing interests. Authors' contributions: SPS wrote the case report, performed the literature review and obtained the photograph for the study. RMM performed the literature search and assisted with writing the paper. STS conceived the study and helped to draft the manuscript. All authors have read and approved the final version manuscript.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
All the authors wish to convey our sincere thanks to Dr. Arif A. Faruqui for his valuable help, support and inspiration. Authors also acknowledge the immense help received from the scholars whose articles are cited and included in references of this manuscript. The authors are also grateful to authors / editors / publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1634http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16341. Standring S, Ellis H, Healy JC, Johnson D et al. Gray’s Anatomy. In: General organisation and surface anatomy of the upper limb.39th ed. Philadelphia Elsevier Churchill Livingstone, 2005: 803-4.
2. Testut, L. and Latarjet, A. Compendio de anatomia descriptive. 22nd Ed. Buenos Aires, Salvat, 1981.
3. Asvat, R.; Candler, P. and Sarmiento, E. E. High incidence of the third head of biceps brachii in South African populations. J. Anat., 182:101-4, 1993.
4. Nakatani, T.; Tanaka, S. and Mizukami, S. Bilateral fourheaded biceps brachii muscles: the median nerve and brachial artery passing through a tunnel formed by a muscle slip from the supernumerary head. Clin. Anat., 11:209-12, 1998.
5. Nayak, S. R.; Ashwin, K.; Madhan, K. S. J.; Latha, V. P.; Vasudha, S. and Merin, M. T. Four-headed biceps and triceps brachii muscles with neurovascular variation.Anat. Sci. Intl., 83:107-11, 2008.
6. Sargon, M. F.; Tuncali, D. and Celik, H. H. An unusual origin for the supernumerary head of biceps brachii muscle. Clin. Anat., 9:160-2, 1996.
7. Khaledpour, C. Anomalies of the biceps muscle of the arm. Anat. Anz., 158:79-85, 1985
8. Kopuz, C.; Sancack, B. and Ozbenli, S. On the incidence of the third head of biceps brachii in Turkish neonates and adults. Acta. Anat. Nippon., 74:301-5, 1999
9. Rai, R.; Ranade, A. V.; Prabhu, L. V. and Prakash, M. M. P. Third head of Biceps brachii: A study in Indian population. Singapore Med. J., 48:929-31, 2007.
10. Bergman, R. A.; Thompson, S. A.; Afifi, A. K. and Saadeh, FA. Compendium of human anatomic variation. 1st Ed. Baltimore, Urban and Schwarzenberg, 1988.
11. Torre, F. R. L.; Cegarra, J. N. and Berruezo, J. P. Biceps brachii muscle attached to the extensor carpii radialis brevis muscle: an unreported anatomical variation in humans. Anat. Anz., 176:319-21, 1994.
12. Kosugi, K.; Shibata, S. and Yamashita, H. Supernumerary head of biceps brachii and branching pattern of the musculocutaneous nerve in Japanese. Surg. Rad. Anat., 14:175- 85, 1992.
13. Kumar, H.; Das, S. and Rath, G. An anatomical insight into the third head of biceps brachii muscle. Bratisl. Lek. Listy., 109:76-8, 2008.
14. Tountas, C. P. and Bergman, R. A. Anatomic variations of the upper extremity. New York, Churchill Livingstone, 1993.
15. Rincon, F.; Rodriquez, I. Z. and Sanchez A. The anatomic characteristics of the third head of biceps brachii muscle in Colombian population. Rev. Chil. Anat., 20:197-200, 2002.
16. Swieter, M. G. and Carmichael, S. W. Bilateral three-headed biceps brachii muscles. Anat. Anz., 148:346-9, 1980.
17. Santo Neto, H.; Camilli, J. A.; Andrade, J. C.; Meciano, F. J. and Marques, M. J. On the incidence of the biceps brachii third head in Brazilian white and blacks. Anat. Anz., 180:69-71, 1998.
18. Warner, J. P.; Palleta, G. A. and Warren, R. F. Supernumerary Head of the Biceps brachii, Case report demonstrating clinical relevance. Clin. Ortho. Res., 280:179-81, 1992.
19. Le Minor JM. A rare variant of the median and musculocutaneous nerves in man. Archieves Anatomy Histology Embryology 1992; 73: 33-42.
20. Venierators D and Anangnastopoulou S classification of communication between the musculocutaneous and median nerves. Clincal Anatomy. 1998; 11: 327-331.
21. Roberts, W. H. Anomalous course of the median nerve medial to the trochlea and anterior to the medial epicondyle of the humans. Anat. Anz., 174:309-11, 1992.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20TechnologyANALYTICAL MODELS AND DESIGN OF COMBINED DEHUMIDIFICATION AND EVAPORATIVE COOLING SYSTEM FOR MANGO STORAGE IN GHANA
English177187E. A. AwafoEnglish K. A. DzisiEnglishIn Ghana, the production, consumption and commercialisation of mangoes are substantially low. The fruits are highly perishable and require storage temperatures of 10-15oC, but most mango producing areas in Ghana are remote, poor and do not have access to electricity and so cannot use conventional cold storage systems. The wet bulb temperatures in these areas are between 14 and 27oC; and relative humidities vary between 16 and 77%, so a combined desiccant dehumidification and evaporative cooling system has been designed and used at these areas. The system consists of the storage chamber, dehumidifier, heat exchanger and saturator. Analytical models of these components have been developed, the components designed and experimental procedure explained in this paper. Three key assumptions were made in solving the model equations with a computer simulation programme, namely no heat transfer through the walls, no water loss by drift and steady flow conditions. The system’s performance was found to be dependent on incoming air conditions and water flow rate and its overall performance produced a minimum cooling of 0.31 tons and maximum cooling of 2.00 tons for water flow rates of 0 and 0.252 l/s respectively. The observed storage temperature of 12oC and relative humidity of 90% were found to be conducive for the long term storage of mango.
EnglishEvaporative cooling, Dehumidification, Analytical models, Mango storage, GhanaINTRODUCTION
Mangoes are one of the finest fresh fruits in the world, and are higher in vitamin C than citrus fruits, as well as other health benefits [1] . In Ghana, there is a huge potential for mango cultivation, which can make the fruit become a major foreign exchange earner for the country, but production levels are currently far below expectations. For example, the total production in 2007 was only 1,071 metric tonnes [2]. One of the reasons which has been suggested as a disincentive for increased mango production is the lack of accessible storage structures, both on-farm and off-farm. This lack leads to various types of postharvest losses and high storage costs. Mango farmers in Ghana are mainly poor, and live in remote locations where there is no grid electricity [3]. Conventional methods of mango storage such as controlled atmosphere, modified/controlled atmosphere, thermal quarantine, vapour compression, which are mainly used in developed countries, are too expensive and also not practically feasible for the rural farmer [4] . In [5], one way that has been found to be efficient and economical in reducing temperature and increasing the relative humidity in an enclosure, which has been extensively tried for increasing the shelf life of horticultural produce in some tropical and subtropical countries is evaporative cooling principle. [6] notes that evaporative cooling involves cooling dry air by blowing it across a wet surface; and the conversion of sensible heat to latent heat is the underlying principle of this concept. Systems designed using this principle have the advantages of low energy consumption, easy maintenance, installation and operation, and are environmentally friendly since water and air are the main working fluids. Although the benefits of evaporative cooling may be easily obtained, its application has performance limitations. Theoretically, the minimum temperature that can be achieved with a very efficient evaporative cooling system is the wet bulb temperature of the location where the system is used. However, climatic data recorded by [7] revealed that average ambient wet bulb temperatures in the transitional zones of Ashanti and Brong Ahafo regions and the Northern Savannah areas of Northern, Upper East and Upper West Regions of Ghana, which are the some of the main mango growing areas, are between 14 and 27oC; and average ambient relative humidity vary between 16 and 77%. Generally, the storage temperature of matured green mango is 10-15°C [8]. This means that a stand-alone evaporative cooling system cannot achieve the required storage temperature. To achieve the desired storage temperature of mango in the mango growing areas in Ghana, [9] suggests combined dehumidification and evaporative cooling. With this process, the high moisture content of the incoming atmospheric airstream is first dehumidified with a desiccant material, which also lowers the wet bulb temperature. The objective of this study therefore, was to develop analytical models, design and conduct experimental studies of the combined dehumidification and evaporative cooling storage system. Description of the Cooling System The cooling structure consists of four main parts, namely; the storage chamber, dehumidifier, air –to – air heat exchanger and evaporative cooler (or saturator). A flow diagram of the representation of the air process as on a psychrometric chart (a) and the air flow path (b) is shown in figure 1.
From figure 1, for the (b) part, the air stream at state 2 is passed through a desiccant wheel. Its moisture is partly but significantly adsorbed by the desiccant material and the heat of adsorption elevates its temperature so that a warm and rather dry air stream exits at the state 3. The air stream is then cooled successively in the heat exchanger from state 3 to state 4, and then in an evaporative cooler from state 4 to state 1. At state 1, the air is much cooler and very moist (lower dry bulb temperature and higher relative humidity) and it is then released into the storage chamber containing the mangoes. Analytical Models of the Components of the Cooling System Dehumidifer The dehumidification unit is also called absorber unit in this study. It is analysed using the first law of thermodynamics, and conservation of mass assuming steady flow as in equations (1) and (2). The first law is written as
The maximum possible change in moisture is a property that is defined by the configuration of the absorber when operating under adiabatic conditions. Since the configuration is a counter flow pattern, the vapour pressure of TEG at the top of the absorber is the lowest because it has the lowest temperature and highest concentration when it enters. The air vapour pressure is also the lowest at the top since its temperature is the highest and the humidity the lowest at the exit. As long as the air vapour pressure is higher than the liquid vapour pressure, dehumidification will take place. Therefore the best the unit can perform is to lower the vapour pressure of the air to that of the incoming liquid and once the vapour pressures are equal, dehumidification stops. Therefore the overall effectiveness of the unit can be calculated if it is assumed that the best operation is when dehumidification stops. This means, dehumidification stops when is equal to (i.e. equal vapour pressures). The minimum specific humidity (humidity ratio) can be calculated from the vapour pressures desired which corresponds to the TEG vapour pressure at the entrance and is written as shown in equation (4).
The heat exchanger was tested for cross-over contamination to ensure it was operating satisfactorily. Saturator The saturator, also known as evaporative cooling unit, is used to evaporate moisture into the air and its performance is described by its saturation efficiency. When the temperature of the water that is being evaporated approaches the wet bulb temperature of the incoming air, in the process of adiabatic saturation, equation (8) can be used to evaluate the saturation efficiency of the unit, (8) If the water being supplied is warmer than the wet bulb temperature of the air entering (which was the case in this study) then the equations in the sections following are valid for a cooling tower operation. A cooling tower was not built for this work. Water was supplied using tap water, which was modelled as a cooling tower to determine the volume. Figure 2 shows a schematic diagram of a counter-flow cooling tower for which the differential volume element was used to evaluate the mass and energy balance. As part of the analysis, the heat transfer through the walls and water loss by drift were ignored and steady flow conditions used. Therefore, for differential volume element in figure 2 the energy balance is:
Equation (16) describes the condition line between incoming and exiting air states. This equation was solved on a computer using FORTRAN codes. In the solution, the inlet and exit temperatures, water flow rate and entering air state are assumed to be known. Equation (16) was solved at state one using the inlet air and exiting water states. State two was arbitrarily located along the condition line and the properties of air at this new state can be determined. To calculate the water temperature corresponding to the state two, equation (10) was rewritten as
Equation (16) was then solved at state two and the above procedure was continued until the water temperature, calculated from equation (17), reaches the inlet temperature. This procedure also determined the exit air state. The accuracy of this solution depends on the size of incremental changes at the air state when arbitrarily locating state two. The equation for the entire cooling tower is given by equation (18)
This is what was used to evaluate the performance of the cooling system. Design of the Cooing System Components The refrigeration system components in this study were designed and constructed or selected from manufacturers stock. The saturator and absorber units were two units that had to be designed and constructed. Other pieces of equipment required such as the heat exchanger, fans, etc. were purchased and assembled to complete the experimental apparatus.
Dehumidifier As shown in the schematic diagram of the absorber unit (dehumidifier) in figure 3, air enters at the bottom and flows to the top while the TEG enters at the top and is spread into the air stream and flows over the finned tube heat exchangers. Chilled water from a cooling tower was supplied to the heat exchanger at the bottom. But, in the actual experiments the cooling tower was not built, instead tap water was used and a cooling tower volume estimated from heat transfer in the absorber. The water flowing through the heat exchangers from the bottom to the top, parallel to the air flow, picks up heat and is returned to the cooling tower.
The unit was designed to handle 0.118 m3 s -1 to 0.236 m3 s -1 of air and have inside flow dimensions set at 0.61 m by 0.2 m. The internal structure of the absorber unit consists of two continuous finned tube heat exchangers. The frame is galvanised steel. The tubes are 1.59 cm copper tubes with 0.06 cm wall thickness. The plate fins are 0.03 cm thick aluminium with a waffle pattern at 3.9 fins per centimetre. Air –to – Air Heat Exchanger Combined with the evaporative cooler, the heat exchanger provides indirect cooling to the process air stream. The heat exchanger was designed to handle air flows up to 0.708 m3 s -1 with an effectiveness of about 0.8. The physical structure data and appearance is shown in figure 4. It was
constructed from different types of materials. The casing was constructed from galvanised steel, the heat transfer plates from aluminium, and nylon was used as a sealer. The materials do not readily deteriorate and the components are biologically inert thus do not promote bacteria growth.
Dimension: 595 × 595× 610 mm Weight: 34 kg Plate Spacing: 3 mm Plate area: 59 m2 Evaporative Cooling Unit The evaporative cooling unit is the primary device used in this experiment and was the first stage of cooling in the system. The unit consists of several components such as reservoir, pump, distribution header, splash cover and evaporative pad (or media). The water was collected in the reservoir where it was pumped to the distribution header and spread over the media. The water then flows through the media while air passes perpendicular to the water flow. The air picks up moisture as it passes through the media and was saturated to 95- 100%. The media was sized to handle a maximum flow of 0.47 m3 s -1 with estimated saturation effectiveness of up to 95%. The media is like an honey comb structure with the flutes angled at 45o . These flutes were situated such that they were sloping downward into the direction of flow. This allows falling water a longer residence time in the media with the result of an increase in effectiveness, while preventing water carry over through the media. As shown in figure 5, water was supplied to the top of the media through a water distribution system. The distribution header is a lattice of piping that distributes water over the top of the media. Holes are drilled in the top of the top distribution header and a splash cover is fastened above the media to break up the water jet. The lattice of piping was designed to allow even distribution over a wide range of flows.
Regenerator Unit The primary function of the regenerator was to remove the moisture from the TEG after each test. A detailed study of the operation and efficiency of this component was not made except that it adequately regenerated the TEG. Experimental Procedure The components were oriented as shown in figure 1 such that dehumidification and cooling of the air was obtained. Humidity measurements of the incoming and exiting air were taken. Dry bulb measurements were taken before and after the dehumidifier, heat exchanger and evaporative cooler. Wet bulb temperatures were taken after the evaporative cooler and on both sides of the heat exchanger. Water and TEG temperatures were taken entering and exiting the dehumidifier unit. Pressure drop readings were taken before and after the dehumidifier, heat exchanger and evaporative cooler. Initially the concentration of the TEG was determined using the refractive index. If the concentration was 98% ± 2% the experiment was started. The fan was started to circulate air through the system. The pump to the saturator was turned on and the water flow was adjusted to 0.05 ls-1 . The water flow through the absorber was set at 0.0, 0.063, 0.126, 0.189 or 0.252 ls-1 . The system was allowed to run until the water temperature in the saturator reached a temperature within 1oC of the incoming wet bulb temperature of the air. The water entering the absorber was adjusted to this temperature by balancing hot and cold water from the tap until the required water temperature was reached. The system was then allowed to run approximately one and half hours to develop and ensure steady readings. At this point a data logger was started to record temperatures, pressures and humidity at 5 minutes intervals. After 3 readings without TEG flowing, the TEG pump was started. The TEG was allowed to flow until dehumidification had discontinued. Dehumidification was considered to have reached its limit when the exiting temperature and humidity readings were unchanged for 15 minutes. Total run time of the system was approximately 3 hours. After the system was turned off the TEG was pumped to the regenerator. The regeneration of the TEG usually required 3 hours of operation. The TEG was then cooled to room temperature for reuse. CONCLUSION Analytical models were developed to enable a comprehensive and accurate design of the refrigeration system. Mathematical modelling and simulation approach to design offers horticultural and storage or preservation industries and researchers a rapid means of assessing cold storage system modifications without expensive trial and error experimentation, and this was the reason for using analytical models to first analyse the system components. The analytical models used to analyse the performance of each of the components constructed and tested were used together with the storage requirements of mangoes and climatic conditions of the savannah and transitional zones, which are some of the main mango growing areas in Ghana. The cold storage system’s performance was found to be dependent on the incoming air conditions and the water flow rate. Ambient air temperatures varied from 20.0°C to 36°C dry bulb temperatures and 14.0°C to 25.0°C wet bulb temperatures. In this range the units produced a maximum of 2 tons of cooling with a water supply of 0.252 l/s and a minimum of 0.31 tons with a water supply of 0 l/s. The system’s overall performance varied for water supplies of 0, 0.63, 1.26, 1.89 and 0.252 l/s from 0.31 to 0.96, 0.66 to 1.29, 1.02 to 1.72, 0.96 to 1.81 and 1.31 to 2 tons respectively. The cooling was affected by the systems dependence on the inlet conditions thus resulting in a range of cooling performances for each flow rate. Freshly harvested mango fruits were used for the validation and the observed average temperature in the cooler was found to be approximately 12oC and the corresponding average relative humidity was 90%. The observed storage temperature and relative humidity were found to be within the range of the recommended storage conditions of mangoes. The fruits in the storage structure still looked green-yellow, firmly fibrous and same sweet-mild flavour after four weeks in the storage system. Three key assumptions were made in solving the models with a simulation programme (the FORTRAN codes): no heat transfer through the walls, no water loss by drift and steady flow conditions. The accuracy of the programme depended on the size of the incremental changes in the air state when arbitrarily locating state two.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Authors acknowledge the immense help received from the scholars whose articles have been cited and included in the references of this manuscript. The authors are also grateful to authors/ editors / publishers of all those articles, journals and books from where the literature for this article has been reviewed and discussed. This work was carried out with the aid of a grant from the International Development Research Centre, Ottawa, Canada. Information on the Centre is available on the web at www.idrc.ca
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1635http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16351. Schippers, RR. African Indigenous Vegetables, An overview of the cultivated species. UK: Chatham Press; 2000
2. Sikpa, A. Ghana Mango Exports to Europe Breaks the 1000 ton Mark in 2007. Accessed on 5 July, 2012 from http://www.freshplaza.com/news_detail.asp?i d=20890
3. Awafo, EA and Dzisi, KA. Appropriate Design of Evaporative Cooler for Mango Storage in the Transitional and Savannah Zones of Ghana. Int. J. Eng. Sci. Res 2012; 3(2): 687-695.
4. Tefera, A, Tilahun, S and Wodestadik, K. Effects of disinfection, packaging and evaporatively cooled storage on sugar content of mango. Afr. J. Biotechnol 2008; 7(1): 65- 72.
5. Dash, SK and Chandra, P. Computer Simulation of the Environment of Evaporatively Cooled Storage Structure. Inst. Eng. (India) 2003; 84(1): 33-38.
6. Camargo, JR, Ebinuma, CD and Siveria, JL. Experimental performance of a direct evaporative cooler operating during summer in Brazilian city. Int. J. Refrigeration 2005; (28):1124-1132.
7. GMSD. Annual climatic data of Ghana. Ghana Meteorological Services Department (GMSD), Accra, Ghana; 2005
8. Kader, AA, Kasmire RF, Mitchell, FG, Reid, MS, Sommer, NF and Thompson, JF Postharvest technology of horticultural crops. California Cooperative and Extension Services 1985; Series 3311.
9. Awafo, EA Modelling and simulation of evaporative cooled storage structure for mango in the transitional and savannah zones of Ghana [Ph.D.Thesis]. Kwame Nkrumah University of Science and Technology, Ghana; 2012
10. Union Carbide. Glycols. Union Carbide Corporation; 1990.
11. Leinhard IV, JH and Leinhard V, JH. A Heat Transfer Textbook, 3rd ed. U.S.A.: Phlogiston; 2006. p. 120 – 122.
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20TechnologyDESIGN AND OPTIMIZATION OF HYBRID RENEWABLE ENERGY SYSTEM (2MWH/D) FOR SUSTAINABLE AND ECONOMICAL POWER SUPPLY AT JEC JABALPUR
English188197Madhav Singh ThakurEnglish Bhupendra GuptaEnglish Veerendra KumarEnglish Mukesh PandeyEnglishA hybrid renewable energy system may be used to reduce dependency on either conventional energy or renewable system. Optimization of hybrid renewable energy systems looks into the process of selecting the best components and its sizing with appropriate operation strategy to provide cheap, efficient, reliable and cost effective alternative energy. In this paper a methodology has been develop for optimum planning of hybrid PV-Wind system with some battery backup. The local solar radiation, wind data and components database from different manufactures are analyzed and simulated in HOMER to assess the technical and economic viability of the integrated system. Performance of each component will be evaluated and finally sensitivity analysis will be performed to optimize the system at different conditions. The system architecture includes PV System 100KW, 5 Northern Power NW100/19 Wind Turbine, Diesel Generator 10KW, Battery 25 (Beacon Smart Energy), Inverter 100KW and Rectifier 100KW. This paper gives the design idea of optimized PV-Solar and Wind Hybrid Energy System for Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur electrical load over conventional electrical grid system for a particular site in central India (Jabalpur). For this hybrid system ,the meteorological data of Solar Insolation, hourly wind speed, are taken for Jabalpur -Central India (Longitude 79ο.59’and Latitude 23ο.10’ ) and the pattern of load consumption of JEC electrical load data are studied and suitably modelled for optimization of the hybrid energy system using HOMER software. The simulation and optimization result gives the best optimized sizing of wind turbine and solar array with diesel generator. This system is more cost effective and environmental friendly over the conventional grid system. It should reduced approximate 70%-80% running cost over conventional grid system and also reduced the emission of CO2 and other harmful gasses in environments. It is expected that the newly developed and installed system will provide very good opportunities for MPEB in near future.
EnglishHybrid energy system, Grid connected system, Wind turbine, Solar PV-cells, Convertor and HOMAR 2.81.INTRODUCTION
India is gifted with Renewable Energy (RE) potential like wind, hydro, solar, tidal, geothermal energy resources etc. Reliable and cost effective power solutions for the Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur into rural and remote areas presents a very challenging problem. Grids are either not available or their extensions can be extremely costly in remote area. Although initial costs are low, powering these sites with generators require significant maintenance, high fuel consumption and delivery costs due to high in fuel prices. Recent research and development of Renewable energy sources have shown excellent potential as a form of contribution to conventional power generation systems. In order to meet sustained load demands of Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur during varying natural conditions, different energy sources and converters need to be integrated with each other for extended usage of alternative energy sources such as windsolar Hybrid Energy System for Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur. The use of the stand-alone solar-wind with diesel and Battery backup system for the power supply of remote areas may give an economically attractive alternative for grid source in near future. This paper gives the design idea of wind, solar photovoltaic hybrid energy system. Based on the energy consumption of Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur and the availability of renewable energy sources, it was decided to implement an innovative stand alone Hybrid Energy System combining small wind turbine-generator, solar photo-voltaic panels, battery storage, advance power electronic equipment and existing diesel generators. Renewable Energy Sources for Hybrid System The availability of renewable energy resources at Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur is an important factor to develop the hybrid system .Many parts of the India wind and solar energy is abundantly available. The energy sources are intermittent and naturally available; due to these factor our first choice to Power the Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur will be renewable energy sources such as wind and solar. Weather data are important factor for pre- feasibility study of renewable hybrid energy system for any particular site. In central India wind speed is an average and sun brightness is strong. Here the Wind and Solar energy resources data are taken from NASA for Jabalpur India (Longitude 79ο .59’and Latitude 23ο .10’) and shown in Table .
Solar Resource
The solar resource was used for a site in Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur at a location of 23ο .10’N latitude and 79ο .59’E longitude. Solar radiation data for this region was obtained from the NASA Surface Meteorology and Solar Energy web site. The annual average solar radiation for this area is 5.43 kWh/m2 /d. Figure 1 shows the solar radiation profile over a one-year period. Solar and wind energy systems are characterized by relatively high capital costs, low operation and maintenance (OandM) costs, and zero fuel costs.
The high capital cost has been a major barrier to widespread use by utilities. However, the costs of both PV and wind systems have decreased substantially in recent years and further reductions over the next 10 years are expected. Renewable energy systems such as PV, solar thermal electricity such as Dish-Stirling systems, and WT are appropriate solar and wind technologies that can be considered for electric power generation at the distribution system level. Other renewable energy technologies, such as the solar central receiver, hydro-electric generation, geothermal, and large wind farms, are normally connected to the grid at the sub transmission or transmission level because of the higher power capacities of these systems. Presently, PV and WT technologies appear to be the most viable candidates for integration into power distribution systems. Sunlight is converted directly to direct current (dc) electricity by PV cells made of semiconductor materials such as silicon. The cells are wired in series-parallel combinations to form modules or panels. The dc is converted to alternating current (ac) by an inverter or power conditioning unit.
Wind energy resource A monthly average wind dataset for Jabalpur ware collected from Environment Jabalpur climate. This is an average of last ten year and indicates that annual average wind speed and shown in Figure 2. From the above given data, wind speed probability function and average hourly wind speed throughout the year is shown in Figure 2. The autocorrelation factor (randomness in wind speed) is found to be 0.85. Average wind speed in the summer season is slightly higher than the winter season as shown in Figure 4. Wind turbines generate electric power by extracting kinetic energy from the wind to drive a turbine connected to an ac generator. The power in wind available to a turbine is proportional to the cube of the wind speed. Thus, wind speed variations will cause variations in the wind turbine power output. Methodology of Hybrid Energy System Design Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur is situated at Longitude 79ο .59’and Latitude 23ο .10’ location having 7 department and electrical load 2Mwh/day and of electricity bill 70-72 lakh per year. In this research work we are designing a hybrid renewable energy system which can replace the existing one or partially replace with cost effectiveness and payback period. For 2Mwh/day we propose this hybrid renewable energy system as shown in figure 3.The simulation and optimization result gives the best optimized sizing of wind turbine and solar array with diesel generator.
Electrical Load The load profile is based on a hypothetical Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur (MP). Figure 1 illustrates this profile. A small base load of 15 KW occurs throughout the day and night. Small peaks of 30 KW occur in the morning and at noon, while the majority of the load occurs in the evening. This evening load, with a peak load of 60 KW, would likely include compact fluorescent lighting and a radio. The total daily load averages 2 Mega watt-hours per day. HOMER can perform a sensitivity analysis by accepting multiple values for a particular input variable such as the average load. This analysis determines how changes in the input variable affect the performance of the system and the relative ranking of different systems. By performing the sensitivity analysis over a large range of load sizes, the study simulates a range of load types from a single home to a large community. While this scaling may represent the overall total load of a larger village, in reality the profile would not necessarily remain the same shape. Variations in individual home loads would tend to smooth out the overall profile. Additionally, daytime loads such as microenterprises, schools, and clinics would most likely change the shape of the profile. For simplicity of analysis, the load profile was not modified as the load was increased, but rather kept constant in shape and scaled in size.
Wind Turbine The wind resource is ultimately generated by the sun, but it tends to be very dependent on location. Over most of the earth, the average wind speed varies from one season to another. It is also likely to be affected by general weather patterns and the time of day. It is not uncommon for a site to experience a number of days of relatively high winds and for those days to be followed by others of lower winds. The wind also exhibits short term variations in speed and direction. This is known as turbulence. Turbulent fluctuations take place over time periods of seconds to minutes. For this study BWC Northern Power Nw/100/19kw AC wind turbine has been used which is manufactured by Bergey Wind power. The installation, capital and OandM cost of this turbine is respectively $110000, $70000 and $500. The wind speed is typically modelled as increasing with height according to a 1/7 power law. V =Vo [h/ho] 1/7 ……………………………………….(i)
Solar Radiation Solar energy is the most promising of the renewable energy sources in view of its apparent unlimited potential. The sun radiates its energy at the rate of about 3.8 x 1023 kW per second. Most of this energy is transmitted radially as electromagnetic radiation which comes to about 1.5kW/m2 at the boundary of the atmosphere. After traversing the atmosphere, a square metre of the earth's surface can receive as much as 1kW of solar power, averaging to about 0.5 over all hours of daylight. The solar radiation resource is fundamentally determined by the location on the earth’s surface, the date, and the time of day. Those factors will determine the maximum level of radiation. Other factors, such as eight above sea level, water vapour or pollutants in the atmosphere, and cloud cover, decrease the radiation level below the maximum possible. Solar radiation does not experience the same type of turbulence that wind does, but there can be variations over the short term. Most often, these are related to the passage of clouds. The initial installation cost of photovoltaic arrays are taken approximate as $5000 and $3000, respectively. The lifetime of the PV arrays are taken as 25 years and no tracking system is included in the PV [5].
Power Converter A power electronic converter is needed to maintain the flow of energy between the AC and DC buses. Three different sizes of converter (0, 10 and 20 kW) were fed into the analysis. Lifetime of a unit was assumed to be 25 years with an efficiency of 90%. According to the components defined a converter is required to convert AC-DC or DC-AC. The installation costs for a 1.0kW converter is $700, replacement cost is $460 and OandM cost is considered practically zero. A power electronic converter is needed to maintain flow of energy between the ac and dc components [5]. Grid This proposed system is a grid-connected system in which the Grid acts as a backup power component. The grid is activated and supplies electricity when there is not enough renewable energy power to meet the load. Batteries For the purpose of energy storage, lead acid batteries are included in this analysis for economic considerations. The use of hydrogen as another possible storage alternative is not currently economically viable given the prohibitive costs of electrolyzers and fuel cells and the low efficiency resulting from the electricity–hydrogen–electricity conversion cycle. In this case, commercially available battery models, such as Surrette 6CS25P model (6 V, 1156 Ah, 9645 kWh), were used in the scheme. Cost of one battery was considered $500 with replacement and operation and maintenance (OandM) costs of $300 and $5/year, respectively. To find an optimum configuration, the battery bank was assumed to contain any number of 0, 10, 20, 30, or 50 batteries. Generator A generator consumes fuel to produce electricity, and possibly heat as a by-product. HOMER’s generator module is flexible enough to model a wide variety of generators, including internal combustion engine generators, micro turbines, fuel cells, Stirling engines, thermo photovoltaic generators, and thermoelectric generators. HOMER can model a power system comprising as many as three generators, each of which can be ac or dc, and each of which can consume a different fuel. The principal physical properties of the generator are its maximum and minimum electrical power output, its expected lifetime in operating hours, the type of fuel it consumes, and its fuel curve, which relates the quantity of fuel consumed to the electrical power produced. Inverter The efficiencies of the inverter and rectifier were assumed to be 90% and 85% respectively for all sizes Considered. The simulations were done for each system switching the power between the inverter and the generator. Both devices were not allowed to operate in parallel. Initial and replacement cost for the converter is 700$, with no cost for operation and maintenance.
Optimization of Renewable Hybrid Energy System USING HOMER Software The Hybrid Optimization Model for Electric Renewable (HOMER 2.81) is used for designing standalone electric power systems that employ some combination of wind turbines, photovoltaic panels, or diesel generators to produce electricity. The cost benefit analysis of a wind turbine-solar hybrid system was done using HOMER software and comparison was also made with the cost per kilowatt of central grid or utility supply. The software requires initial information including energy resources, economical and technical constraints, energy storage requirements and system control strategies. Inputs like component type, capital, replacement, operation and maintenance costs, efficiency, operational life, etc. are also required. The goal of the optimization process is to determine the optimal value of each decision variable that interests the modeller. A decision variable is a variable over which the system designer has control and for which HOMER can consider multiple possible values in its optimization process. The software executes three major tasks; simulation, optimization, sensitivity analysis. Possible decision variables in HOMER include: ? The size of the PV array ? The number of wind turbines ? The size of each generator ? The number of batteries ? The size of the ac–dc converter RESULTS AND DISCUSSION The above proposed hybrid system supply the power to the Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur (MP) continuously throughout the year. An optimal system is defined as a solution for hybrid system configuration that is capable of meeting the load demand of Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur (MP). From the simulation result the installation of wind solar hybrid system configuration for various locations are most suitable power solutions for Grid transformer station network in Indian sites. Considering present cost analysis of a PV/Wind hybrid system is suitable for stand-alone loads around Jabalpur. From the optimization results the best optimal combination of option I energy system components are Five 100Kw Northern Power NW/100, 100 kW PV-Array and 10 kW diesel Generator, 100 KW Convertor and 25 Becon smart energy battery. Total net present cost (NPC), Capital cost and cost of energy (COE) for such a system is $1458,954, $1138,500 and 0.227$/kWh, respectively for one year. The detailed optimization results are shown in Figure 9.The net project cost is 72947700 Rs and the expenditure of conventional existing grid system is 7250000 Rs per year. Thus the simple payback period is the ratio of net project cost to the expenditure of conventional existing grid system cost per year so pay back year is 10 years.
Homer software was used to determine the optimum hybrid configuration of Jabalpur Engineering College, Jabalpur (Longitude 79ο .59’and Latitude 23ο .10’ ). As a result of which the Option I, is proposed for the site. The system architecture includes PV System 100KW, 5 Northern Power NW100/19, Diesel Generator 10KW, Battery 25 (Beacon Smart Energy), Inverter 100KW and Rectifier 100KW. The Net Project cost is = 72947700 Rs the payback period of the proposed hybrid renewable energy system is 10 years. The system is designed for 25 years. Thus concluded that after 10 years next 15 years we can enjoy the profits with green energy resources which is sustainable and environmental friendly. The proposed system is very good choice in the remote and village areas also. The integration of renewable energy technologies into electric power distribution systems enhances the benefits associated with fuel savings and avoidance of emissions penalties. Renewable energy technologies such as photovoltaic, and wind turbine power are environmentally beneficial sources of electric power generation. It should reduced approximate 70%-80% running cost over conventional grid system and also reduced the emission of CO2 and other harmful gasses in environments.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1636http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16361. 1. Zeinab Abdallah M.Elhassan, Muhammad Fauzi Moh Zain, Kamaruzzman Sopain and Arafa Awadalla, Design of Hybrid Power System of Renewable Energy for Domestic used in Khartoum.Journal of applied science 11(12):2270-2275, 2011 2. GM Shafiullah, Amanullah M.T. , ABM Shawkat Ali, Dennis Jarvis, Peter Wolfs, Economic Analysis of Hybrid Renewable Model for Subtropical Climate. Int. J. of Thermal and Environmental Engineering Volume 1, No. 2 (2010) 57-65 3. S. M. Hakimi, S. M. Moghaddas-Tafreshi, and H. HassanzadehFard, Optimal sizing of reliable hybrid renewable energy system considered various load types. AIP Journal of Renewable and sustainable energy.J. Renewable Sustainable Energy 3, 062701 (2011); doi: 10.1063/1.3655372 4. Deepak Kumar Lal, Bibhuti Bhusan Dash, and A. K. Akella, Optimization of PV/Wind/Micro-Hydro/Diesel Hybrid Power System in HOMER for the Study Area. International Journal on Electrical Engineering and Informatics ? Volume 3, Number 3, 2011 5. Pragya Nema, R.K. Nema, Saroj Rangnekar, PV-solar / wind hybrid energy system for GSM/CDMA type mobile telephony base station. International Journal of energy and Environment, Volume 1, Issue 2, 2010 6. 6. Jose´ L. Bernal-Agust?´n , Rodolfo DufoLo´ pez,Simulation and optimization of standalone hybrid renewable energy systems, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews 13 (2009) 2111–2118 7. Prabodh Bajpai, Sowjan Kumar, Sizing Optimization and Analysis of a Stand-alone WTG System Using Hybrid Energy Storage Technologies. PEA-AIT International Conference on Energy and Sustainable Development: Issues and Strategies (ESD 2010) the Empress Hotel, Chiang Mai, Thailand. 2-4 June 2010. 8. G.R.K.D.Satya Prasad, Dr. K. Vijaya Kumar Reddy, Dr. CH. Saibabu M.Tech., Ph.D, Integration of renewable energy sources in Zero energy buildings with economical and environmental aspects by using HOMER. G.R.K.D.Satya Prasad* et al. / (IJAEST) Vol No. 9, Issue No. 2, 212 – 217 9. J. B. Fulzele, Subroto Dutt, Optimum Planning of Hybrid Renewable Energy System Using HOMER. International Journal of Electrical and Computer Engineering (IJECE) Vol. 2, No. 1, February 2012 10. M.J. Khan*, M.T. Iqbal1, Pre-feasibility study of stand-alone hybrid energy systems for applications in Newfoundland. ELSEVIER, Renewable Energy 30 (2005) 835–854 11. Souissi Ahmed, Hasnaoui Othman, Sallami Anis, Optimal Sizing of a Hybrid System of Renewable Energy for a Reliable Load Supply without Interruption. European Journal of Scientific Research ISSN 1450-216X 12. URL: Home page of homer, available www.nrel.gov.homer 13. URL:http://www.homerenergy.com/versonhistory.html 14. Electric power research institute intelligrid. 15. URL: www.mnes.nic.in 16. URL:http://www.teriin.org/index.php 17. URL:http://www.homerenergy.com 18. URL:http://rredc.nrel.gov/solar/olddata/nsrdb 19. URL:http://www.solarbuzz.com 20. URL:http://www.skepticalscience.com/truecost-of-coal-power.html 21. URL:http://eosweb.larc.nasa.gov/sse
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20TechnologyEXPERIMENTAL ANALYSIS OF VARYING THE REFRIGERATION OIL PERCENTAGE IN COMPRESSOR ON THE PERFORMANCE OF VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
English198202M. Yohan English G.Kiran KumarEnglishA refrigerator is a machine which attains and maintains the temperature of a space below that of surroundings by transferring heat from the space to be cooled to the surroundings with the help of a compressor. Majority of the refrigerators works on the vapor compression refrigeration system which consists of components like compressors, condensers, expansion valve and evaporator. The performance of the system depends on the performance of all the components of the system. A compressor is an important device used to raise the pressure of refrigerant to a level at which it can condense by rejecting heat to the cooling medium in the condenser. In any compressors refrigeration oil is required to prevent the friction and heat generated with in it. In general all the domestic refrigerators have hermetically sealed compressors, for these refrigerator compressors having the refrigerant R-134a and it is required good properties of refrigeration oil is required to prevent the heat generated with in the compressors. This present experimental work focus on compressor work by varying the refrigeration oil percentage on a refrigerator system capacity of 165 lts. The compressor work and performance is calculated by varying refrigeration oil percentage used in it.
EnglishINTRODUCTION
A compressor is a device which is used to raise the pressure of refrigerant to a level at which it can condense by rejecting heat to the cooling medium in the condenser. The compressor is an important device has to draw the refrigerant vapour from the evaporator, so that a low pressure and temperature can be maintained at which the refrigerant can boil extracting heat from the refrigerated space. The main important part of the vapour compression refrigeration system is compressor. In any compressor device piston, connecting rod, crankshaft and so many mechanical components are there. These parts are moving relative to one another. Because of these moving action the components are rubbed to each other so that friction is generated and also heat. so to prevent this heat generation lubricating oil is used . In refrigeration terminology we called refrigeration oil, with the help of refrigeration oil to prevent the heat generated with in the compressor. Generally every refrigeration oil has properties like viscosity, acidity, floc point, pour point, dielectric strength and chemical stability.. Actually these properties of refrigeration oil to effect the compressor life and performance. Generally in the domestic refrigerators have hermetically sealed compressors. In present refrigerator 1/7 HP hermetically sealed compressor is used. This paper is an experimental approach to calculate the compressor work and performance by varying the percentage of refrigeration oil. If the compressor is having low percentage of refrigeration oil the compressor parts are damaged due to more friction and heat is generated. Suppose the compressor having more percentage of refrigeration oil the suction line of the compressor is blocked due to less compression is occurred in it. Therefore proper percentage of refrigeration oil is used to run the compressor efficiently.
PRESENT WORK
The procedure for the present work is as follows. In this present experimental work a 165 lts capacity of domestic refrigerator is selected, it has 1/7 HP compressor, condenser ,expansion valve and evaporator. The work focuses to run the compressor effectively and also performance of the refrigerator system. This is only possible by providing sufficient refrigeration oil percentage used in the compressor. The rate of compressor work and performance can be increased depends on the sufficient refrigeration oil percentage used in it. The present work to find out the compressor performance and life by using and varying the refrigeration oil percentage. And also find out the optimum percentage of refrigeration oil to run the compressor efficiently. In order to know the performance characteristics of the vapor compression refrigeration system pressure and temperature gauges are installed at each entry and exit of the component. Experiments are conducted on refrigeration oil percentage in the compressor. All the values of pressures and temperatures are tabulated. The domestic refrigerator selected for the present work has the following specifications. Capacity of refrigerator - 165liters Refrigerant used - R134a Compressor - 1/7 HP Hermetically Capacity sealed. Condenser Length - 8.5m Diameter - 6.5mm Evaporator Length - 7.62m Diameter - 6.5mm Capillary tube Length - 2.128m Diameter - 0.8mm Refrigeration oil type Zed-plus lubricating oil grade-68
Where P1 = Compressor suction pressure P2 = Compressor discharge pressure P3= Condensing pressure P4= Evaporator pressure T1= Compressor suction temperature T2= Compressor discharge temperature T3= Condensing temperature T4= Evaporator temperature
Caluclation performance parameters:- 1. Compressor work = h2-h1 2. Net refrigerating effect = h1-h4 3. Coefficient of performance(COP) COP = (h1-h4)/ (h2-h1) For Test no 1 Taken the refrigerant oil = 200ml h1= 446kJ/kg h2= 520kJ/kg h3= 270kJ/kg h4= 270kJ/kg 1. Compressor work = 520-446=74kJ/kg 2.Net refrigerating effect= 446-270=176 kJ/kg 3.Coefficient of performance(COP) COP= 176/74= 2.37 4.Theoretical compressor power=74/60=1.23kw For Test no 2 Taken the refrigerant oil = 210ml h1= 444kj/kg h2= 505kj/kg h3= 268kj/kg h4= 268kJ/kg 1. Compressor work = 505-444=61kJ/kg 2.Net refrigerating effect= 444-268=176 3.Coefficient of performance(COP) COP= 176/61 = 2.88 4.Theoretical compressor power=61/60=1.02kw For Test no 3 Taken the refrigerant oil = 220ml h1= 438 kj/kg h2= 492 kj/kg h3= 268 kj/kg h4= 268 kj/kg 1. Compressor work = 492-438= 54 kj/kg 2.Net refrigerating effect= 438-268= 170 kj/kg 3.Coefficient of performance(COP) COP = 170/54 = 3.15 4.Theoretical compressor power=54/60=0.9kw For Test no 4 Taken the refrigerant oil = 230ml h1= 452 kj/kg h2= 522 kj/kg h3= 266kj/kg h4= 266kj/kg 1. Compressor work = 522-452=70 kj/kg 2.Net refrigerating effect= 452-266=186 kj/kg 3.Coefficient of performance(COP) COP = 186/70= 2.65 4.Theoretical compressor power=70/60=1.16kw For Test no 5 Taken the refrigerant oil = 240ml h1= 452 kj/kg h2= 526 kj/kg h3= 274 kj/kg h4= 274 kj/kg 1. Compressor work = 526-452=74 kj/kg 2.Net refrigerating effect= 452-274= 178 kj/kg
3.Coefficient of performance(COP) COP= 178/74= 2.40 4.Theoretical compressor power=74/60=1.23kw
RESULTS AND CONCLUSIONS
Referring to graph 1 it is seen that the COP of Refrigerant R-134a is increased from 2.37 to 3.15 with the lubricating oil quantity from 200ml to 220ml.after that the COP is decreased from 3.15 to 2.40 with the lubricating oil quantity from 220ml to 240ml. Referring the graph 2 it is seen that the compressor power is decreased from 1.32Kw to 0.9Kw with the lubricating oil quantity from 200ml to 220ml.after that the compressor power is increased from 0.9Kw to 1.23Kw with the lubricating oil quantity from 220ml to 240ml.
The present experimental setup gives the following results
1. Cop is increased 24.87% with the lubricating oil quantity from 200ml to 220ml .
2. Compressor power is reduced 31.81% with the lubricating oil quantity from 200ml to 220ml.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1637http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16371. Basic Refrigeration and Air conditioning by P.N Ananthanarayana, Cremaschi L., Hwang Y., Radermacher R., 2005, Experimental investigation of oil retention in air conditioning systems, Int. J. Refrigeration, 28: 1018-1028
2. Knapp, M. H. The use of synthetic lubricants in compressor. Purdue Compressor Tech. Conf., 1972, 480-482.
3. Kedzierski M. A., 2001, The effect of lubricant concentration, miscibility, and viscosity on R134a pool boiling, Int. J. Refrigeration, 24(4): 348-366.
4. Sundaresan, S. G. and Finkenstadt, W. R. PAG and polyol ester lubricant—candidates for use with HFC-134a in refrigeration compressors. ASHRAE Conference, 1992.
5. Short, G. D. High-viscosity ester lubricants for alternative refrigerants. ASHRAE Conference, 1992
Radiance Research AcademyInternational Journal of Current Research and Review2231-21960975-5241420EnglishN2012October20General SciencesHYPERCHAOTIC BEHAVIOR OF A FIFTH-ORDER AUTONOMOUS ELECTRIC CIRCUIT
English7379S. Manimaran English V. BalachandranEnglish G. KandibanEnglishIn this paper, in order to show some interesting phenomena of fifth-order hyperchaotic autonomous electric circuit with a smooth cubic nonlinearity, different kinds of attractors, time waveforms and corresponding power spectra of systems are presented, respectively. The perturbation transforms an unpredictable hyperchaotic behavior into a predictable hyperchaotic or periodic motion via stabilization of unstable, aperiodic, or periodic orbits of the strange hyperchaotic attractor. One advantage of the method is its robustness against noise. A theoretical analysis of the circuit equations is presented, along with experimental simulation and numerical results.
EnglishFifth-order autonomous electric circuit; smooth cubic nonlinearity; chaos; hyperchaos.INTRODUCTION
Chaos and its related bifurcation phenomena have been an area of intense research in the last three decades. From the 1980s to the 1990s, simple and natural chaos generating circuits were proposed and laboratory experiments were carried out [1-5]. Matsumoto etal. insisted that their proposed circuits are natural (not artificial) circuits with only two terminal nonlinear elements. One of the major problems in this field is in the difficulty to prove the generation of chaos in a rigorous sense. A lot of researchers attempted to solve this problem by adopting simpler dynamics. As far as we know, one approach is based on the use of a singular perturbation (slow–fast) method, and the other is based on the use of a piecewise-linear technique [6-9]. Over the last two decades, hyperchaos has been intensively studied in many engineering-oriented applied fields, such as nonlinear circuits, secure communications, lasers, neural networks, control, synchronization, and so on. In chaotic secure communication, a chaotic signal is used to mask the message to be transmitted. As we know, the normal chaotic systems have one positive Lyapunov exponent. Perez and Cerderia proved that the messages masked by such a normal chaotic system are not always safe. However, Pecora found that this problem can be overcome by using the higherdimensional hyperchaotic systems, which have an increasing randomness and higher unpredictability. In general, a hyperchaotic system is defined as a chaotic system with at least two positive exponents, implying that its dynamics are expended in several different directions simultaneously [7]. It means that hyperchaotic systems have more complex dynamical behaviors that can be used to improve the security of chaotic communication systems. Therefore, the theoretical design and circuitry realization of various hyperchaotic signals have recently become the focal research topics. Historically, hyperchaos was firstly reported by Rossler. That is, the noted fourdimensional (4D) hyperchaotic autonomous system. However, the hyperchaos was firstly discovered in electronic circuits by Matsumoto and his colleagues [5]. Over the last two decades, there are various hyperchaotic systems discovered in high-dimensional systems. Typical examples are hyperchaotic Rossler system, hyperchaotic Lorenz–Haken system, hyperchaotic Chua’s circuit and hyperchaotic modified Chua’s circuit [10-16]. Very recently, hyperchaos was found numerically and experimentally by adding a simple state feedback controller or a sinusoidal parameter perturbation controller in the generalized Lorenz system, Chen system, Lu system and a unified chaotic system. In this paper, a novel fivedimensional hyperchaotic system is constructed based on a modified autonomous Van der Pol Duffing oscillator [17]. The strong hyperchaotic nature is then verified by power spectrum, investigating its time waveforms and numerical confirmation. Furthermore, all above dynamical behaviors are verified by physically electronic circuit. Experimental observations are also given in this paper. Circuit Description and Simulation Results In order to understand chaotic circuit theory, it is important to consider the following problems: theoretical evidence for chaos, classification of chaos (e.g., classification by fractal dimension) and route to chaos [9]. These problems have been considered reasonably well for five dimensional circuits, but it is hard to analyze these problems in higher dimensional circuits. This paper considers these problems in a simple five-dimensional circuit of Fig. 1. Applying Kirchoff's laws, the set of five first-orders coupled autonomous differential equations as given below:
While V1, V2 and V3 are the voltages across the Capacitors C1, C2 and C3, iL1 and iL2 denotes the currents through the inductors L1 and L2 respectively and the characteristics of linear negative conductance is mathematically represented by 1 G 1 1 i GV ? ? . Here the term 1 2 ( ) Ni fV V ? ? representing the characteristic of the smooth cubic nonlinearity can be expressed mathematically: (2) 3 12 12 12 ( ) ( )( ) Ni fV V aV V bV V ? ?? ?? ? For our present experimental study we have chosen the following typical values of the circuit in Fig. 1. Were L1 = 33 mH, L2 = 33 mH, C1 = 85 nF, C2 = 10 nF, C3 = 100 nF and the characteristics of linear negative conductance G1 = -0.5 mS. Here the variable capacitor ‘C1’ is assumed to be the control parameter. By decreasing the value of ‘C1’ from 85 nF to 45 nF, the circuit behavior of Fig. 1 is found to transit from a period-doubling route to chaos and then to hyperchaotic attractor through period-doubling bifurcation behavior followed by period-doubling windows and boundary crisis [15-16]. The hyperchaotic attractors of fifth-order autonomous circuit with the smooth cubic nonlinearity projected onto different planes are shown in Fig. 2. Experimental time series were registered using a simulation storage oscilloscope for discrete values of C1 and C2 are shown if Fig. 3. The distribution of power in a signal x(t) is the most commonly quantified by means of the power density spectrum or simply power spectrum. It is the magnitude-square of the Fourier transforms of the signal x(t). It can detect the presence of hyperchaos when the spectrum is broad-banded. The power spectrum corresponding to the voltages V1(t) and V2(t) waveforms across the capacitors C1 and C2 for the hyperchaotic regimes are shown in Fig. 4 which resembles broad-band spectrum noise.
NUMERICAL CONFIRMATION
The hyperchaotic attractor of fifth-order autonomous circuit as shown in Fig. 1 is studied by numerical integration of the normalized differential equations [14]. For a convenient numerical analysis of the experimental system given by Eqns. (1), we rescale the parameters as:
The dynamics of Eqns. (3) now depends upon the parameters α1, α2, υ1, υ2 γ, and β. The experimental results have been verified by numerical simulation of the normalized Eqns. (3) using the standard fourth-order Runge-Kutta method for a specific choice of system parameters employed in the experimental simulation results. That is, in the actual experimental set up the capacitor ‘C1’ is decreased from C1 = 85 nF downward to 45 nF. Therefore in the numerical simulation, we study the corresponding Eqns. (3) for in the range C1 = 85 nF to 45 nF. From our numerical investigations, we find that for the value of ‘C1’ below 85 nF periodic limit cycle motions is obtained. When the value of ‘C1’ is decreased to lower than 45 nF particularly in the range C1 = (85 nF to 45 nF) the system displays a perioddoubling route to chaos and then to hyperchaos through boundary condition [8]. These numerical results of the hyperchaotic attractor of fifth-order autonomous circuit with the smooth cubic nonlinearity projected onto different planes are shown in Fig. 5. Figure 6. Shows the numerical chaotic time series was registered using a discrete value of ‘C2’ serving as the control parameter. It is gratifying to note that the numerical results agree qualitatively very well with that of the experimental simulation results.
CONCLUSIONS
We have designed and investigated a hyperchaotic behavior of a fifth-order autonomous electric circuit. The circuit provides a higher bandwidth of strong chaotic signal with buffered output. Functionally was demonstrated using a commercial voltage feedback op-amp. Its simplicity arises from the fact that (i) The negative conductance is a simple op-amp impedance converter. (ii) The simple nonlinear element is synthesized from general purpose diode (1N4148 diode). (iii) The circuit equations are the most simple because of there is no locally active resistor (R) in the circuit, where the capacitance (C1) as the control parameter. The attractive features of this circuit are the presence of period-doubling route to chaos and then to hyperchaos followed by perioddoubling windows and boundary crisis etc. It is of further interest to study these aspects also in this system as well as the intermittency route to chaos and synchronization of coupled chaotic circuits of the present system for improved high security communication systems.
Englishhttp://ijcrr.com/abstract.php?article_id=1681http://ijcrr.com/article_html.php?did=16811. I.M. Kyprianidis, I.N. Stouboulos, P. Haralabidis and T. Bountis Int. J. Bifurc. and Chaos. 8 (2000) 1903.
2. L.O. Chua and G.N. Lin IEEE Trans. Circ. Syst. CAS-38 (1991) 510.
3. M.P Kennedy IEEE Trans. Circ. Syst. I. 40 (1993) 640. 4. K. Murali and M. Lakshmanan Int. J. Bifurc. and Chaos. 1 (1991) 369.
5. T. Motsumoto, L.O. Chua and K. Kobaiashi, IEEE Trans. Circ. Syst. CAS-33 (1986) 1143. 6. A. Tamasevicius, A. Namajunas and A. Cenys Electron. Lett. 32 (1996) 957.
7. K. Thamilmaran, M. Lakshmanan and A. Venkatesan Int. J. Bifurc. and Chaos.14 (2004) 221.
8. R. Barboza Int. J. Bifurc. and Chaos. 18 (2008) 1151.
9. L.O. Chua and G.N. Lin IEEE Trans. Circ. Syst. 37 (1990) 885.
10. V. Balachandran and G. Kandiban Indian J. Pure and Appl. Phys. 47 (2009) 823.
11. A. Tamasevicius, A. Cenys, G. Mykolaitis, A. Namajunas and E. Lindberg Electron. Lett. 33 (1997) 542.
12. A. Tamasevicius and A. Cenys Chaos, Solit. and Fract. 9 (1998) 115.
13. C.L. Koliopanos, I.M. Kyprianidis, I.N. Stouboulos, A.N. Anagnostopoulos and L. Magafas Chaos, Solit. and Fract. 16 (2003) 173.
14. X. Liu, J. Wang and L. Huang Int. J. Bifurc. and Chaos. 17 (2007) 2705.
15. R. Barboza and L.O. Chua Int. J. Bifurc. and Chaos. 18 (2008) 943.
16. T. Kapitaniak and L.O. Chua Int. J. Bifurc. and Chaos. 4 (1994) 477.
17. G.P. King and S.T. Gaito Phys. Rev. A. 46 (1992) 3093.